Specification Book PDF

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION
FOR
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
FOR
Cavalier Produce
Charlottesville, VA 22902
Project No. 101408
All concepts and arrangements disclosed or presented

herein are the property of Food Tech LLC. These
documents are loaned to prospective Contractors specifically
for this project and may not be reprinted, copied in whole or
in part, nor given to others, nor communicated to any third
party except for purposes for which they are loaned. Any
disclosures, or reuse of these documents for purposes not
specifically related to this project without the express written
permission of Food Tech LLC is detrimental to Food Tech
LLC's interests and is a violation of its proprietary rights.
December 2014
Designing & Building Innovative & Efficient Food Facilities.

SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01010 - Summary of Work

01030 - Bid Alternates
01050 - Field Engineering
01300 - Submittals
01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
01600 - Materials and Equipment
01700 - Contract Closeout
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

03367 - Specially Placed Concrete Floor Slabs
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05120 - Structural Steel

05210 - Steel Joists and Joist Girders
05311 - Steel Deck
05400 - Light Gauge Metal Framing
05500 - Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD
Section 06112 - Rough Carpentry

06200 - Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation

07533 - Roofing & Sheet Metal
07615 - Dock and Door Canopies
07724 - Roof Hatches
07900 - Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08111 - Hollow Metal Doors, Frames & Windows

08211 - Wood Doors
08300 - High Speed Doors
08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors
08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
08520 - Aluminum Windows
08710 - Finish Hardware
08800 - Glazing
Cavalier Produce Page 1 of 3 Table of Contents

Food Tech Inc. January 5, 2015
Specifications
Table of Contents
(continued)
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board

09311 - Ceramic Tile
09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
09651 - Resilient Wall Base
09686 - Carpeting
09700 - Polished Concrete Finishing
09900 - Painting
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section 10160 - Toilet Compartments

10508 - Metal Lockers
10800 - Toilet and Washroom Accessories
10950 - Class I Lightning Protection System
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Section 11163 - Loading Dock Equipment

11551 - Pallet Racks
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12484 - Entrance Mats & Grids
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13070 - Thermal Insulation

13090 - Thermal Doors
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION
Section 15010 - General Requirements

15290 - Heat Tape
15400 - Plumbing
15600 - HVAC
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
Section 16010 - General Requirements

16050 - Basic Materials and Methods Requirements
16175 - Standby Electric Power System (Diesel)
16200 - Service and Distribution
16250 - Grounding
16300 - Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment
16300 - Process, Mechanical & Refrigeration Equipment

Food Tech Inc. November 19, 2014
Specifications
Table of Contents
(continued)
16300 - Refrigeration/Mechanical Equipment & Connections

16300 - Refrigeration/Mechanical Equipment & Motor Control Center
16300 - Motor Control Center Soft Start Controller
16345 - Freezer Floor Warming
16500 - Lighting System
16721 - Fire Alarm System
16751 - Spec Systems Raceway System
DIVISION 17B – REFRIGERATION FREON
Section 17010 - Basic Refrigeration Requirements

17060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings
17140 - Supports and Anchors
17670 - Condensing Units
17750 - Air Units
17900 - Painting and Coatings
17910 - Refrigeration System Insulation
END

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 01030 – Bid Alternates
B. 01050 – Field Engineering
C. 01300 – Submittals
D. 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
E. 01600 – Materials and Equipment
F. 01700 – Contract Closeout
1.2 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The general building permit will be obtained by the General Contractor. Permit fee shall be
paid by the General Contractor but will be reimbursed by the Owner. Each trade contractor
shall obtain any trade permits for their work (permit fees reimbursed by Owner).
1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE
A. The project schedule is a condition for bidding this work.
B. The project schedule will be updated by the General Contractor on a regular basis and
distributed to the Owner and Engineer.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. The General Contractor will conduct weekly construction coordination meetings; held in the
General Contractor’s on-site office.
B. The purpose of these meetings is to assist in coordination and to review the progress of
the work in relation to the project schedule. Work planned for the upcoming week will be
reviewed, including material deliveries, crew sizes and timing.
C. The General Contractor will record meeting minutes and distribute to the Owner and
Engineer.
1.5 WORKING CONDITIONS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. This work is to be under the supervision of a qualified representative of the General
Contractor. This supervision may not be withdrawn from the project once started unless
the Owner is in agreement.
B. It is expected that the General Contractor will work closely with the Owner and Engineer
during construction and furnish all requested information.
C. During construction, the existing facility will remain in continuous operation.
D. All breaks and meals shall be taken at a location designated by the General Contractor;
not inside the existing or additions under construction.
E. General Contractor shall use only the parking facilities designated for use by the Owner.
1.6 CONTRACTOR’S GUIDELINES
A. Communications
1. All communications regarding the work, field changes, and/or unforeseeable items
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 01010 – Summary of Work

should be directed to the Owner and Engineer.
2. All activities having financial or schedule impact on the project must be
communicated to the Owner and Engineer immediately.
B. Working Hours
1. Working hours are limited to 7AM to 6PM; the General Contractor shall be on-site
during all construction activities. Saturdays and Sundays are available by prior
arrangement. Scheduled working hours must be established with the Owner
before work begins.
C. Premium Time
1. All utility tie-ins and shutdowns will be done during off-hours. General Contractor
shall carry the cost of premium time to complete this work.
D. Record Documents
1. General Contractor shall be responsible for keeping an up-to-date set of record
drawings and specifications on-site. These documents shall reflect all changes to
the work.
E. Safety
1. Comply with OSHA regulations at all times.
2. If the General Contractor observes and unsafe act, it shall be corrected
immediately.
3. General Contractor shall provide all necessary safety equipment for their
employees.
a. Shoes must be leather work shoes.
b. All employees shall be provided hard hats, and vision and hearing
protection.
c. Appropriate attire must be worn for the work being performed.
4. Hard hats, safety glasses and shirts shall be worn at all times.
5. Hot work permits will be required for all welding or cutting operations within the
existing facility. Hot work permits shall be completed and filed with the General
Contractor prior to beginning work.
6. All issues involving alarm systems for fire or security must be coordinated with the
Owner prior to any work beginning.
1.7 OWNER’S GOOD MANUFACTURING PRACTICES
A. The General Contractor shall not enter the existing facilities unless directly related to work
in progress. All employees will abide by the regulations set forth by the Owner for their
own employees, rules are as follows:
1. The General Contractor will administer a system of visitor passes for workmen
who are permitted to enter the existing facility.
2. Shoes shall be closed toe and closed heel, of sturdy construction to afford some
impact protection. Only low heeled, leather/vinyl type shoes are permitted.
B. When work must be performed inside the Owner’s existing facility, the following rules shall
be strictly observed.
1. No smoking, eating or drinking.

2. No engine exhaust fumes.
3. All welding shall be conducted behind screens and over floor protection.
4. Owner’s product, equipment, etc. to be protected from welding sparks and welding
smoke if to be removed from the building.
5. No partaking of the Owner’s products for personal or other use.
1.8 CONFIDENTIALITY, THE MEDIA, AND MARKETING PRESENTATION
A. All information pertaining to the project is strictly confidential and not to be discussed or
distributed outside the project team. No one is to make any statements regarding the
project to the media, regardless of the circumstance(s).
B. All requests for interviews, information, etc. should be referred to the Owner for follow-up.
C. The representation of your company’s role in the project for marketing purposes is
encouraged subject to the following rules:
1. All photographs and text are approved in advance by the Owner.
2. The release of construction costs or confidential information is prohibited.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01030 BID ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal conditions.
B. Listing of alternates.
A. 01010 – Summary of Work
B. 01030 – Bid Alternates
C. 01050 – Field Engineering
D. 01300 – Submittals
E. 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
F. 01600 – Materials and Equipment
G. 01700 – Contract Closeout
1.3 SUBMITTAL CONDITIONS
A. In addition to the Basic Bid, costs shall be submitted for the Alternates as listed on the Bid
Form, and as described in the following.
B. All pertinent requirements of the Bid Documents for the Project shall apply equally to the
work of the Alternates, as though fully included herein.
C. In the Bid Proposal Form the Alternates are listed as additive to or deductive from the
Basic Bid; the Basic Bid is to be complete without consideration of any Alternate.
1. A separate cost for addition or deduction of a lump sum, for each Alternate, shall
be noted in the appropriate space(s) in the Bid Form.
D. By submitting a figure, the General Contractor offers to add or delete the Alternates for the
cost submitted; the Owner reserves the right to accept or decline any or all offers.
E. Alternate costs, as offered, shall stand for 30 calendar days following signing of the
Contract
1. The Owner reserves the right, at any time during that 30 day period, to request
inclusion of any or all Alternates at the cost offered
2. Cost adjustment(s) will be made for any additional work required, due to the
necessity of modifying work already performed -- i.e. modifications which would
not have been necessary had the Alternate been initially accepted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 1 01030 – Bid Alternate

Food Tech, Inc. January 5, 2015
SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements
B. Quality Control
C. Project Record Documents
C. 01300 – Submittals
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Contractor shall employ a land surveyor, registered at the place where the
project is located, to lay-out all elements of construction.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROLS
A. Verify locations and elevations of control points and benchmarks, if any, provided by the
Owner.
B. Immediately notify the Owner and Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Control points and on-site benchmarks shall be protected during construction.
D. Periodically verify layout during construction.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a complete and accurate log of survey and control work as the Project
progresses.
B. Record locations of all improvements, with horizontal and vertical data, on Record
Documents.
C. Submit complete Record Documents, under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 1 01050 – Field Engineering

SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Submittal Requirements
B. The type of submittal requirements specified in this section include:
1. Product Information
2. Colors
3. Record Information
4. Tests and Certificates
5. Installation Data
C. Additional individual submittal requirements may be specified in applicable sections for
each unit of work
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submittals shall be made with such promptness as to cause no delay in the work.
B. All Shop Drawings are required to be reviewed by the General Contractor for correctness
prior to submittal to the Owner and Engineer. If it appears to the Owner and/or Engineer
that the General Contractor has not made a diligent review of the submittals and/or has
flagrantly disregarded the specifications, or their intent, the submittals will be returned to
the General Contractor and, at the Owner’s option, the General Contractor will be back-
charged for the cost of the Engineer re-checking the submittals. In general, any second re-
submission will be considered as a lack of diligence on the part of the General Contractor.
In addition, any first submission, which is sufficiently in error to illustrate that the submittals
were not properly checked, will be considered evidence of a lack of diligence on the part of
the General Contractor.
C. Submit six (6) copies of all required submittals for approval, unless noted otherwise. The
Owner and Engineer will retain three (3) copies and return three (3) to the General
Contractor.
D. Accompany each submittal with a dated, signed and sequence numbered transmittal form.
Include on this form, identification of drawing numbers and specification section and
paragraph numbers to which the submittal pertains.
E. Prepare shop drawings at the General Contractor's expense and send to the Owner and
Engineer, shipping prepaid.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 01300 – Submittals

F. If first or subsequent submittal is stamped "not approved/resubmit," take corrective action
and resubmit using submittal procedure same as for first submittal. Direct specific
attention, in writing, on resubmittal showing drawing revisions other than the corrections
requested by the Owner or Engineer on previous submissions.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The term "shop drawings" as used herein include detailing, fabrication, erection, and
installation, layout and setting drawings; wiring and control diagrams; and other drawings.
B. Include on shop drawings required to show that fabricated materials, equipment or
systems, and the positions thereof, conform to the Contract Documents.
C. Prepare shop drawings to establish the actual detail of all fabricated items; indicating
proper relation of adjoining work, amplifying design details of mechanical and electrical
equipment in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure, and incorporating minor
changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions/field dimensions.
D. Prepare shop drawings to scale, completely dimensioned.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. The term "product date" as used herein includes manufacturer's standard drawings,
certificates of conformance and other data.
B. Provide manufacturer's preprinted literature including, without limitation, manufacturer's
standard printed description of product, materials and construction recommendations for
application and use, certification of compliance with standards; instructions for installation
and special coordination requirements. Mark each copy to show which choices and
options are applicable to project.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. The term "samples" as used herein includes both fabricated and unfabricated physical
examples of materials, products and units of work, either for limited visual inspection of
(where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis, or other samples.
B. Furnish for review samples of the various materials, finished as specified to be used on or
in the work.
C. Materials, finishes, and workmanship in the completed building shall be equal in every
respect to that of the review sample.
1.7 ENGINEER’S ACTION
A. The Engineer will review the submittals and will affix a shop drawing stamp as follows
1. Submittals stamped "approved as submitted" require no further action and
fabrication or construction may proceed.
2. Submittals stamped "approved as noted" require no further action and fabrication
or construction may proceed, contingent upon all corrections being made as
noted.
3. Submittals stamped "not approved/resubmit" require the General Contractor to
resubmit them, and no fabrication or construction may begin.
B. The "normal turnaround" time for an individual "set" of Shop Drawings will be a maximum
of 10 working days (not including mailing time).
1. If the General Contractor submits Shop Drawings in groups, the "normal
turnaround" time may be extended as necessary by the Engineer. No shop
drawings will be accepted which cover substitutions or alternates not previously
approved.
C. The Engineer will check and take action on submittals only for conformance with the
design concept of the project and compliance with the contract documents.
D. The Engineer’s review of submittals will be general only and not relieve the General
Contractor from responsibility for errors, deviations from drawings or specifications, or
conflict with the work of others that may result from such deviations. Engineer’s review of
a separate item does not indicate a review of an assembly in which the item functions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Temporary Utilities and Services
B. Temporary Controls
C. Construction Facilities
D. Refuse and Debris
E. 01410 – Inspections and Testing
F. 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
G. 01600 – Materials and Equipment
H. 01700 – Contract Closeout
1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND SERVICES
A. Temporary electrical service for construction purposes shall be provided by the General
Contractor and maintained by him for the duration of the Project.
1. Temporary electrical service shall be 480/3/60 Hz.
2. 120V, single phase power shall be provided at temporary panels within 150' of any
point within the building area.
3. Extension cords, for use from temporary power locations, is the responsibility of
the General Contractor.
B. Temporary lighting, of not less than 10 FC in work areas shall be provided by the General
Contractor. Permanent fixtures may be installed, in lieu of temporary fixtures, for lighting
at such time as the roofing is complete and watertight. Refer to Division 16 for additional
instructions.
C. Temporary water service shall be provided by the General Contractor, from existing
building hose bibs.
D. Portable toilet facilities will be provided for the duration of the project by the General
Contractor.
E. If required, temporary building heat will be provided by the General Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. The heating units will be indirect fired and/or fully vented in
order to maintain the CO2 level in the building below 0.005% and shall be capable of
maintaining the temperature in the building at 50ºF.
F. Temporary ventilation shall be provided by the General Contractor to satisfy safety and
material product installation requirements.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temp Controls
G. All utility service charges shall be paid by the Owner, except those for site office
telephone(s).
1.4 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. General Contractor shall install barricades, protective enclosures and other temporary
controls, as necessary to provide proper working environments for workers and protect
completed work or equipment from construction activities.
B. General Contractor shall barricade all work areas involving cutting activities.
C. General Contractor is responsible for taking every precaution to control and eliminate dust
within the work area. Work areas shall be separated from existing building areas by
temporary, sealed partitions.
D. Provide protection for finished surfaces as called for in specific Specification Sections.
E. Temporary controls shall be removed at the conclusion of the Work.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. The General Contractor will have an on-site project trailer, including a table and seating to
accommodate job meetings.
1.6 REFUSE AND DEBRIS
A. Dumpsters will be provided by the General Contractor.
B. General Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the premises (i.e. the building(s) and
adjacent areas) free of refuse and debris from his work. This includes clean-up after
meals.
1. The premises shall be kept free of refuse and debris at all times. The Owner
reserves the right to have dirt and debris removed from areas that have not been
unsatisfactorily maintained and to backcharge the General Contractor.
C. Strict precautions shall be taken by the General Contractor to prevent spillage of oil,
grease, fuel, hydraulic fluid, etc.
1. The General Contractor will be held responsible for all costs arising from cleanup
of spills at paving, floor slabs, etc.; including possible repair or removal and
replacement of damaged areas.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to insure that all of his
subcontractors and/or vendors comply with the requirements of this Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temp Controls
SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Products
B. Transportation and Handling
C. Storage and Protection
D. Owner Furnished Items
F. 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
G. 01700 – Contract Closeout
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Products: New material, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work.
B. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.
C. Do not reuse materials and equipment removed from an existing facility, except as
specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Upon receipt, promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with
requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to unload and handle products by methods which will
prevent soiling, or damage.
1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals
and labels intact and legible.
B. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. For exterior
storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
C. Provide off-site storage and protection, when the site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.
D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation
to avoid condensation.
E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 01600 – Materials and Equipment
with foreign matter.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods which will prevent soiling,
or damage.
G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 01600 – Materials and Equipment
SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Closeout Procedures
B. Final Cleaning
C. Adjusting
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
E. Training Sessions
F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
G. Project Record Documents
F. 01500 – Construction Facilities and temporary Controls
G. 01600 – Materials and Equipment
1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. The General Contractor shall refer to the Contract Documents, regarding Substantial
Completion, Occupancy by the Owner, Final Inspection, Final Application for Payment, etc.
B. The General Contractor must notify the Owner and Engineer, in writing, at such time as he
feels that the work is substantially complete and ready for final inspection.
C. The General Contractor may not make application for final payment until all corrections to
the work have been made, to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer and until the
General Contractor has submitted all documentation required by the Contract Documents.
D. The General Contractor shall obtain signed receipts from the Owner in return for providing
the deliverables (i.e. O&M Manuals, Spare Parts, Maintenance Supplies, Warranties,
Record Drawings, etc) required by this Specification.
1.4 FINAL CLEANING
A. Final cleaning shall be done prior to final inspection; all materials used must be appropriate
for the surfaces being cleaned.
B. Labels and markings shall be removed.
C. All exposed material surfaces shall be cleaned in the appropriate manner.
D. Equipment and fixtures shall be cleaned to a sanitary condition.
E. Refuse and debris shall be removed from roofs, steel girts, gutters, and drains.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 01700 – Contract Closeout

Downspouts and leaders shall be clean and free draining.
F. Refuse and debris shall be removed from all building areas.
G. Refuse and debris, and waste or surplus materials, shall be removed from the site.
1. The site shall be left clean: paved and concrete flatwork areas shall be left "broom
clean"; soils areas shall be left "rake clean". Site drainage elements shall be left
clean and fully operative.
1.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all operating units and equipment, as required in the individual Sections of the
Specifications.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submit data as required in the individual Sections of the Specifications. Include
warranties.
B. Material shall be submitted, complete and appropriately indexed, with names of all parties
involved clearly noted.
C. Material shall be submitted, properly organized and titled, in large 3-ring binders.
D. Three (3) copies shall be submitted to the Owner prior to submitting request for final
payment.
1.7 TRAINING
A. Prior to final completion by the General Contractor, the Owner's representative(s) shall be
trained in the proper operation and maintenance of operating equipment.
1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE SUPPLIES
A. Provide spare parts and maintenance supplies as required in the individual Sections of the
Specifications.
B. These shall be submitted to the Owner prior to submitting request for final payment.
1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings: Final, complete, fully legible records of all deviations made during the course of
construction shall be submitted to the Owner prior to submitting request for final payment.
B. Specifications: Final, complete, fully legible notations of all deviations (i.e. substitutions,
alternates, etc) made during the course of construction. This includes product and
material types, finishes, colors, manufacturer’s names, model numbers, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OMITTED
PART 3 EXECUTION
OMITTED
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 01700 – Contract Closeout

SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all material, labor and equipment necessary for the completion of all cast-in-place
concrete work. This includes:
1. Formwork and form accessories; including all shoring, bracing and anchorage.
2. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories.
3. Setting all sleeves, block-outs, anchor bolts and other items to be embedded into
this work.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 – Tolerances
B. ACI 301 – Structural Concrete for Buildings
C. ACI 302 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
D. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
E. ACI 305 – Hot-Weather Concreting
F. ACI 306 – Cold-Weather Concreting
G. ACI 308 – Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
H. ACI 309 – Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete
I. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
J. ACI 347 – Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
K. ACI 360 – Design of Slabs-on-Grade
L. ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual
M. ASTM A185 – Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
N. ASTM A615 – Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
O. ASTM C33 and C131 – Concrete Aggregates
P. ASTM C94 – Ready-Mixed Concrete
Q. ASTM C143 – Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
R. ASTM C150 – Portland Cement
S. ASTM C260 – Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
T. ASTM C494 – Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
U. ASTM E1155 – Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness
Using the F-Number System
V. AWS D1.4 – Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel
W. AWS D12.1 – Welding Reinforcement Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced
Concrete Construction
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Reinforcing steel shop drawings
B. Concrete and grout mix designs
C. Catalogue cuts for all admixtures, sealing and curing compounds.
D. Vapor barrier catalogue cuts
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Formwork: When required, formwork design is to be under the direct supervision of a
Professionally Licensed Structural Engineer experienced with this work and licensed in the
State of the project.
B. Welder’s Certificates: Submit certificates, certifying welders employed in the Work have
acquired AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months.
C. Batch Plant: A company specializing in performing the work of this Section, with a
minimum of 10 years documented experience.
D. Placement: A Contractor specializing in performing the work of this Section, with a
minimum of 10 years experience.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. In accordance with the General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMING MATERIALS

A. General: Forms shall conform to ACI requirements.
B. Formwork: Plywood or prefabricated forms with contact faces free of defects; sound
undamaged surfaces with clean, true edges.
C. Form Ties: Plastic cone type removable ties with snap-off galvanized metal having 1”
back-break dimension.
D. Form Release Agent: Non-staining mineral oil that will not absorb moisture or impair
normal bonding or color characteristics of coating(s) intended for use on concrete.
E. Corners: Wood or plastic rigid strips for ¾” fillets and chamfers at all exposed corners,
unless specifically detailed otherwise.
F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts and Metal Accessories (Inserts): Size as required,
of sufficient strength and proper type to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
G. Water Stop: Non-structural, bentonite clay material in a water activated package.
2.2 REINFORCING STEEL
A. All reinforcing shall be free of loose rust or scale, grease or other coating that would
prevent a concrete bond.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 or ASTM A706; intermediate grade, new,
unfinished, deformed billet steel.
C. Bent Ties, Stirrups, Etc: ASTM A615, Grade 40, unfinished.
D. Welded Steel Wire Mesh Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type reinforcing, unfinished. For slabs;
shall be flat sheets (not coiled), have 6” overlap and be supported on chairs.

E. Tie Wire: Soft annealed black steel wire, minimum 16 BWG, single-stranded.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II gray Portland cement.
B. Coarse and Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33 and ASTM C131, unless otherwise noted.
C. Coarse aggregate for cast-in-place concrete shall be clean, washed material, 1-1/2" minus
in size; unless otherwise noted.
1. Coarse aggregate for concrete poured on metal pan stair treads shall be pea-
gravel size.
D. Fine aggregate (sand) for slabs-on-grade shall be natural sand, not manufactured.
E. Water: Clean and potable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260; for concrete exposed to weather (except foundations).
B. Admixtures for modifying concrete setting time, and/or for increasing workability, may be
used at the discretion of the Contractor at no additional cost. The Contractor assumes full
responsibility.
1. Accelerators: ASTM C494, Type C or E (containing no more chloride ions than
potable water).
2. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type A (containing no more than
0.05% chloride ions).
C. The use of admixtures shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS
A. The concrete mix designs shall be proportioned in accordance with Section 5.3 of ACI 318,
“Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixture”. The proportions of
ingredients shall produce a mixture that is compatible with the placing, consolidating and
finishing methods to be used on the project, but without segregation or excessive free
water.
B. Unless shown otherwise, where structural notes are included, concrete shall be batched
and mixed to achieve the following:
Description Min. f’c
Footings & Foundation Walls 3,000 psi
Interior Slabs-on-Grade 3,500 psi
Metal Stair Pan Fill. 3,500 psi
Above Grade Construction 3,000 psi
Exterior Slabs-on-Grade (UNO on Construction Drawings) 2,500 psi
C. Unless otherwise noted, the following are the maximum ratios of water to cementitious
materials (w/c ratio):
1. 3,000 psi concrete: max. w/c = 0.55

D. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: ASTM C1107, Type C factory premixed grout with
minimum 1,000 psi compressive strength at 1 day and minimum 5,000 psi compressive
strength at 28 days.
E. NOTE: No flyash or pozzolans shall be used.
F. Under certain circumstances, concrete slump may be modified; for uncommon aggregate
types, pumping, weather conditions, etc. Such modification is at the discretion of the
Contractor and resulting conditions are his sole responsibility.
2.6 CURING COMPOUND
A. Curing compound shall be a high-solids (high-moisture retention), transparent, non-
yellowing, USDA approved, membrane-forming, dissipating resin conforming to ASTM
C309. Application shall be spray-applied, at a rate of 200 SF/gal per coat.
B. If used in an area where floor finish materials will be applied, curing compound shall meet
the requirements of the Asphalt and Vinyl Tile Institute.
C. Curing compound shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
2.7 JOINT FILLER MATERIAL
A. Isolation Joint Filler (Interior Slabs): Pre-molded ½” thick sponge rubber, fully-
compressible, with minimum recovery rate of 95%.
B. Construction, Expansion or Isolation Joint Filler (Exterior Slabs): Pre-molded, non-
asphaltic, non-staining, non-extruding, fuel-resistant material.
2.8 SLAB ACCESSORIES
A. Edge Forms: 2” thick Douglas Fir planks, surfaced one side and two edges.
B. Dowels: Plain (smooth) steel bars conforming to ASTM A675, Grade 60, or A499. Ends of
dowels shall be sawcut, not sheared. Dowels at sawcuts shall be chair supported and at
construction joints supported in accurately bored holes in bulkheads.
C. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during concrete placement, including load bearing bottom pad or runners
where necessary (over insulation and/or vapor barrier).
D. Interior:
1. Stay-in-Place Forms: Provide at all perimeter wall columns. Forms shall be 24 ga.
metal, 2” less than the floor slab thickness. Bend around column bases and firmly
stake in place with the top 2” below the top surface of the concrete.
2. Flexible Foam Expansion Joint Filler: For use where slabs abut all walls, bollards
and columns. Shall be preformed, closed-well, non-extruding resilient type, ½”
thick flexible polyethylene or polyurethane. Material shall have a maximum
compression of 10 psi at 50% deformation according to ASTM D1621 or D3575.
Material shall be full slab depth.
3. Joint Filler (at sawcuts and construction joints): Semi-rigid, two-part, self-leveling,
flexible epoxy. Cut flush with top of slab. MM-80 by Metzger-McGuire or approved
equal.
4. Joint Sealant (over expansion joint material): One-part moisture curing, gun grade
polyurethane sealant. Vulkem 921 or approved equal.

E. Exterior:
1. Expansion Joint Filler: Installed at all construction joints, between slab and gutter
sections and against building foundation walls. Shall be ½” thick and full thickness
of slab. Shall be asphalt type control joint. Install pre-punched for dowel bars and
recessed ¼” below the top-of-slab.
2. Chemical Sealer: Two-component, 100% solids, penetrating high-build epoxy
coating system. Pentox 50 by L&M Construction Chemicals or approved equal.
Application rate is 250 sf/gal.
2.9 PERIMETER FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene: 2” thick, minimum 1.6 pcf density, minimum 25 psi compressive
value, "K" factor of 0.18, and flame spread of 25 or less.
2.10 VAPOR BARRIER
A. Where recommended by the Geotechnical Report and in all areas having a subsequent
finish such as carpet, VCT, or urethane floor finish, provide an underfloor vapor barrier.
Material shall be Moistop 200 or 10 mil Stego.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify line, level and centers before proceeding with work. Confirm that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.2 FORMWORK
A. Construct formwork that is sufficiently strong to carry the weight of concrete in a liquid
state with no appreciable deflection, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete, and
braced or tied together to maintain correct alignment and dimensions.
B. Forms shall be clean prior to concrete placement, free of all foreign matter. During cold
weather, remove ice and snow from form surfaces prior to setting. The use of de-icing
salts is prohibited.
C. Form and place openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, nosings,
dowels, other inserts and components required by other trades; including embedded
angles, channels and plates furnished under Division 5. Install accessories straight, level
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. Obtain approval
from the Construction Manager prior to framing any openings in structural members not
shown on the drawings.
1. Coordinate locations with Site, Architectural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical
Drawings, and other trade contractors. This contractor will be responsible for core
drilling or saw cutting completed work, if block-outs or sleeves shown on the
drawings are omitted.
D. Provide fillets and/or chamfers at all exposed corners, unless detailed otherwise.
E. Apply form release agent prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and/or
embedded items. Coat cone type removable ties at exposed surfaces to facilitate removal.
Keep all surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
F. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its
own weight and imposed loads. Loosen forms carefully, do not wedge pry bars, hammers
or other tools against finished concrete. Store removed forms to protect contact faces
from damage, discard damaged forms.
G. Flatwork: After stripping edge forms, stone the edges and remove any excess concrete or

latency.
H. NOTE: Unless specifically noted or detailed otherwise, earth forms will be allowed if
approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. If allowed, hand trim sides and bottom, removing
loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.3 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Fabrication and placing of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with ACI 315.
B. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from
required position. Maintain minimum cover around reinforcing as follows:
1. Concrete poured against earth 3”
2. Formed concrete with earth backfill 2”
3. Walls exposed to weather, etc 1½”
4. Slabs on grade (from top) 1½”
C. NOTE: In general, slab on grade reinforcement shall be placed in the top third of the slab
depth.
D. Reinforcing steel shall accommodate placement of formed openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts and components. If present, do not
displace or damage vapor/moisture barrier.
E. Locate reinforcing splices, not indicated on drawings, at points of minimum stress. Review
such splice locations with Construction Manager.
3.4 PREPARATION OF PLACE OF DEPOSIT
A. Before placing concrete, all debris shall be removed from the place of deposit.
B. For interior slabs:
1. Preparation by Site Contractor will leave sub-grade between +0’ and -0.1’ of
bottom of slab. This contractor shall provide material and final grading to finish
sub-grade surface between +0” and –½” of bottom of slab. All slabs must be full
design thickness. Sub-grade must be approved by Testing Agency prior to slab
placement.
2. Wrap expansion joint material around steel columns and bollards and set against
abutting wall surfaces. Install stay in place forms at perimeter wall columns.
Install all embedded angles, sleeves or other inserts.
3. Install under slab vapor barrier if recommended by the Geotechnical Report or if
the slab will receive a subsequent finish. Tape or seal all joints per
recommendations of the vapor barrier material manufacturer.
4. Place reinforcing steel, support rebar on metal chairs with full sand plates. At
construction and saw cut control joints, all reinforcing shall be held back a
minimum of 2" on both sides of the joint.
5. Install dowels at all construction joints and saw cuts, or as otherwise noted on the
drawings. Grease one end of all dowels. Pre-position dowels at saw cuts on
basket type chairs. Hold dowel baskets back from construction joint corners 3’-0”.
6. Provide water for sub-grade preparation, curing, concrete saw-cutting, and
equipment clean-up.
7. Provide temporary ventilation during slab placement. If temporary lighting (20 fc)
provided by the electrical contractor is not sufficient, provide additional temporary

lighting.
C. The Construction Manager and Testing Agency shall be notified for readiness for
observation in time to complete inspection prior to concrete placement. Notify local
building department officials as required.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. All pours shall be scheduled with the Construction Manager a minimum of 24 hours prior to
placement.
B. Concrete shall be mixed, conveyed and deposited in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI
614.
C. Delivery slips shall be presented to the Testing Agency upon delivery of concrete to the job
site. Delivery slip shall note the mix and slump, and be signed by an authorized employee
of the "Ready Mix" Company. Testing Agency shall provide copies of all delivery slips to
Construction Manager within 24 hours of concrete delivery.
D. After the ready-mix truck has been dispatched from the batch plant, water may only be
added with the approval of the Testing Agency.
E. Concrete shall be delivered between +40F and +90F. The ready-mix supplier shall take all
measures necessary to ensure these temperature limits are not exceeded.
F. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not interrupt
successive placements; allowing cold joints to occur. When absolutely necessary, an
unplanned construction joint may be placed at a location approved by the Construction
Manager.
G. Consolidate concrete by careful, thorough mechanical vibration. Ensure that
reinforcement, and other embedded items, are not disturbed during concrete placement.
H. Following placement and/or form removal, concrete shall be protected from premature
drying, excessive temperatures, rain, flowing water, frost or mechanical injury. Forms
exposed to sun shall be kept wet until removal. The temperature of the air next to the
concrete shall be maintained at not less than +50F.
I. Exterior Slabs: Joints and edges shall be radius tooled. Surfaces shall be lightly broom
finished for slip resistance, transverse to the direction of travel.
J. Interior Slabs (Vapor Barrier): Whether shown on drawings or not, all concrete to receive
floor covering such as tile, carpet, seamless composition flooring, etc., shall have a vapor
barrier installed under the slab.
K. Interior Slabs: Shall be troweled to a fine, hard, dense, non-dusting, non-slip burnished
finish (hard trowel finish), unless otherwise required by a floor covering material. All
concrete to receive floor covering such as tile, carpet, seamless composition flooring, etc.,
shall be finished to achieve a proper bond to the finish work. Additionally, verify
compatibility of curing compound with finish work in these areas.
L. Foundation Walls and General Concrete: All concrete surface treatments and finishing
shall conform to ACI 302, unless otherwise specified herein:
1. Plastic snap tie inserts shall be removed at all exposed locations.
2. All concrete exposed to view shall have a smooth rubbed finish of uniform color
and texture. Form tie holes, bung holes greater than ½" deep or in diameter shall
be filled with sand grout and the surfaces rubbed, within 24 hours of form removal,
to remove fin marks and similar defects. The application of parging material to
cover a honeycombed wall surface is not acceptable. Concrete not exposed to
view shall have all tie holes patched and all honeycombed surfaces filled with
cement mortar if the size of the defect exceeds ½" in depth.

3. Concrete wall top surfaces shall have grade controlled by setting screed strips
inside the form work. Steel trowel the concrete surface to a flat and true plane.
4. Interior curbs shall have trowel finish on top surface and smooth finish on vertical
surface.
M. Curing Compound: Apply one coat of spray-on curing compound to formed concrete
surfaces immediately after stripping forms. Apply two coats of spray-on curing compound,
with the manufacturer’s recommended drying time between coats, to flatwork immediately
following troweling (when visible surface water has disappeared and slab can be walked on
without scarring the surface), but prior to saw cutting. Curing compound shall be applied in
a smooth, neat manner to avoid smearing or ponding marks; puddles or excessive
materials shall be carefully blotted up. When interior slabs are poured prior to the building
being enclosed, a protective white polyethylene sheet shall be placed over the slab,
following drying of the curing compound, until the building is closed in.
N. Immediately after completing finishing, snap chalk lines to locate saw cuts and apply curing
compound. Saw cuts shall be made with a soffcut concrete saw as soon as surface can
be sawn without raveling. All joints shall be sawn for sealant; 1/8" to 1/4" wide, depth as
noted on the drawings. Complete saw cutting within 2 hours of concrete finishing, remove
cutting dust. Joints shall not be sealed until slabs have cured a minimum of 30 days.
O. Patching: Concrete which is not formed as shown on the drawings or for any reason is out
of alignment or level, or shows a defective surface, shall be considered as not conforming,
and be removed by the Contractor at his expense, unless the Construction Manager grants
permission to patch the defective area. Permission to patch in any such area shall not be
considered a waiver of the Construction Manager’s right to require complete removal of the
defective work, if the patching does not, in his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality and
appearance of the surface.
P. Minimum finish tolerance numbers are Overall F F 30/F L 20 and Local F F 20/F L 15. Elevation
tolerance is the finish floor elevation shown on the drawings, plus or minus ¾”, non-
cumulative. Out-of-tolerance work shall be immediately brought to the attention of the
Construction Manager. Repair or replacement will be the responsibility of this contractor,
at no additional cost.
1. Out-of-tolerance correction of any individual random traffic test section which
measures less than either of the specified local numbers will be rejected. When
all test section results have been combined, any entire random traffic floor area
(as bounded by construction joints) which measures less than either of the
specified overall numbers will be rejected. NOTE: Repair may be by either
removal and/or replacement of the entire slab area, by grinding (a maximum of
1/8" may be removed from any high area, filling will not be allowed), or by chipping
out a ¾" to 1" depth and topping.
3.6 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete placed in cold weather shall be placed in accordance with ACI 306 and ACI 318.
No concrete shall be placed unless the air temperature is at least +40F and rising, unless
pour location is properly enclosed and/or heated to the Construction Manager’s
satisfaction.
B. Before concrete placement; all ice, snow, and frost shall be completely removed and the
temperature of all surfaces to be in contact with concrete raised above the freezing point.
No concrete shall be placed on a frozen sub-grade or one that contains frozen materials.
C. Placing and Curing: All concrete placed in forms shall have a temperature between +50F
and +70F. Maintain the concrete at a temperature of not less than +70F for 3 days or
+50F for 5 days. The housing, covering or other protection shall remain in place and intact
at least 24 hours after the artificial heating is discontinued.

D. Form removal shall be as specified, except that removal shall be delayed when the air
temperature falls below +50F. Otherwise, walls shall be protected by insulated blankets or
enclosures until the temperature and duration requirements above are met.
3.7 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete placed in hot weather shall conform to ACI 305R. Concrete shall be delivered to
the job site with a temperature of +90F or less. Concrete temperatures in excess of +90F
shall be rejected and ice or liquid nitrogen added at the batch plant to chill the concrete.
B. If concrete temperatures are in excess of +80F, mix time limits shall be reduced from 1½
hours to 1 hour.
3.8 SPECIFIC WORK
A. Grout: All column base plates, equipment bases, pre-cast wall panel erection pads and
other locations noted on the structural drawings shall be grouted. Grout shall be well
puddled and tamped during pouring to obtain a tight seal between members.
1. Leveling Plates and Bearing Plates: Leveling plates for steel columns and bearing
plates for steel beams shall be set true to grade and elevation on mortar pads.
Wedge or shim in place in accordance with setting plans and templates. The
concrete surface receiving mortar shall be thoroughly wetted down and enough
mortar placed to allow shaping and compaction by light troweling. Leveling plates
and bearing plates shall be set to final position by light tamping to insure full
bearing of the plate on the mortar.
2. Base Plates: Where base plates are shop welded to columns and leveling plates
are not required by details, erect columns using double nuts on anchor bolt. Back
up one side of plate with blocking and place all grout from other side. Pack with
paddles of suitable size, shape and length.
B. Housekeeping Pads: Provide formed housekeeping pads where shown on the drawings.
Bases shall be 4” thick and located under electrical, mechanical and refrigeration
equipment as detailed. Dowel all rotating machinery bases (refrigeration compressors, air
compressors, etc) to the floor slab with drilled and grouted #4 rebar hooks spaced 12” on
center each way. Size and location of all pads shall be determined and laid out by the
trade providing the equipment.
3.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Field Inspection shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Slump test, in accordance with ASTM C143, shall be taken before each placement. The
Testing Agency has the authority (and responsibility) to refuse acceptance of concrete
when excess water has been added.
C. Four concrete test cylinders (one set) shall be taken for each class of concrete, for each
day's pour. However, in no case shall there be less than one set taken for each 100 cubic
yards of concrete poured, or 4000 square face feet of wall or slab concrete poured.
D. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one retained for further testing
if necessary. If the 28 day test is satisfactory, the reserve cylinder can be discarded.
1. To be satisfactory, none of the 28-day strength tests (average of 2 cylinders) shall
have values less than 500 psi below the specified strength. Also, the average of
three consecutive tests shall not fall below the specified strength.
2. If the tests do not meet these requirements, test the reserve cylinder at 56 days
and the Construction Manager reserves the right to require samples of hardened
concrete in the structure to be taken and tested (ASTM C42) at the expense of this
contractor.

E. Where a substantial volume of concrete is not sampled and tested accordingly, the
Construction Manager reserves the right to have samples taken from the structure and
tested (ASTM C42) at the expense of this contractor.
F. Complete records shall be kept by the Testing Agency that report test results and describe
location of where sampled concrete was placed in construction.
G. Any necessary corrective measures, removal and replacement, and/or re-testing will be at
this contractor’s expense.
3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Work that is visually objectionable, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, may require
additional corrective measures (i.e. rubbing with a carborundum brick, sacking, light
sandblasting, etc) at no additional cost.
B. Work that is structurally impaired (i.e. excessive honeycombing, exposed reinforcement,
bulges, misalignment, cracking, etc) shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost.
C. When a significant portion of a slab segment (defined by joints), is deemed defective,
remedial work shall be performed to the entire segment. Remedial work may be epoxy
grouting, chipping out and re-topping, or total replacement.
D. NOTE: The foregoing is independent of any out-of-tolerance repair called for elsewhere.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
A. All work shall be left clean and undamaged, ready for finish, sealing of joints, etc., as
appropriate, under Separate Sections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 03367 SPECIALLY PLACED CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary for the completion of all Specially
Placed Concrete Floor Slabs.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 – Tolerances
B. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
C. ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
D. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting
E. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting
F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
G. ACI 309 - Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete
H. ACI 347 – Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
I. ACI 360 - Design of Slabs-on-Grade
J. ACI 544 - Guide for Specifying, Proportioning, Mixing, Placing, and Finishing Steel Fiber
Reinforced Concrete
K. ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual
L. ASTM A616 – Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
M. ASTM C33 and C131 - Concrete Aggregates
N. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mix Concrete
O. ASTM C143 - Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
P. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
Q. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
R. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-
Number System
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete mix designs (including aggregate gradations)
B. Admixtures (catalogue cuts)
C. Reinforcing steel shop drawings; including chair supports
D. Dowels and dowel support baskets
E. Armored edge shop drawings
F. Expansion joint material
G. Joint sealants
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 8 03367 – Specially Placed Concrete Floor Slabs
H. Drawing showing all sawcut and construction joint locations, joint detailing, and slab
placement sequence
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Construction Manager will conduct a Pre-Slab Conference a minimum of two weeks
prior to scheduled placement of floor slabs.
B. The Floor Slab Contractor shall ensure that all submittals have been submitted and
reviewed prior to the Pre-Slab Conference.
C. The following parties shall be represented at the Pre-Slab Conference:
1. Construction Manager
2. Ready-Mix Concrete Supplier
3. Floor Slab Contractor
4. Testing Agency
D. The Pre-Slab Conference is intended to include discussion of, but not be limited to, the
following items:
1. Submittal status.
2. Subgrade material, compaction, testing and fine-grading.
3. Placement sequence and schedule.
4. Curing methods and durations.
5. Interior building conditions; including roof tightness, temperature control,
ventilation, lighting and truck access.
6. Testing Agency responsibilities and authority.
E. Meeting minutes will be recorded by the Construction Manager and distributed to all
attending parties.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. In lieu of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract requirements, provide a
three (3) year warranty following final acceptance of the project against faulty materials and
workmanship. This includes, but is not limited to; cracking, crazing, blistering, surface
pops, delaminations, joint erosion and curling.
B. This contractor shall visit the project site one (1) year after placement to repair random
cracks, joint defects and surface defects (i.e. surface pops or delaminations).
C. Random cracks, narrower than the thickness of a credit card, shall be filled with the
specified crack filler, color to match concrete surface. Random cracks wider than the
thickness of a credit card shall be treated as a construction joint, sand filled to within 1½"
of the top surface then filled with the specified joint filler.
D. Surface pops, consisting of small diameter defects, shall be cleaned and then filled with an
approved structural or polyurea filler and ground flush with the floor surface.
E. Delaminations shall be bush-hammered to sound concrete, cleaned and then filled with an
approved structural or polyurea filler and ground flush with the floor surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II gray Portland cement with C 3 A content not exceeding 8%.
Cement with C 2 S content in excess of 20% is desirable for shrinkage control.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Washed, clean, hard, durable, uncoated crushed stone or gravel
conforming to ASTM C33 and C131. Crushed stone with fractured faces is preferred and,
if locally available, must be used.
1. Standard Mix: Aggregate shall be a well-graded blend of 1½, ¾” and 3/8” stone
sizes. The blend (coarse and fine aggregates) shall be proportioned such that the
difference between the amount retained on each consecutive sieve, between 1”
and #16, shall be between 8% and 18%.
2. Maximum nominal size shall be 1½". Elongated aggregates with dimensions in
excess of 2" are not permitted.
3. Alkali Silica Reactive: On the basis of past experience, the contractor/supplier
shall report to the Construction Manager if coarse aggregate is alkali silica
reactive.
C. Fine Aggregate: Coarse, natural (not manufactured), uniform in color sand conforming to
ASTM C33. Sand with a fineness modulus greater than 2.8 is preferred and, if locally
available, must be used.
D. Water: Potable, clean, free from deleterious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or organic
materials.
2.2 ADMIXTURES
A. Admixtures for modifying concrete setting time, and/or for increasing workability, may be
used at the discretion of the Contractor. The Contractor assumes full responsibility.
1. Accelerators: ASTM C494, Type C or E (containing no more chloride ions than
potable water).
2. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type A (containing no more than
0.05% chloride ions).
3. High-Range Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type F (containing no
more than 0.05% chloride ions).
B. The use of admixtures shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS
A. Mix designs shall be proportioned per Section 5.3 of ACI 318. The proportions of
ingredients shall produce a mixture that is compatible with the placing, consolidating and
finishing methods to be used, without segregation or excessive free water.
B. Unless otherwise noted; mix designs shall be based on a maximum 4" slump for concrete
containing a water-reducer, 6" for concrete containing a mid-range water-reducer, and 8"
for concrete containing a high-range water-reducer. The HRWR admixture, if used, shall
be added at the jobsite after an initial 2-3" slump is verified.
C. NOTE: No flyash or pozzolans shall be used.
D. Type 1 – Standard (Truck Dumped)
1. Minimum compressive strength = 3,500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum cement factor = 520 lbs/cy
3. Maximum water/cement ratio (by weight) = 0.48
4. Maximum air content = 3% (air-entraining admixture shall be used).
5. Maximum fine aggregate/coarse aggregate ratio (by weight) = 0.66
E. Type 2 – Standard (Pump Placement)
1. Minimum compressive strength = 3,500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum cement factor = 540 lbs/cy
3. Maximum water/cement ratio (by weight) = 0.48
4. Maximum air content = 3% (air-entraining admixture shall be used).
5. Maximum fine aggregate/coarse aggregate ratio (by weight) = 0.72
2.4 SLAB ACCESSORIES
A. Form Release Agent: Non-staining mineral oil that will not absorb moisture or impair
normal bonding or color characteristics of coating(s) intended for use on concrete.
B. Edge Forms: 2” thick Douglas Fir planks, surfaced one side and two edges.
C. Stay-in-Place Forms: Provide at all perimeter wall columns. Forms shall be 24 ga. metal,
2” less than the floor slab thickness. Bend around column bases and firmly stake in place
with the top 2” below the top surface of the concrete.
D. Flexible Foam Expansion Joint Filler: For use where slabs abut all walls, bollards and
columns. Shall be preformed, closed-cell, non-extruding resilient type, ½” thick flexible
polyethylene or polyurethane. Material shall have a maximum compression of 10 psi at
50% deformation according to ASTM D1621 or D3575. Material shall be full slab depth.
E. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 or ASTM A706; intermediate
grade, new, unfinished, deformed billet steel.
1. All reinforcing shall be free of loose rust or scale, grease or other coating that
would prevent a concrete bond.
2. Bent Ties, Stirrups, Etc: ASTM A615, Grade 40, unfinished.
3. Tie Wire: Soft annealed black steel wire, minimum 18 BWG, single-stranded.
F. Dowels:
1. Dowels at construction joints shall be PNA Round Dowels, PNA Square Dowels,
PNA Diamond Dowel System by PNA Construction Technologies or pre-approved
equal. Round or square dowels shall be installed using PNA Dowel Aligners or pre-
approved equal.
2. Dowels at saw-cut contraction joints shall be PNA Round Dowel Basket Assembly,
PNA Square Dowel Basket Assembly, PNA Load Plate Basket Assembly, PNA
PD3 (Alternating Tapered Plate Dowel) Basket Assembly by PNA Construction
Technologies or pre-approved equal.
3. Dowels shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements
and recommendations.
G. Bollard/Goalpost Embedded Mounting Plates/Assembly: PNA Round Bollard Base or equal
by PNA Construction Technologies or pre-approved equal. Mounting plate height shall
match slab thickness.
H. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during concrete placement, including load bearing bottom pad or runners
where necessary (over insulation and/or vapor barrier). Chair spacing not to exceed 3’-0"
on center for supporting reinforcing bar mats.
I. Armored Construction Joints:
1. Armored edges at construction joints between new slab pours shall be PNA
Armor-Edge Joint Assembly by PNA Construction Technologies or pre-approved
equal.
2. Armored edges at construction joints between new and existing floors shall be
PNA Armor-Edge n2e Joint Assembly by PNA Construction Technologies or pre-
approved equal.
3. Armored edges shall be cut full depth at any intersecting joints to allow joint
activation.
4. Armored edges shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
requirements and recommendations.
5. Grind any high surfaces of the armored edges flush with the adjacent concrete
surface.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Wet Cure: Apply curing compound first, then flood with water and cover with 3-mil
polyethylene film for a duration of 7-days.
2.6 JOINT FILLERS AND SEALANTS
A. Joint Filler & Sealant: For application at sawcuts, construction joints and over expansion
joint material around columns, bollards and slab-wall junctures; shall be a semi-rigid, two-
part, self-leveling flexible epoxy or polyurea. Supply supplemental heat and dual-
dispensing system as required. Cut flush with top of slab. For coolers, MM-80 by Metzger-
McGuire or approved equal. For freezers, Spal-Pro RSF by Metzger-McGuire or approved
equal.
B. Joint Filler Support Base Rod: For application at the bottom of sawcuts and construction
joints to receive joint filler; shall be non-compressible backer rod, Spal-Pro Rod by
Metzger-McGuire or approved equal. As an alternative, the bottom of the joint may be
closed off with a silica sand swept into the joint, maximum depth of ¼" in the joint bottom.
C. Crack Filler: For application at joint filler sidewall separation and random cracks; shall be a
low-viscosity, structural epoxy or polyurea. Color to match the adjacent concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF PLACE OF DEPOSIT

A. Construction Manager will ensure the building is fully enclosed, with roof watertight.
Temperature within the building will be a minimum of +40F.
B. Preparation by Site Contractor will leave sub-grade between +0’ and -0.1’ of bottom of
slab. This contractor is responsible for final grading to finish subgrade between +0” and –
½” of slab bottom; additional fill materials, if needed, will be furnished by the Site
Contractor. All slabs must be minimum full design thickness.
C. Before placing concrete, all debris shall be removed from the place of deposit.
D. Set wood bulkheads, true to line and grade, to contain each placement area.
E. Wrap expansion joint material around steel columns and bollards and set against abutting
wall surfaces. Install stay-in-place forms at perimeter wall columns. Install all embedded
angles, sleeves or other inserts.
F. Place reinforcing steel, support rebar on metal chairs with full sand plates. At construction
and saw cut control joints, all reinforcing shall be held back a minimum of 2" on both sides
of the joint. Place 4’-0” long #4 bars as additional top reinforcement at all re-entrant
corners such as door jambs, dock levelers and similar discontinuities.
G. Install dowels at all construction joints and sawcuts, or as otherwise noted. Grease one
end of all dowels. Pre-position dowels at saw cuts on basket type chairs. Hold dowel
baskets back from construction joint corners 3’-0”.
H. All construction joints shall be armored with back to back 2½" x 3/8" steel bars to protect
edges; set accurately to line and grade.
I. Provide temporary ventilation during slab placement. If temporary lighting (5 fc) provided
by the Construction Manager is not sufficient, provide additional temporary lighting.
3.2 MIXING AND DELIVERING
A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Upon arrival on-site, each truck shall be tested for slump. If necessary, water shall be
added per the direction of the Testing Agency.
C. Copies of delivery slips shall be provided to the Testing Agency. Delivery slip shall identify
mix design, slump, and the amount of water added on-site for slump adjustment.
3.3 PLACING AND FINISHING
A. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes
during mixing, placement, and curing. In cold weather, comply with ACI 306. In hot
weather comply with ACI 305.
B. Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit in a continuous manner and
without segregation. Do not drop over 5 ft. No pumping will be allowed in areas
accessible to trucks, or buggies.
C. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not interrupt
successive placements; allowing cold joints to occur. When absolutely necessary, an
unplanned construction joint may be placed at a location approved by the Construction
Manager.
D. Vibrate all concrete along bulkhead forms, walls and prior slab placements for
consolidation. Replace the concrete displaced due to settlement and vibration as required
to maintain a level surface. Ensure that reinforcement, and other embedded items, are not
disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Screed all open, accessible areas with a laser screed. Hand or float screed on areas with
restricted access. Float and clean slab edges with floats and darbys, no hand trowels shall
be used.
F. Straighten and re-straighten with a highway straight edge to achieve the specified F-
numbers.
G. Slabs shall be troweled to a fine, hard, dense, non-dusting, non-slip burnished finish (hard
trowel finish). Immediately after completing finishing, but prior to applying curing
compound, snap chalk lines to locate sawcuts.
H. Sawcuts shall be made with a soffcut saw, as soon as surface can be sawn without
raveling. All joints shall be sawn for sealant; 1/8" to 1/4" wide, depth as noted on the
drawings. Remove all cutting dust.
I. Flood the floor with water and apply polyethylene sheeting for seven days wet cure time
immediately following sawcutting. The concrete must be maintained continuously moist
during the wet curing time.
J. A minimum of 30 days after coolers/freezers are down to final temperature, all sawcut and
construction joints shall be filled with joint filler and floor wall junctures, perimeter of
columns, and other floor penetrations that have foam expansion joint material installed
shall be filled with joint sealant.
K. Chase all sawcut and construction joints with a 1" deep diamond blade, and clean of debris
and latency by raking or vacuuming, prior to filling. To close off bottom of joints, use
backer rod or sand fill below filler. Filler material shall be a minimum 1" deep at
construction joints and minimum 1½" deep at sawcuts. Overfill joints to a crowned
condition and allow material to cure for 6 to 8 hours. Use a mechanical scraper to cut or
shave the joint material flush with the floor.
L. If joint filler settles below the top of the adjacent floor slab, this contractor shall take
corrective action. Use a circular saw with a steel blade set to ½" depth to remove the top
½" of any settled areas. Remove any material adhered to the joint side wall with the blade.
Refill the joint being sure to overfill to a crowned condition. Shave or cut flush with the
adjacent floor surface. This filled joint must be perfectly level with adjacent concrete.
Installation of “cap bead” to fill low or settled joint material is not acceptable.
M. Remove foam expansion joint material a minimum of ½” below the top of slab and clean of
debris and latency by vacuuming, prior to joint sealant application. Apply joint sealant to
form a clean, tooled surface. Clean up any overfill material.
3.4 FINISH TOLERANCE
A. Minimum F-numbers are as shown on the drawings.
B. Floor flatness and levelness testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E1155.
Floor tolerance measurements are the responsibility of this contractor.
C. Out-of-tolerance work shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Construction
Manager. Written results from floor tolerance testing shall be provided to Construction
Manager within 24 hours.
D. No remedy, other than removal and replacement for sub-minimal F-number sections will
be permitted.
3.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. This contractor shall perform final cleaning of all exposed concrete floor slabs. Final
cleaning shall include removal of poly from wet cure, be broom swept, and be cleaned with
several passes of floor cleaning equipment (i.e. Tenant floor scrubber).
3.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Field Inspection shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318 and under
provisions of Section 01450.
B. Slump test, in accordance with ASTM C143, shall be taken for each load at the point of
placement. The Testing Agency has the authority (and responsibility) to refuse acceptance
of concrete when excess water has been added.
C. Entrained air, in accordance with ASTM C173 or C231, shall be checked every third truck.
D. Four concrete test cylinders (one set) shall be taken for each class of concrete, for each
day's pour. However, in no case shall there be less than one set taken for each 100 cubic
yards of concrete poured, or 4000 square feet of slab concrete poured.
E. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one retained for further testing
if necessary. If the 28 day test is satisfactory, the reserve cylinder can be discarded.
F. To be satisfactory, none of the 28-day strength tests (average of 2 cylinders) shall have
values less than 500 psi below the specified strength. Also, the average of three
consecutive tests shall not fall below the specified strength.
G. If the tests do not meet these requirements, test the reserve cylinder at 56 days and the
Construction Manager reserves the right to require samples of hardened concrete in the
structure to be taken and tested (ASTM C42) at the expense of this contractor.
H. Complete records shall be kept by the Testing Agency that report test results and describe
location of where sampled concrete was placed in construction.
I. Test results shall be reported in writing to the Construction Manager within 24 hours after
tests are made. All test reports indicating non-compliance should be faxed immediately.
Hard copies of non-compliant tests shall be on different colored paper.
J. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as the averages
of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength,
f’c and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength f’c by more than
500 PSI.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Extent: The work required under this Section consists of all masonry work and related
items necessary to complete the work shown on, or reasonably implied by the Drawings
and the Specifications.
1. Installation of anchor bolts, bearing plates, and all embedded items described in
other Sections of these Specifications.
2. Setting lintels as detailed on the Drawings.
3. Grout fill in walls, bond beams and pilasters.
4. Steel reinforcing in bond beams, walls and pilasters.
5. Construction of block walls as detailed. Provide all necessary scaffolding. Comply
with OSHA scaffolding regulations.
6. Setting of bearing plates in mortar as detailed for bearing walls.
7. All masonry will be cut with masonry saws.
8. Clean all masonry surfaces.
9. Provide finish masonry surfaces suitable for the intended final architectural
finishes to be applied.
10. Saw cut and cooperate with other trades in the installation of the following
concealed work:
a. Installing door frames as detailed on the Drawings.
b. Vents through roof and concealed piping.
c. Electrical conduit and boxes.
d. Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets.
e. Silo alcoves, oversize masonry opening, in-fill with brick after silo is set.
11. Providing exterior wall door and window lintel head flashing as detailed on the
Drawings.
A. Section 01410 Testing Laboratory Services
B. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
C. Section 05120 Structural Steel
D. Section 05500 Metal Fabrications
E. Section 06112 Rough Carpentry
F. Section 07900 Joint Sealants
G. Division 15 Plumbing
H. Division 16 Electrical
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 12 04300 – Unit Masonry Systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for the following items:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. CMU
2. Colored mortar.
3. Weep holes/vents.
4. Special brick shapes.
5. Masonry reinforcement and accessories embedded in masonry.
6. Mortar and grout mix design.
7. Insulation.
8. UL Certificates.
C. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with
requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and
calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious Materials: Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Joint reinforcement.
6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with
property specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit
type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of
masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to
be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through
one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
2. Where 1 wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other
wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to un-constructed
wythe and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at
least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by
spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is
40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS

A. Regular Type I concrete masonry units shall be 2 core type 8" x 8" x 16" and 12" x 8" x 16".
These are the basic units for the work unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
Moisture content at delivery not to exceed 5% of the total absorption.
B. Mortar colors shall match block color. Special masonry units shall be as called for on the
drawings and will include the following:
1. Exterior split face colored units.
2. Exterior scored face colored units.
3. Exterior ribbed faced colored units.
C. Provide all special shapes as detailed and required for a complete installation including
angled blocks, sash, stretcher, control joints, heads, single end, jambs, lintel, bond beam,
soaps, and knock out.
D. All exposed outside corners at walls, door jambs, and window jambs shall be bull-nose
units except where ceramic tile will be applied. This shall not apply to split faced units or
units exposed to the exterior.
E. Provide fire rated units where noted on the Drawings and submit UL Certificate with Shop
Drawings.
F. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed
units.
1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that
does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent,
when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-
repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period
extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
2. Available Products:
a. Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-
Block.
c. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel.
G. Physical Requirements:
1. F’m = 1,500 PSI min.
2. Units shall be normal weight aggregate and comply with ASTM C90 N-I. Units
shall have a minimum oven dry density 125 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Minimum compressive strength on the net area (average of three units) when
tested in accordance with ASTM C140 shall be 2,500 PSI on the net area at
bearing walls and 2,000 PSI on the net area at non-bearing walls. Minimum
compressive strength of any individual unit shall be not less than 80% of the
required three-unit average.
4. Water absorption shall not exceed 13 lbs. per cubic foot (average of three units)
when tested in accordance with ASTM C140.
5. Moisture content of the block when laid shall not exceed 35% of total absorption
when tested in accordance with ASTM C140. Maximum lineal shrinkage shall not
exceed 0.045%.
6. No overall dimension (width, height, or length) shall differ by more than 1/16" from
the specified standard dimension, except that dimensions measured to a split face
or end shall not be held to this tolerance. Nominal face of unit 8" x 16".
7. Texture of all concrete masonry units shall be uniform, free of hollows, pop outs,
dings and scrapes.
2.2 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Lintels: Steel angle and steel beam lintels furnished under Section 05400 will be used at
the heads of all openings over 4’-0" unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Bond beam lintel
shall be used for openings up to 4’-0" unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Install lintels
and cut block or use special shapes to construct heads. See Drawings for exceptions.
B. Anchors and Ties:.
1. Rigid steel anchors for intersecting walls shall not be less than 1" x 8" long
zinc-coated steel, ¼ " thick, z-type with 3" bends at each end, install at 32" on
center vertically.
2. All steel columns adjacent to or embedded in masonry shall be provided with wire
column anchors under Section 05100. Furnish and install Triangle Ties #DA
701-708 or DA 730 by Dur-O-Wal at all columns. Install at 32" on center vertically.
The tie length shall engage the masonry by 4".
3. Veneer Anchoring Ties: For face veneer anchoring supply adjustable, galvanized
ties, #DA 213 or 431 by Dur-O-Wal. Provide at 16" on center vertically and 16" on
center horizontally.
C. Joint Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement for use in horizontal bed joints of concrete
masonry units, and other locations as hereinafter specified, shall be prefabricated type
formed of zinc-coated cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82 with the coating
conforming to ASTM Specifications A153. Side wires shall be formed of 3/16" diameter or
larger and be deformed; cross rods to be truss-shaped 9 gauge or larger, smooth or
deformed wire. Provide prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections of wall or
partitions. Reinforcing shall be extra heavy Truss with hot dipped galvanized finish as
manufactured by Dur-O-Wal or equal. Provide at 16" on center vertically.
D. Reinforcing Bars: Steel bars for bond beams and vertical reinforcement not specified
otherwise shall conform to ASTM Specifications A615, Grade 60.
E. Grout: For bond beams and filled vertical cells grout shall be concrete with pea stone
aggregate. Aggregate shall constitute 40% of the mix design by weight. Strength shall be
3,000 PSI at 28 days. Maximum slump shall be 9". Mix shall conform to ASTM C476.
Method of sampling and testing grout shall conform to ASTM C1019.
F. Wall insulation at exterior walls shall be Korfil inserts as manufactured by Korfil, Inc.,
Chicopee, MA or an approved equal. All exterior walls shall be insulated. Remove inserts
from vertically reinforced cells.
G. Expansion or Control Joint: Material shall be of natural or synthetic rubber. It shall be
cross-shaped in section or of shapes indicated on Drawings. Material shall conform to
ASTM D2000 2AA-805. Joint shall be regular type, "Rapid Control Joint" model D/A 2001
as manufactured by Dur-O-Wal.
H. Through wall flashing bond beams, door and window heads and where shown elsewhere
shall be bituminous coated copper, "Cop-A-Cote" by AFCO with copper weight of 5
oz./S.F., or approved equal.
I. Sealer: Shall be Thorosilane, Sikagard 70, or Dayton Superior S-40 applied at 100 S.F.
per gallon per coat, provide one coat. Apply to all exterior exposed walls not scheduled to
be painted.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Mortar shall conform to ASTM Specification C270, Type S or M, as follows: one part
Portland cement, one half part hydrated lime and not less than 2¼ and not more than 3
parts sand measured damp, loose. The average strength at 28 days of (3) 2" square
cubes shall not be less than 1,800 PSI, the average strength of (3) 2" x 4" cylinders shall
not be less than 1,500 PSI and a correction factor shall be applied to the cylinder test
results.
B. Portland Cement: Cement shall conform to ASTM Specification C150 Type I or III.
C. Lime: Hydrated lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM Specifications C207.
D. Lime Putty: Putty shall be stiff mixture of lime and water. Keep putty moist until used.
E. Sand: Sand shall conform to ASTM Specifications C144 and shall be sharp, clean and
well graded, free of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter.
F. Mixing Water: Water shall be clean and potable.
G. Aggregate for Masonry Grout: Aggregate shall conform to ASTM Specification C404.
H. Cold weather additives for set acceleration may be used by written permission from the
Engineer. In no case shall calcium chloride be used.
I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-
Block Mortar Admixture.
c. Master Builders, Inc;
2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 5-oz. /sq. ft. copper sheet coated with flexible
asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
a. Available Products:
(1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Cop-R-Cote.
(2) AFCO Products Inc.; Cop-A-Cote.
(3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Coat Flashing.
(4) York Manufacturing, Inc.; CopperseaL.
2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
(1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.
(2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall
Flashing.
(3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier-
44.
(4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. -
Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing.
(5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt
Thru-Wall Flashing
(6) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
(7) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
B. Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products
recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene
urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with
ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406] and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full
height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in
color selected from manufacturer's standard.
(1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.
2. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that
will not degrade within the wall cavity.
a. Provide one of the following configurations:
(1) Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail
shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being
clogged with mortar droppings.
b. Available Products:
(1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are
formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with
either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or
D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Store materials under cover in a dry place on plastic and in a manner to prevent damage
or intrusion of foreign matter. During freezing weather, protect all masonry units with
tarpaulins or other suitable material. Store concrete masonry units under cover that will
permit circulation of air and prevent excessive moisture absorption. If units become wet,
do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cement, lime and air setting mortars under tarps and on pallets. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Protect reinforcement from the elements; immediately before placing, reinforcement shall
be free from loose rust, ice or other foreign coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond.
D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
E. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
F. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation
of dirt and oil.
3.2 MIXING MORTAR
A. Mix all cementitious materials and sand in a mechanical batch mixer for a minimum of five
minutes. Adjust the consistency of the mortar to the satisfaction of the mason, but add
only as much water as is necessary.
B. If the mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation or from absorption of a part of the mixing
water, re-temper the mortar immediately by adding water, and remix the mortar. All mortar
shall be used within 2½ hours of the initial mixing. It shall not be used after it has begun to
set.
3.3 LAYING OF MASONRY

A. Do not install wet units or units that are less than seven days old.
B. Units shall be laid with level horizontal joints in a running bond with 50% overlap. Vertical
joints shall be on a vertical line on alternate units. No chipped block will be incorporated
into the work.
C. Install horizontal wire truss reinforcing in horizontal joints on 16" centers vertically. Provide
continuous grouted bond beams at 8'-0" on center vertically and as shown on the
Drawings.
D. Partitions of all units that abut exterior walls, steel columns, and other partitions shall be
bonded in or be anchored thereto once every 32" in height, using rigid steel anchors.
E. Joints of regular masonry units (interior) shall be cut flush and tooled when thumb print
hard to form a concave joint.
F. Protect facing materials against staining, and keep tops of wall covered with non-staining
waterproof coverings when work is not in progress. When work is resumed, top surface of
work shall be cleaned of all loose mortar and, in dry weather, thoroughly wet.
G. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells (except that webs also shall be bedded in all courses in piers, columns, pilasters, in
starting courses on footings and solid foundation walls and around cells that are to be
reinforced or filled with grout). Lay solid units with full 3/8" head and bed joints in concrete
masonry so that coursing is in even 8" increments.
H. Exposed masonry joints, if other than a full size unit, shall be cut carefully and squarely
with an approved masonry saw where straight line cuts are required and drilled for circular
cuts. Interior cuts that cannot be sawed or drilled shall be very carefully hand cut to
present a neat and workmanlike finished appearance.
I. Mortar shall be kept tempered on the board at all times and shall be soft and plastic
whenever the mason picks up a trowel full of mortar.
J. If it becomes necessary to move a block after the mortar has stiffened, the block shall be
removed from the wall and relayed with fresh mortar. All the dead mortar shall be scraped
off the wall before the block is relayed.
K. Provide weep holes in starter course at 4’ centers on exterior walls, and at window and
door lintels.
L. Vertical cells to be reinforced and filled with grout shall have vertical alignment sufficient to
maintain a min. 3" x 3" cell. Vertical reinforcing shall be continuous or properly lapped.
Submit layout for review and approval of the locations in the reinforcing drawings.
M. The room side of each wall shall be the "true" side. Provide continuous control to insure
horizontal and vertical alignment. Any block visibly out of plane shall be cut out and
replaced.
N. Provide control joints where detailed or required by good practice. Joint spacing shall not
exceed three times the height of the wall or 50’ on center, whichever is less. Submit layout
for review and approval of the locations on the reinforcing drawings.
O. Install flashings and weep holes at split starter courses at the bottom of all walls, above
each bond beam and at all door and window lintels or bond beams over windows or doors
and all mechanical equipment openings.
3.4 GROUTING REINFORCED MASONRY
A. Work shall progress until bond beam height has been reached and bond beam units are
set.
B. Vertical cells to be grouted shall be a minimum of 3" x 3" in plan area and carefully aligned.
Cells shall be kept free of excess mortar and debris.
C. Place vertical reinforcing steel in designated cells. Place and block horizontal reinforcing
steel in bond beams. Reinforcement and ties shall be placed in grout spaces prior to
grouting.
D. Place pea stone grout by bucket or pump. Work grout into vertical cells, completely fill
bond beams. Grout lift height shall not exceed 5 feet. When grout pour height exceeds 5
feet provide cleanouts in the bottom course of masonry for each grout pour.
E. Consolidate Grout at Time of Placement:
1. Consolidate grout pours 12 inches or less in height by mechanical vibration or by
puddling.
2. Consolidate pours excluding 12" height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate
by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and supplement has occurred.
F. Coordinate special inspection of the masonry as required by the Building Code.
3.5 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12
inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural
steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry
as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction
and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may
be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
3.7 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Incorporate sleeves for piping and ductwork, provided by those trades, into the walls as the
work progresses.
B. Mechanical and Electrical trades. Concealed plumbing, electrical risers and outlet boxes
are to be installed as partitions are built.
C. Cutting and Patching: Consult other trades in advance to make provisions for installations
of their work to avoid cutting and patching. Any cutting or patching required to
accommodate work of others shall be done by mechanics performing the work under this
heading.
3.8 PRECAUTIONS AND COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not lay masonry when the temperature of the ambient air is below 40°F unless suitable
means as approved by the Engineer are provided to heat materials, protect work from cold
and frost and insure the mortar will harden without freezing. (No anti-freeze ingredient
shall be used in the mortar).
B. Mix water shall be heated to a minimum temperature of 55°F. Cover and heat piles of
mortar sand.
C. The mortar shall be mixed with Type III Portland cement.
D. Sand shall be heated to a minimum temperature of 40°F.
E. Enclosures shall be heated when the ambient temperature falls below 25°F. The masonry
temperature must be maintained above 32°F for 24 hrs after laying masonry.
3.9 POINTING AND CLEANING MASONRY
A. Point all holes in exposed masonry. Cut out defective joints and re-point them with mortar
of same color as adjacent.
B. Concrete masonry units shall have all loose and unsightly mortar cleaned off and all stains
removed.
C. Upon completion, all masonry work shall be thoroughly scraped and cleaned of all excess
mortar and foreign matter with a solution of "Sure Klean" and water, as manufactured by
the Process Solvent Co., Kansas City, Kansas. Use shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions. The solution shall be inhibited and emulsified in such
a manner as to make it completely soluble in water, so that rinsing with fresh water will
flush all active acids from metal and masonry and other surfaces. Cleaning shall be done
after masonry walls are permanently covered at the top.
D. Clean and re-clean walls until they are free of efflorescence.
E. All work shall be rubbed with a Carborundum brick (stone) on a daily basis to remove
excess mortar.
3.10 SEALER
A. After exterior block walls have been weathered in from above and cleaned until free of
efflorescence, apply the sealer in accordance with this Specification and the Manufacturers
recommendations. Do not seal masonry scheduled to be painted.
B. Soak surface until excess solution runs 6" below the spray pattern.
3.11 TESTING LABORATORY
A. The materials testing laboratory shall perform testing and inspection as outlined in
Sections 01410 and/or 01450 and the following items and report directly to the Engineer
with the results of all tests and reports.
B. Documents:
1. Review Plans and Specifications.
C. Sampling and Testing Duties:
1. Testing Inspection agency shall inspect, sample, and test the materials as outlined
in Sections 01410 and/or 01450 and as follows.
2. Concrete Block Mortar: Sets of four (4) 2" x 2" x 2" mortar cubes should be cast
daily during the course of construction. Cubes should be sent to the laboratory
and tested; one at 7 days, and three at 28 days. Testing of field-prepared material
shall conform to ASTM C780 standards.
3. Grout Prisms: For CMU walls, cast five (5) 3" x 3" x 6", or 3.5" x 3.5" x 7" test
prisms conforming to ASTM C1019, for each day's placement or for every 30 cubic
yards placed in one day. Prisms should be sent to the laboratory and tested; one
at 7 days, and three at 28 days and one to be broken at engineer’s discretion.
4. Monitor mortar temperature during cold weather masonry work. Document daily
exterior and enclosure temperature.
D. Reports
Submit daily written reports describing the tests and inspections made and showing the
action taken to correct nonconforming work. Itemize any changes authorized by the
Architect/Engineer. Report all uncorrected deviations from Plans or Specifications.
3.12 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. Special inspection of masonry construction for all bearing walls, shear walls and exterior
walls should be provided and shall conform to the requirements of this Section and
Sections 01410 and/or 01450.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish anchor bolts (installation and grouting by others). Provide templates.
B. Furnish and set leveling plates (grouting by others).
C. Furnish structural steel framing, in place; including columns, beams, cross-bracing, girts,
sag rods, etc.
D. Field Priming.
A. Section 04300 – Concrete Masonry Units
B. Section 05210 – Steel Joists and Joist Girders
C. Section 05311 – Steel Deck
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AISC – Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design
B. AISC – Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design
C. AISC – Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings
D. AISC – Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections
E. AISC – Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
F. ASTM A36, A992, A572 – Structural Steel
G. ASTM A53 – Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-coated, Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
H. ASTM A108 – Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality
I. ASTM A123/A123M – Zinc-Coating on Iron and Steel Products
J. ASTM A143 – Safeguarding Against Embrittlement.
K. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanizing) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
L. ASTM A307 – Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners
M. ASTM A325 – High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
N. ASTM A500 – Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes
O. ASTM A780 – Repair of Hot-Dip Galvanizing
P. AWS – Structural Welding Code
Q. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
R. SSPC – Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 05120 – Structural Steel

A. Design of connections not detailed on the Drawings is to be under direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work, and licensed in the
State where the Project is located. Reactions are shown on the Drawings. When reactions
are not shown design structural connections to support the member uniformly loaded to its
capacity.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Fabrication shop drawings for all items.
B. Calculations for connections, submitted for record purposes only.
C. Bolt and washer data with tightening method.
D. Primer paint data.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A company, with a minimum 10 years experience, specializing in the fabrication
of the specified materials.
B. Erector: A company, with a minimum 10 years experience, specializing in the erection of
similar structures.
C. Welder's Certificates: For each welder employed in this work, submit a certificate verifying
AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
D. Galvanizer: A company, with a minimum of 5 years experience, specializing in the
performance of the specified galvanizing processes. Galvanizing facility must have an
ongoing QA/QC program and an on-site testing facility capable of measuring the chemical
and metallurgical composition of the galvanizing bath and pickling tanks.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A992 or ASTM A572, Gr. 50 with special requirements per AISC
Technical Bulletin #3, New Shape Material. Miscellaneous angles and embedded
channels per ASTM A36 unless otherwise noted. Structural steel tubing shall conform to
A500, Grade B.
B. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, all steel columns adjacent to or embedded in
masonry shall be provided with wire column anchors at 32” on center for use with Dur-O-
Wall #DA701-708 ties.
C. Bolts: ASTM A325N or A325SC, with hardened steel washers.
D. Welding Materials: Table 3.1 of AWS D1.1; of type as appropriate for materials being
welded.
E. Shear Studs: Stud type shear connectors shall be of a design suitable for electrical end
welding to steel either by stick welding or with automatically timed stud welding equipment.
Flux shall be supplied with each stud, as required by the weld method. Stud connectors
shall conform to ASTM A108, Grade 1015, 1018 or 1020, GPM or fully killed. If flux-
retaining caps are used, the studs shall be low carbon steel complying with ASTM A109.
F. Sag Rods: Girt sag rods shall be A36. Thread at the ends only to the distance required for
nut and washer thread engagement.
G. Anchor Bolts: Shall be F1554, Grade 55, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

H. Steel Base Plates: Shall be ASTM A572, Grade 50.
2.2 PAINTING
A. After inspection and before leaving the shop, thoroughly clean steel of all loose mill scale,
rust spatter, slag or flux deposits, oil, dirt and other foreign matter. Clean and prepare for
painting in accordance with SSPC, SP-3 (Power tool cleaning). Apply one coat of light
gray shop primer.
2.3 GALVANIZING
A. All structural steel exposed to the exterior of the structure’s envelope, after erection, shall
be hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted.
1. Items shall be galvanized after fabrication. Where size of assembly is too large for
complete unit galvanizing, these assemblies shall be galvanized prior to
fabrication, in as large sections as practical.
2. Where galvanizing prior to completing fabrication cannot be avoided, steel surface
shall be cleaned by SSPC SP-6, joints shall be welded after fabrication, ground
smooth and finished with 4 full coats of California Products Corp. WW Totrust,
Sealube ZRC, ZiRP™ by Duncan or equal conforming to ASTM A780.
B. Galvanize steel members, fabrications and assemblies after fabrication by the hot-dip
process in accordance with ASTM A123/123M.
C. Galvanize bolts, nuts, washers, and iron and steel hardware components in accordance
with ASTM A153/153M.
D. Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143.
E. Handle all articles to be galvanized in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage
and to minimize distortion.
F. Conform to paragraph 6.1 of ASTMA A123/123M, Table 1 of ASTM A153/153M, or Table 2
of A767, as appropriate.
G. Surface Finish: Continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and
free of any defect detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article.
H. Adhesion: Withstand normal handling consistent with the nature and thickness of the
coating and normal use of the article.
I. Touch-Up and Repair: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds,
bolted connections and abraded areas.
1. Apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of ASTM A780.
Galvanizing repair paint shall have 95 percent zinc by weight. Thickness of
applied galvanizing repair paint shall be not less then coating thickness required by
ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with aerosol
spray, silver paint, bright paint, brite paint or aluminum paint is not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work. Ensure that
dimensions agree with Drawings.
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of stubbed-up bolts at foundations,
embedded or other anchorage items, etc.
3.2 FABRICATION

A. All work shall be fabricated in accordance with reviewed shop drawings; review of shop
drawings by the Engineer is for design intent only.
B. Review of shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct
fabrication as designed.
C. All items shall be fabricated true, plumb and level; all units shall be welded and/or bolted to
develop the full strength of the assembly, as designed.
D. Punch and/or drill steel for attachment of wood nailers or other materials indicated or
specified to be attached to the steel.
E. Joints shall be accurately cut, mitered, and connected as designed.
F. Where appropriate, welded joints shall be ground smooth.
3.3 ERECTION
A. All work shall be erected in accordance with reviewed shop drawings; review of shop
drawings by Engineer is for design intent only.
1. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
correct erection as designed.
B. All steel framing members shall be set with instruments to assure accuracy of line, and a
plumb and level installation.
1. No alteration shall be made to members without the approval of the Engineer.
2. This Contractor shall be responsible for all errors in fabrication and for the correct
fitting of all members.
C. Safety during erection is the responsibility of this Contractor.
D. All temporary supports and bracing shall be provided as necessary to stabilize steel
framing, and to safely maintain all loads imposed during erection. The structure shall not
be considered stable until fully detailed with all bridging, decking, moment connections and
cross bracing is installed.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Welded and bolted connections are to be as detailed, and shall conform to appropriate
AWS and AISC Requirements.
B. Where structural joints are made using high strength bolts, the materials, methods of
installation and tension control, type of wrenches to be used and the inspection methods
shall conform to “Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” as
approved by the Research Council on Structural Connection.
1. The high strength bolts used shall have a suitable identifying mark placed on top of
the head before leaving the factory.
2. Pre-tensioning of bolts when required shall comply with Specification for Structural
Joints using ASTM A325 or A490.
3. Bolts that have been completely tightened shall be marked with an identifying
symbol.
4. The use of “twist off” type tension control structural bolts conforming to ASTM
F1852 shall be acceptable, subject to verification and inspection procedures
outlined in Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 and A490 bolts.
5. The use of direct-tension-indicators meeting the requirements of ASTM F959 shall
be acceptable subject to verification and inspection procedures outlined in

Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 and A490 bolts.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Construction Manager will retain a Special Inspector to perform observations in
accordance with the Building Code. See Structural drawings for additional Special
Inspector requirements. Duties will include, but not be limited to:
1. Review of Plans, Specifications and Shop Drawings.
2. Review shop and field personnel qualifications for work required.
3. Review welding procedures and verify adequacy of equipment for work required.
4. Review welding consumables for compliance of welding procedures for work
required.
5. Perform testing of plumbness of the steel frame for compliance with AISC
allowable tolerances.
6. Writing and submitting a daily report to the Construction Manager that describes
the tests and observations made and describe any actions taken to correct
nonconforming work. All deviations from Plans or Specifications will be specifically
noted.
B. This Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and provide free access to all
Work.
C. Welds shall comply with AWS Standards for Visual Inspection; the Special Inspector may,
at his discretion, employ any additional, commonly accepted test method which he feels is
necessary for a specific situation.
D. Any necessary corrective measures, and re-inspection, will be performed at this
Contractor’s expense.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum allowable variation for plumb, level, and alignment shall be in accordance with
appropriate AISC Requirements.
3.7 FINISH
A. After erection, this Contractor shall remove all mud, stains, etc. from erected steel. This
Contractor shall then touch-up field connections and abraded places where coating has
been damaged.
B. If painted finish has been damaged, it shall be touched-up with the same paint used for the
shop primer coat. Aerosol spray is not acceptable.
C. If galvanized finish has been damaged, it shall be touched-up as described above.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
A. All work shall be left clean and undamaged, ready for finish, as appropriate, under
Separate Sections.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Open web steel joists and girders, in place, including bolted and welded joist connections,
bridging, chord extensions, etc.
B. Filed priming.
A. Section 05120 – Structural Steel
B. Section 05311 – Steel Deck
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners
B. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
C. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code
D. SJI - Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
Girders
E. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders
F. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings of all joists and girders. Shop drawings shall indicate all joists, girders,
loadings, bridging, welding, and erection details. All bridging, chord member and web
member sizes shall be indicated. Provide detailed layout drawings.
B. Primer paint data
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A company, with a minimum of 10 years experience, specializing in the
manufacture of the specified items.
B. Erector: A company, with a minimum of 10 years experience, specializing in erecting the
specified work.
C. Design of connections not detailed are to be under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work, and licensed in the State where the
Project is located.
D. Welders: For all welders, submit a certificate verifying AWS qualifications within the
previous 12 months.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All steel joints and girders shall be manufactured in accordance with the Standard
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 05210 – Steel Joists and Joist Girders
Specifications for Open-Web Joist Construction, SJI. Joists may be fabricated from either
hot rolled or cold-formed sections in accordance with ASTM standards. Series and sizes
shall be as indicated on the drawings.
1. The manufacturer shall design for all special loading conditions and point loads
shown on the Drawings, in addition to a 1.0 KIP load placed in any one panel point
location.
2. The manufacturer shall verify adequacy of joist sizes shown for the loadings
indicated on the Drawings. The manufacturer shall upgrade joists when necessary
to meet the given loadings. At no case shall the joist sizes shown be reduced.
3. Unless specifically noted otherwise, joists and girders shall be fabricated with the
minimum approximate camber as recommended by the SJI
B. Bolts and Nuts at Steel Connections: ASTM A325, with hardened steel washers.
C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; of type as appropriate for materials being welded.
2.2 FABRICATION
drawings, by the Engineer, is for design intent only. Review of shop drawings does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct fabrication as designed.
2.3 BRIDGING
A. Furnish and install horizontal and diagonal cross-bridging as required by SJI and OSHA for
the spans and loads shown or referenced unless a stricter requirement is shown on the
Drawings. Where horizontal bridging is used provide diagonal cross-bridging for the two
bays adjacent to a wall or steel beam instead of terminating the horizontal bridging directly
to walls or beams.
2.4 PAINTING
A. All open web steel joists and girders and accessories shall be given a shop coat of primer.
Rust spots, marred surfaces, and all welds shall be given a coat of the same primer in the
field after erection. Unless specifically noted otherwise, SSPC, Type 1, light gray in color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. Ensure that
dimensions agree with drawings.
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of embedded or other anchorage items, etc.
3.2 ERECTION
A. All work shall be erected in accordance with SJI standards and reviewed shop drawings;
review of shop drawings, by the Engineer, shall be for design intent only. Review of shop
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct erection as
designed.
B. All members shall be set with instruments to assure accuracy of line, and a plumb and
level installation.
C. All temporary supports and bracing shall be provided as necessary to stabilize members,
and to safely maintain all loads imposed during erection. Safety during erection is to be the
responsibility of this Contractor.
D. Decking is not to be installed until bridging is in place.
E. No alterations shall be made to members without approval of the manufacturer, and the
Engineer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
AWS and SJI Requirements.
A. Field inspection shall be performed in accordance with the SJI and The Building Code.
See Structural Drawings for additional inspection requirements.
B. Provide free access to Work, and cooperate with the appointed firm. The Testing
Laboratory Representative may require, of the Contractor, any reasonable modification of
work which is necessary to allow proper inspection. Provide lift access to the Testing
Agency.
C. Welds shall comply with AWS Standards for Visual Inspection; the Testing Laboratory
Representative may, at his discretion, employ any additional, commonly accepted test
method which he feels is necessary for a specific situation.
D. Any necessary corrective measures, and re-inspection, are to be at no extra cost to the
Owner.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum allowable variation from plumb, level, and alignment; in accordance with
appropriate SJI and/or AISC Requirements.
3.6 FINISH
A. After erection, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be touched up.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
Separate Section.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05311 STEEL DECKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Steel decking, in place, and any accessories as may be required.
A. Section 05120 – Structural Steel
B. Section 05210 – Steel Joists and Joist Girders
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AISI – Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
B. ASTM A446 – Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural
Quality.
C. ASTM A525 – Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. SDI – Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks.
E. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings showing the sizes and methods of jointing and attachment, as well as
engagements with work and materials of other trades. Submit detailed layout drawings
and attachment fasteners.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Erector: A company, with a minimum of 10 years experience, specializing in erecting the
specified work.
C. Design of connections not detailed are to be under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work, and licensed at the place where the
Project is located.
D. Welders: Submit certificates for each welder verifying AWS qualifications within the
previous 12 months.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel deck shall be manufactured by a member of the SDI and shall be designed in
accordance with Basic Design Specifications, as adopted by SDI.
B. All decking and accessories shall conform to the Specifications of the Steel Deck Institute;
the maximum allowable total load deflection is L/240.
C. Roof deck shall be 1½” deep; G90 galvanized Type B, gauge and connections as indicated
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 05311 – Steel Decks

on Drawings. Roof deck edge angles shall be per Drawings, see Specification Section
05500.
D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, profiled to fit tight to the decking, when these are
called for.
B. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, of diameter and thickness as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 ERECTION
A. Erect metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof
Decks.
B. Safety during erection is to be the sole responsibility of this Contractor.
C. Where possible, sheets shall span a minimum of three joist spaces, anchored at each
bearing.
D. Decking shall be properly aligned, with sides and ends lapped.
E. Fasten deck to steel support members, at ends and intermediate supports, with welds as
called for.
F. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1; decking of 22 gauge or less, require welding
washers.
G. Mechanically button punch side laps or screw as called for on the structural drawings.
H. Unless specifically noted otherwise, attachment shall provide restraint in accordance with
the applicable building code at the place where the project is located.
A. Field inspection shall be performed in accordance with the SJI and The Building Code.
See Structural Drawings for additional inspection requirements.
B. Provide free access to Work, and cooperate with the appointed firm. Provide lift access
for the Testing Agency.
C. Welds shall comply with AWS Standards for Visual Inspection; the Testing Laboratory
method which he feels is necessary for a specific situation.
D. Any necessary corrective measures, and re-inspection, are to be at no extra cost to the
Owner.
3.4 FINISH
A. After erection, areas where galvanizing has been damaged shall be touched up.
B. Field welds and washers shall be cleaned and given one prime coat of an approved cold
galvanizing compound.
PART 4 COMPLETION

4.1 CLEANUP
A. All work shall be left clean and undamaged.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05400 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Load bearing, and non-load bearing, formed steel stud wall and partition framing, in place.
B. Formed steel joist and purlin framing, including bridging, in place.
C. Field priming.
A. Section 09260 – Gypsum Board
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
B. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Galvanized by Hot Dip Process.
C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM C955 - Load-Bearing Steel Studs, Runners, and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw
Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.
E. AWCI Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries - Specifications Guide for Cold Formed
Steel Structural Members.
F. AWS D1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code.
G. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association - Guidelines for the Use of Metal
Framing.
A. Design loads are to be as called for as required by the governing code at the place where
the Project is located. These loads shall include seismic and wind loads.
B. Design of conditions and connections not detailed is to be in accordance with standard
structural engineering practices and the appropriate reference documents.
C. The system design shall allow for normal, minor movement of components without undue
fastener stress, or other detrimental effects.
D. The system design shall allow for normal construction tolerances, structural framing
deflection, opening clearances, etc.
E. When required, framing design is to be under the direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work, and licensed at the place where the
Project is located.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
1. Indicate component details, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or
items required for related work.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures or conditions requiring special
attention.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 05400 – Light Gauge Metal Framing
A. Perform Work in accordance with reference documents.
B. Design, manufacture and installation of light gauge cold-formed steel framing shall
conform to the latest edition of “Specification for the Design of Cold-Form Steel Structural
Members” by AISI.
C. Welding shall conform to the latest edition of the welding code by the American Welding
Society.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
manufacture of specified items.
B. Erector: A company, with a minimum 10 years experience, specializing in performing the
work of this Section.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Light gauge framing members of type, gauge and size called for in the drawings.
B. 14 and 16 Gauge Members: ASTM A446, Grade D (fy = 50,000 psi).
C. 18 and 20 Gauge Members: ASTM A446, Grade A (fy = 33,000 psi).
D. Finishes:
1. For gypsum board or plywood, the fabricator's standard rust-inhibitive paint in
conformance with the appropriate Federal Specifications.
2. For metal lath and plaster, zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A525.
E. Exterior Walls, or Interior Load Bearing Partitions: In general, 16 gauge, minimum studs
and track; "C" studs with 1-5/8" flanges, or 2" where called for or required.
F. Interior Non-Load Bearing Partitions: 18 gauge minimum studs and track; 1-3/8" flanges.
G. Drywall Partitions: 20 gauge only.
H. Floors and Ceilings: In general 18 gauge, except where a heavier gauge is called for or
required.
I. Where non-load bearing partitions extend to the structure above, a compression space
detail shall be utilized as called for; where no detail is shown, the Office of the Engineer
shall be contacted.
J. All members and accessories shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, Class
G-60.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. All appropriate tracks, web stiffeners, anchors, fastening devices, plates, gussets, clips,
etc., as called for or required for conditions encountered.
B. All appropriate bracing, bridging, and furring members, as called for or as required for
conditions encountered.
C. Track shall be provided as continuous top and bottom support for all walls. Un-punched
track shall be used for end closure of all exposed joist ends.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Appropriate self-drilling, self-tapping screws, or bolts with washers and nuts, as called for
or as required for conditions encountered.
B. Powder actuated or drilled expansion type fasteners as called for or as required for
conditions encountered.
C. All fasteners are to be of corrosion resistant materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of embedded or other anchorage items, etc.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Framing components prefabricated into panels shall be held firmly in position until properly
fastened.
B. Prefabricated panels shall be square and braced against racking.
C. Fastening shall be by welding, self-drilling screws or bolting. Tie wire fasteners shall not
be permitted. Screws or studs shall be of sufficient size to insure the strength of the
connection. All welds of galvanized steel shall be touched up with a zinc-rich paint.
D. All metal stud walls not extending full height (generally 12U high) shall be braced at 4 feet
on center to the overhead structure.
E. Do not attach to ductwork or any mechanical equipment.
F. Provide additional framing and brackets to support equipment supported at suspended
acoustical ceiling systems, such as the projection screen, toilet partitions, etc.
G. All partition metal stud walls extending to structures above shall be provided a deflection
track detail. This detail should allow for compression of the wall due to deflection above.
The gypsum wallboard shall end just below this double track. Submit detail for review and
approval.
H. Temporary bracing shall be provided as required until erection is completed and safely
secured to structure.
3.3 ERECTION
drawings, by the Office of the Engineer, shall be for design intent only.
B. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct
erection as designed.
C. All members shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
D. All work shall be erected plumb, level and properly aligned.
E. All members shall be installed to prevent rotation, and tied and anchored to develop the full
strength of the assembly.
F. All temporary supports and bracing shall be provided as necessary to stabilize members,
and to safely maintain all loads imposed during erection.
G. Safety during erection is to be the responsibility of this Contractor.
H. Welding in accordance with AWS D1.3.
I. Studs shall be fastened to top and bottom to track by manufacturer's recommended
fastening method. Studs shall be secured to prevent twisting.
J. Wall stud blocking or bridging to prevent minor axis bending and twisting shall be provided
as required per manufacturer’s specification and as shown the drawings.
K. Headers and sills shall be provided where required for openings.
3.4 ERECTION (LOAD BEARING WALLS)
A. Complete, uniform, and level bearing support shall be provided at bottom runner (track).
B. Abutting lengths of runner (track) shall be securely attached to a common structural
element, butt-welded or spliced.
C. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and tightly nested in both the upper and lower runners
(tracks) with secure attachment to the flanges of each runner.
D. Framing of wall openings shall include headers and supporting studs.
E. Splices in bearing studs shall not be permitted.
F. Stud sizes and spacing shall be as shown on the drawings. Submit alternatives for review
and approval.
3.5 ERECTION (JOISTS)
A. Joists shall be located directly over bearing studs or a load distributing member.
B. Web stiffeners shall be provided at reaction points and points of concentrated loads and
where required on the drawings.
C. Joists bridging/blocking shall be provided as required by manufacturer but not exceeding
6'-0" on center.
D. End blocking shall be provided where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation.
E. Additional joists shall be provided around all floor and roof spacing which interrupt on or
more members unless otherwise noted.
F. Joist size and spacing shall be as shown on the drawings. Alternatives shall be submitted
for review and approval.
3.6 TOLERANCES
3.7 FINISH
A. After erection, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be touched up.
B. If galvanized finish has been damaged, it shall be touched up with an approved cold
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
B. Refer to pertinent portions of Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary
Controls, and Section 01700 Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Miscellaneous metal fabrications, in place.
B. Templates shall be furnished, where required.
C. This contractor is advised that he is required to review all drawings and include all
miscellaneous steel items depicted or called for anywhere in the drawing set or
specifications. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Rough hardware
2. Steel stairs, walkways, ships ladders and ladders; including related components
3. Steel and fiberglass grating
4. Steel handrails and railing systems
5. Bollards, pipe guard assemblies and door protection post assemblies, including
related components
6. Highway guardrail and posts
7. Lintels and jamb channels in masonry walls for doors, windows and similar
openings
8. Support frames and sleeves for openings in roof and elevated construction; for
mechanical equipment, roof drains, exhaust fans, intake hoods, ductwork and
similar items coordinated with the Mechanical Drawings
9. Support frames and sleeves for openings in interior and exterior walls; for louvers,
mechanical fans and similar items coordinated with the Mechanical Drawings
10. Support frames and sleeves for floor openings
11. Door frames
12. Angles and flat bars embedded in floor slabs
13. Embedded angles and channels at dock leveler pits and foundation walls
14. Miscellaneous steel angles, channels, plates, rods and hangers
15. Freezer vent covers
16. Abrasive safety tread/nosing at concrete stairs.
17. Tactile Warning Strips, where required, shown or called for
18. Field touch up of primer paint
D. Metal fabrications are detailed on Site, Structural, Architectural and Mechanical Drawings.
E. The Fabricator shall detail all components and assemblies for compliance with local
building codes and OSHA requirements.
A. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 13 05500 – Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
B. Section 04300 Unit Masonry System
C. Section 05120 Structural Steel
D. Section 05210 Steel Joists and Joist Girders
E. Section 05311 Steel Deck
F. Section 05400 Light Gauge Metal Framing
G. Section 09900 Painting
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications
noted below, including latest editions of applicable specifications, codes, and standards
cited therein, and latest applicable addenda and supplements. Copies of specifications
noted below shall be kept available in shop and field:
B. IBC 2009
C. “Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,”
American Institute of Steel Construction, latest edition including supplements thereto as
issued. (AISC Specification).
D. “Code for Welding in Building Construction (AWS D1.1-90).” American Welding Society.
(AWS Code).
E. “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members – American Iron
and Steel Institute. (AISI SPEC).
F. N.A.A.M.M. Specification – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
G. “Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads”
ANSI/NAAMM A202.1 Metal Bar Grating Manual.
H. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM) Standards and Specifications shall
apply to all materials.
I. Any material or operation specified by reference to published specifications of
manufacturer or published standard shall comply with said specification or standard. In
case of conflict between referenced specifications, most stringent requirement shall
govern. In case of conflict between referenced specifications and Project Specification,
Project Specifications shall govern.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 - Black, and Hot-Dipped Zinc-coated, Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
C. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.
D. ASTM A123 - Zinc Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and Forged
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
E. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating on Iron and Steel Hardware.
F. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
G. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
H. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
I. ASTM A386 - Zinc-Coating on Assembled Steel Products.
J. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Round and Shapes.
K. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
L. ASTM A123/123M – Zinc-Coating on Iron and Steel Products
M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code
N. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer, fabricate,
and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of the building code
in effect at the project location, ASTM E 894 and E 935.
1. Concentrated load of 200 lb. applied at any point non-concurrently, vertically
downward or horizontal.
2. Uniformed load of 100 lb. per linear ft. applied non-concurrently, vertically
downward or horizontal.
B. Treads and Steel Stairs: Uniform load of 100 lb. per sq. ft. or concentrated load of 300 lb.
on an area of 4 sq. inches located in the center of the tread, whichever produces the
greater stress.
C. Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lb. per sq. ft. or
concentrated load of 300 lb. located in the center, whichever produces the greater stress.
A. Fabricator: Firm experienced in successfully producing miscellaneous metal fabrications
similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce
required units without causing delay in the Work.
B. Installer: Arrange for installation of ornamental metal work specified in this section by
same firm, which fabricated them, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the following:
1. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”
2. AWS D1.2 “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum”
D. Certify that each welder employed in unit of Work of this section has satisfactorily passed
AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone
recertification.
E. Testing for recertification is Contractor’s responsibility.
A. Field Measurements: When required take field measurements prior to preparation of shop
drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Do not delay job progress; allow for adjustments and fitting where taking of
field measurements before fabrication might delay Work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site and store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this work with other related Sections of Work.
B. The fabricator shall detail all stairs, landings and guards to conform to the latest
requirements of the building code in effect at the project location and OSHA regulations.
1.10 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General requirement surfaces: Those surfaces that are exposed to view shall be true,
smooth and free from blemishes, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled or scribed
trademarks, roughness and scale.
B. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications: ASTM A36, ASTM A53 Grade B, ASTM A283, or other
appropriate standards for specific items as applicable.
C. Steel tubing, hot-formed, welded or seamless: ASTM A501
D. Steel bars and bar sized shapes: ASTM A306 Grade 65 or A36
E. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108 Grade as selected by fabricator
F. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM 336
G. Galvanized steel carbon sheets: ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G90 galvanizing
H. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48 class 30
I. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47 grade as selected by the fabricator
J. Steel pipe: ASTM A53 black pipe. Schedule 40 unless otherwise detailed
K. Aluminum Plates, Shapes and Bars: Alloy 6061-T6
L. Aluminum Pipe: Alloy 6061-T6
M. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish
as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Concrete inserts: Use ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A27 cast steel, galvanized
where threaded or wedge type are used. Bolts, washers and shims shall be ASTM A153
hot-dip galvanized.
O. Stainless steel: Sheet and pipe shall be ASTM 276, Type 304L, 2B mill finish
P. Bolts and Nuts at Steel Connections: ASTM A325, with hardened steel washers
Q. Anchor Bolts at Concrete Masonry: ASTM A307
R. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; of type as appropriate for materials being welded
S. Shop and Field Primer: Unless specifically noted otherwise, SSPC, Type 1, light gray
Note: Materials used shall not contain lead.
T. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC cold galvanizing compound
U. Non-shrink grout, where called for, is to be General Construction grade, natural aggregate
material; "Set-Grout", as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., or an approved alternate.
2.2 FABRICATION
drawings, by the Office of the Engineer, shall be for design intent only. Review of shop
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct fabrication as
designed.
B. All items shall be fabricated true, plumb and level; all units shall be welded and/or bolted to
develop the full strength of the assembly, as designed. Joints shall be accurately cut,
mitered, and connected as designed.
C. Continuously seal weld-joined members; where not specifically called for, a minimum 3/16"
continuous fillet.
D. Where appropriate, welded joints shall be ground smooth; this is especially important for
interior "finish" type work exposed to touch or close-up view. Work having significant
grinding flaws will not be accepted.
2.3 FINISH
A. Prepare miscellaneous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP3, Power Tool
Cleaning.
B. Shop prime members; one prime coat is required, except for portions to be embedded in
concrete or masonry, surfaces requiring welding, or contact faces of bolted connections.
C. Galvanizing shall be done following fabrication, where specifically called for, in units as
large as practical.
2.4 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING
A. All ferrous metal, except stainless steel and galvanized surfaces and castings to be left
unpainted shall be cleaned with SSPC, SP-3 (Power Tool Cleaning) and given one shop
coat of TNEMEC Primer, 37H (gray). Anchors that are built into masonry shall not be
primed.
B. Metal work to be encased in concrete shall be left unpainted unless specified or noted
otherwise. Where hot-dip galvanized or zinc-coated materials are specified or shown, they
shall not be shop primed unless specifically required. Castings that are to be left
unpainted shall be cleaned and coated with a coal-tar-pitch varnish.
C. Hot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings applied on products fabricated from rolled, pressed
and forged steel shaped plates, bars and strips shall comply with ASTM Specification
A123. Hot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings shall be as designated in Table 1 for the class
and thickness of material to be coated. Galvanized surfaces for which a shop coat of paint
is specified shall be chemically treated to provide a bond for the paint. Except for bolts,
nuts and threaded rod, all galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. All window and door
exterior lintels in masonry walls shall be galvanized.
2.5 GALVANIZING
A. Galvanize steel members, fabrications and assemblies after fabrication by the hot-dip
process in accordance with ASTM A123/123M.
B. Galvanize bolts, nuts, washers and iron and steel hardware components in accordance
with ASTM A153/153M.
C. Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143.
D. Handle all articles to be galvanized in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage
and to minimize distortion.
E. Conform to paragraph 6.1 of ASTM A123/123M, Table 1 of ASTM A153/153M, or Table 2
of A767, as appropriate.
F. Surface Finish: Continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and
free from any defect detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article.
G. Adhesion: Withstand normal handling consistent with the nature and thickness of the
coating and normal use of the article.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of stubbed-out bolts at foundations and walls,
3.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form miscellaneous metal fabrications to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, but
not less than required to comply with requirements indicated for structural performance.
B. Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of units. Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind
finished surfaces without distortion of exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of all
welding flux, and dress on all exposed and contact surfaces.
D. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to
weather to exclude water penetration.
E. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arises.
F. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous
metal fabrications to be in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other
connectors as required.
B. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set products accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and
true, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in
formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where
indicated, with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting,
welding and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of miscellaneous
metal fabrications, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such corrective work.
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
items with such finishes to shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing
or provide new units as required.
E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation and flashings as the work progresses, so
as to make work weather tight, soundproof or lightproof as required.
F. Restore protective coverings, which have been damaged during shipment or installation of
work. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other
work yet to be performed at the same location.
1. Retain protective coverings intact and remove simultaneously from similarly
finished items to preclude non-uniform oxidation and discoloration.
G. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual
shielded metal-arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds made, and for methods
used in correcting welding work. Weld connections, which are not to be left as exposed
joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed
welded joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent rail surfaces.
H. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum, which will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint
or zinc chromate primer.
3.4 FRAMES FABRICATED FROM STRUCTURAL SHAPES AND/OR PLATE
A. Provide fabricated steel lintels for openings as scheduled and detailed. All exterior
masonry lintels shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
B. Construct frames to sizes indicated, of steel channels, bent plates, steel angles, steel plate
or combination of shapes as detailed. Frames shall be accurately squared, mitered, butted
or coped as necessary, shall be full welded and all welds on exposed surfaces ground
smooth. Concealed clip angles shall be welded or flush-riveted to the bottom of jamb
members and provided with two ½" diameter floor bolts for each clip angle. Provide sill
members where indicated. All frames shall be hot-dipped galvanized unless otherwise
noted on Drawings.
C. Provide steel strap anchors of sizes and spacing indicated, welded to back of frames for
anchoring onto masonry, concrete or to steel as necessary. Where size and spacing of
anchors are not shown, use ¼" x 2" x 8" straps with ends turned 2". Space anchors not
more than 16" on center if in masonry, locate on courses.
D. Construct stanchion for block heater plug-in as detailed on Electrical Drawings. Submit
Shop Drawings for approval before fabrication.
3.5 STEEL RAILING SYSTEMS AND PIPE ITEMS
A. Fabricate steel pipe railings and handrails using 1½" diameter nominal, Schedule 40 pipe,
designed, dimensioned and detailed as required. Provide railings and handrails members
formed of pipe of sizes and wall thickness as required to support design loading. Space
vertical posts or brackets not greater than 6’-0" on center
B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal
connectors, at fabricator’s option. At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. At
bends interconnect pipe by means of prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends, as
applicable, of acceptable radiuses. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in
jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain
cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.
1. Non-welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for
interconnection of members by means of concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce
flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
2. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where
this represents fabricator’s standard splicing method.
3. Welded Connections:
a. Fabricate handrails and railing systems for interconnection of members by
concealed internal welds, which eliminate surface grinding, using fittings
designed and fabricated for this purpose.
b. Fabricate handrails and railing systems of materials for interconnection of
members by welding. Use welding method, which is appropriate for metal
and finish indicated and develops strength required to comply with
structural performance criteria. Finish exposed welds and surfaces
smooth, flush, and blended to match adjoining surfaces.
4. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending members, insertion of
prefabricated elbow fittings, radius bends, or by mitering.
5. At elbow bends provide mitered joints.
6. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
7. For framework and railing systems with non-welded connections, which are
exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide
weep holes or other means for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of
railing members.
C. Return ends of wall-mounted handrails, except where otherwise required, to within ¼" clear
of finished wall. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place
or by use of prefabricated fittings.
D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings
and handrails to other work. Wall brackets to be #306 by Julius Blum & Co., Inc. or
approved equivalent.
1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing
systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices, which are
capable of withstanding loadings imposed by handrails and railing systems.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
E. For railing posts set in concrete, provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 6
inches long and with an inside diameter not less than ½ inch greater than the outside
diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve and of width and
length not less that 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve.
F. Hot-dip galvanized exterior steel railings after fabrication, including pipe, fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and other ferrous components. Provide primed steel pipe for interior railings.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF STEEL RAILING SYTEMS
A. Adjust railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts stiffeners at interval indicated but not less than that required by design
loadings.
B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with fittings designed for this purpose.
C. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact or use
fittings designed for this purpose.
D. Anchor railing ends into concrete or masonry with fittings designed for this purpose.
E. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with fittings using concealed fasteners.
F. Anchor framework ends to metal surfaces by welding.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at
intervals not to exceed 40 ft. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond
joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, located joint within 6 inches
of post.
3.7 STEEL STAIRS AND LANDINGS
A. Provide complete stair assemblies of type indicated and including metal framing, hangers,
columns, railings, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other
components required for support of stairs and platforms.
B. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels or plates or a combination
thereof, and platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing
members, of size indicated or required to support design live loads of 100 psf. Bolt or weld
headers to stringers, newels and framing members to stringers and headers. Fabricate
and join so that bolts, if used, do not appear on finish surfaces.
C. Metal plank grating for stair loadings shall be galvanized steel with anti-skid surface and
shall be able to support live loads of 100 psf.
D. Metal plank grating for stair treads shall be 2” deep x 10” wide (minimum) galvanized steel
with anti-skid nosing.
E. Galvanized grating stair treads shall be by USG Industries, McNichols Co., or equivalent.
Grating treads shall be side bolted, serrated top or diamond plated as noted on Drawings,
cast abrasive nosing, bar style, galvanized press-locked or welded, 1½" high, and provided
with galvanized hold down clips which screw attach at landing intermediate supports.
F. Metal plank grating and stair treads shall be “19-SGCS-4 Series”, manufactured by Ohio
Gratings, Inc.
3.8 LADDERS
A. Shall be 2’-0" wide constructed of 2½" x d" flat bar stringers with ¾" round, deformed, slip
resistant, steel rungs at 1’-0" on centers. Provide 1" standard pipe stringer stiffeners for
the stringer portions extending above rungs. Stringers shall project 3’-6" above platform.
Fabrication and installation shall conform to OSHA requirements. Provide anchors at top
and bottom and at intermediate points where detailed. Install top rung flush with the top of
gravel stop or floor elevations. Provide protection cages with lockable safety cage as
shown on the Drawings. Exterior ladders shall be hot dip galvanized.
3.9 STEEL GRATINGS
A. Metal Bar Gratings: Produce metal bar gratings indicated per NAAMM marking system
that complies with “Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating
Treads published in ANSI/NAAMM A202.1 “Metal Bar Grating Manual”.
B. Welded Heavy Duty Steel Gratings: W-19-4 (welded with bearing bars 1-3/16 inch on
center and cross bars 4 inches) bearing bar sizes as indicated; plain traffic surface.
C. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated for attachment
to supports.
D. Provide not less than 4 saddle clips for each grating section.
E. Furnish threaded bolds with nuts and washers for each clip required.
F. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetration as indicted. Arrange layout of cutouts
to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.
G. Edge band openings in grating which interrupt 4 or more bearing bars with bars of same
size and material as bearing bars.
H. saddled style hold down fasteners on all grating, attach with stainless steel or galvanized
self tapping bolts.
3.10 FIBERGLASS GRATING
A. Grating for floor pits, trenches and equipment platforms shall be 1½” thick fiberglass, 1½” x
1½” pattern with CP-84 resin by Chemgrate. Color shall be green. Provide stainless steel
hold down clips. Attach to support members with stainless steel screws.
B. Grating for floor pits, trenches and equipment platforms shall be 1½" thick fiberglass, 1½"
x 1½" pattern with CP-84 resin by Chemgrate. Color shall be Green. Provide stainless
steel hold down clips; attach to support members with stainless steel screws.
3.11 BENT PLATE ANGLES
A. Provide all 10 gauge (unless heavier is shown on Drawings) bent plate galvanized angles
as detailed on the Architectural Drawings and Structural Drawings.
B. Weld angle in place at the edge of the roof deck to provide accurate alignment for the wall
panels.
C. Provide all bent plate angles shown as "pour stops" for elevated concrete slabs.
3.12 STEEL PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanize where indicated. Fill pipe
bollards with 3000 psi concrete after installation.
B. Fabricate bases for bollard anchorage from steel plate welded to bottom of pipe.
C. Close top of bollards with welded pipe caps.
3.13 METAL BEAM GUARD RAIL
A. Steel posts shall be W8x10, galvanized, A36 steel sections. Beam rail shall be 10 gauge,
galvanized standard section, provide wrap-around end sections.
B. Steel posts shall be W8 x 10, galvanized, A-36 steel sections. Beam rail shall be 10
gauge, galvanized standard section, provide wrap-around end sections.
3.14 STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A. Fabricate from structural shapes and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded
together. Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk machine screws. Reinforce
frames and drill and tap as required to accept finish hardware.
B. Provide steel strap anchors of size indicated for securing door frames into adjoining
concrete or masonry for a minimum 8 inches embedment. Weld anchors to frames.
C. Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames
for anchoring to floor with expansion shields and bolts.
D. Galvanize frames and anchors where indicated.
3.15 STEEL LINTELS
A. Provide steel lintels of sizes and arrangements shown on drawings. Unless otherwise
shown, provide a bearing length at each end of lintel equal to one inch for each foot of
lintel span length, with minimum 6 inches.
B. Exterior lintels shall be galvanized.
3.16 CASTINGS
A. Provide galvanized cast iron abrasive stair tread nosing for cast in place concrete stairs
where detailed on the Drawings. Nosing shall be 4" wide and OSHA approved for non-slip.
Nosing shall be style 801 by American Safety Tread Co, Inc., P.O. Box 611, Helena, AL
(800-245-4881).
3.17 STEEL SLEEVES IN WALLS AND FLOORS
A. Provide steel sleeves in walls and floors as noted on Drawings. All steel sleeves shall be
hot-dipped galvanized unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
3.18 FREEZER VENT SCREEN COVERS
A. Provide a 1½" wide 10 gauge stainless steel plate ring 7" in diameter at 4" PVC pipe, 9" in
diameter at 6" PVC pipe.
B. Provide an interior 3/16" wide 10 gauge stainless steel plate ring 7" in diameter at 4" PVC
pipe, 9" in diameter at 6" PVC pipe.
C. Provide a 6½" in diameter at 4" PVC pipe, 8½" in diameter at 6" PVC pipe, 1” square
opening, 16 gauge stainless steel wire screen.
D. See Drawing for detail. Vent screen fastened to wall with (3) ¼" Tap-con fasteners for
screen.
3.19 BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide bearing and leveling plates for all joist, beam and column bearing locations.
Provide embedded anchors attached to plates as shown on the Drawings.
3.20 TREADS, NOSINGS AND WARNING STRIPS
A. At Exterior "Industrial" Concrete Stairs: Type 101 Alumo-grit Safety Treads/nosing, with
wing type anchors at 12" on center, 5/16" x 3" cast aluminum stair nosing with cross-
hatched surface abrasive with concealed steel anchors; 1-1/2" minimum concrete
penetration.
B. Tactile warning strips (where required, shown or called for): Type 660 Super-grit strip with
wing type anchors at 12" on center, staggered in two rows. Color to be Safety Yellow, or
as selected.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers include Wooster Products Inc., Wooster, Ohio (800) 321-4936,
American Safety Tread, Helena, AL (800) 245-4881 or approved equal.
D. Installation: Cast integrally with concrete stairs. Maintain flush condition at edges. Begin
stair tread in 2" from sides of stairs. (At steel pan stairs, provide 1/8" clearance at each
end. Protect abrasive surfaces with tape during concrete placing operation. Clean off all
over run concrete to neat, straight line. Remove all tape and concrete residue from nosing
prior to final acceptance.
3.21 INSTALLATION
A. All work shall be installed in accordance with reviewed shop drawings; review of shop
installation as designed.
C. Install items plumb and level, properly aligned and accurately fitted, free from distortion or
other defects.
D. All temporary supports and bracing shall be provided as necessary to stabilize items, and
to safely maintain all loads imposed during erection.
E. Safety during installation is to be the responsibility of this Contractor.
F. No alteration shall be made to members without the approval of the Engineer.
3.22 CONNECTIONS
AWS and AISC Requirements.
3.23 WORKMANSHIP
A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake rust and rust pitting; well
formed and finished to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces.
Shearing and punching shall leave clean true lines and surfaces. Weld or rivet permanent
connections. Welds and flush rivets shall be finished flush and smooth on surface that will
be exposed after installation. Do not use screws or bolts where they can be avoided;
where used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight and threads nicked to prevent
loosening. Welds in stainless steel shall be made with the Heliarc-inert atmosphere
process. Grind and polish all welds to match the finish.
B. Castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage,
distortion or other defects. Casting shall conform to the dimensions indicated with a
tolerance of plus or minus c", except in the dimensions of covers and the openings to
receive them shall be limited to plus or minus 1/16". Castings shall be smooth and well
cleaned by shot blasting or other approved method. Covers subject to street or foot traffic
shall be made "non-rocking" by having machined horizontal bearing surfaces, provide
machined bearing or contact surfaces for other joints where indicated or required.
C. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of
assembly and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather
shall be formed to exclude water. Provide holes and connections for the work of other
trades.
D. At proper time, deliver and set in place items of metal work to be built into adjoining
construction.
E. The Contractor will verify all dimensions at the job site before commencing fabrication.
A. As applicable, where related to structural steel applications, inspection shall be performed
in accordance with the AISC, and under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Provide free access to Work, and cooperate with the appointed firm.
C. The Testing Laboratory Representative may require, of the Contractor, any reasonable
modification of work, which is necessary to allow proper inspection.
D. Welds shall comply with AWS Standards for Visual Inspection; the Testing Laboratory
method, which he feels is necessary for a specific situation.
E. Additional inspection, re-inspection, and any necessary corrective measures, are to be at
no extra cost to the Owner.
3.25 TOLERANCES
A. As applicable, allowable variation from plumb, level, and alignment; in accordance with
3.26 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be touched up.
B. Field connections (welds, bolt heads, nuts, and washers) shall be cleaned and given one
prime coat, using the same material as the shop coat.
C. If galvanized finish has been damaged, it shall be touched up with an approved cold
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
Separate Sections.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 6 - WOOD
SECTION 06112 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, transportation and scaffolding
necessary to complete the rough carpentry work as shown on or reasonably implied by the
Drawings or Specifications. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. All rough carpentry work including setting hollow metal door frames.
2. Furnish and install foundation perimeter insulation.
3. Provide blocking in metal stud walls for wall mounted cabinets and equipment.
4. Provide wood sills and ledgers where shown and required.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. All wood and blocking related to cold storage insulation and cold storage doors are
specified in Division 13.
B. Finish carpentry is specified in Section 06200.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ALSC: American Lumber Standards Committee - Softwood Lumber Standards.
B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.
C. APA: American Plywood Association.
D. AWPA: American Wood Preservers Association C1 - All Timber Products Preservative
Treatment by Pressure Process.
E. AWPA: American Wood Preservers Association C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant
Treatment by Pressure Process.
F. NFPA: National Forest Products Association.
G. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
H. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings, where appropriate.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Where appropriate, certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
B. Maintain one copy of each installation related reference document, on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor specializing in performing the work of this Section, with a minimum of 10 years
documented experience.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 06112 – Rough Carpentry

1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Framing lumber is to be DF-L, or Hem-Fir, or lumber of equivalent stress value as
commonly used at the place where the Project is located.
B. Except as otherwise called for; where structural notes are included, minimum stress
grades shall be as follows, as applicable.
1. Beams (4x) Fb 1500 Structural Joists & Planks, No. 1
2. Beams (6x & up) Fb 1600 Beams & Stringers, Select Structural
3. Joists Fb 1500 Structural Joists & Planks, No. 1
4. Studs (2x4) Fb 800 Light Framing & Studs, Stud Grade
5. Studs (2x6 & up) Fb 725 Structural Joists & Planks, No. 3
6. Posts (4x4) Fb 1050 Light Framing & Studs, Construction Grade
7. Posts (5x5 & up) Fb 1200 Posts & Timbers, No. 1
8. Blocking, Plates,
a. (2x4) Fb 800 Light Framing & Studs, Stud Grade
9. Blocking, Plates,
a. (2x6 & up) Fb 725 Structural Joists & Planks, No. 3
C. At exterior walls or at interior bearing walls, studs are to be Fb 1400 (min.); blocking and
plates Fb 1250 (min.).
2.2 PLYWOOD
A. All plywood is to be Douglas fir, graded as per U.S. Product Standard PS-1, of the
thickness noted.
1. APA C-C Plugged and Sanded, Group 2, Exterior - for unfinished utility
applications.
2. APA A-C, Group 1, Exterior - for painted applications.
3. Where specifically noted, APA Medium Density Overlay (MDO), Group 1, Exterior,
of thickness noted.
4. Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, as noted in the drawings; as a wall
diaphragm where called for.
5. Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, as noted in the drawings; as a floor

6. Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, as noted in the drawings; as a roof
B. APA recommendations shall be followed for sheet edge support; solid blocking, tongue-
and-groove edges, or "ply-clips" (except that the latter are not to be used at floors).
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. All framing in contact with (or within 1" of) masonry or concrete shall have a pressure
preservative treatment that is non-corrosive to metal connectors and nails in the presence
of moisture.
1. Pentachlorophenol or an approved alternate. Net retention is to be 0.40 pcf, in
accordance with AWPA.
2. Penetration damage incurred during handling, field cuts, field drilling, etc. are to be
treated in accordance with AWPA.
B. Where called for, or required, fire-retardant treated lumber shall be used.
C. Underlayment: Structural particleboard, with smooth sanded faces, of thickness called for.
D. Perimeter Insulation: Installed as noted, and of dimensions called for, having the following
minimum properties:
1. Extruded Polystyrene - 1.6 pcf minimum density, 25 psi minimum compressive
value, "K" factor of 0.18, and flame spread of 25 or less.
2. Where required, adhesive is to be "Kold-Fas" 82-09, as manufactured by the N.B.
Fuller Co., (800) 231-9541, or an approved alternate recommended by the board
stock manufacturer.
E. Isolation Material: Where called for at structural separations such as Warehouse/ Office
Structure junctures - watertight, compressible, pre-formed, isolation joint material.
F. Polybutylene saturated polyurethane foam; "Polytile Standard", as manufactured by the
Sandell Manufacturing Co. (617) 491-0540, or an approved alternate.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Bolting Anchors: "Wedge-Type", of diameter as noted.
1. Approved Manufacturer’s:
a. "KWIK BOLT", as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems.
b. "RAWL-STUD", as manufactured by the Rawlplug Company.
c. "PARABOLT", as manufactured by the Molly Company.
2. Where not specifically called for, lengths and minimum embedment must be as
recommended by the manufacturer for the thickness of the fastened member.
3. Data submitted for the units to be used shall be accompanied by an ICBO
Evaluation Report, or similar data for the governing code at the place where the
Project is located
B. Any bolt head or nut bearing against wood shall be provided with malleable iron washers;
only at sill plates will cut washers be accepted.
C. Framing Connections: Unless specifically noted otherwise, "Strong Tie" as manufactured
by the Simpson Co.
1. If alternate items are used, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure
that the item substituted is equivalent in size and carrying capacity to the item

called for.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field connections are acceptable and are ready to receive work. Ensure that
1. Special attention shall be given to verification of stubbed-up bolts at foundations,
3.2 FRAMING ERECTION
A. All framing shall be erected true to line, plumb and level, and shall be tied, anchored,
bolted and spiked together to develop the full strength of the assembly, in accordance with
the requirements of the UBC, or other governing code at the place where the Project is
located.
B. Except as otherwise noted, nailing is to be as per the UBC, or other governing code at the
place where the Project is to be located.
C. Except where specifically noted otherwise, or approved in writing, staples in lieu of nails will
not be acceptable.
D. All temporary supports and bracing shall be provided as necessary to stabilize framing,
and to safely maintain all loads imposed during erection.
E. Safety during erection is to be the responsibility of this Contractor.
3.3 PLYWOOD APPLICATION
A. At walls, plywood shall be installed with a minimum space of 1/8" between sheet edges, to
permit expansion.
B. At floors, plywood shall be installed with sheet edges touching.
C. At roofs, except for T & G material, plywood shall be installed with edges touching; after
nailing, all joints shall be saw cut to permit expansion.
D. Plywood shall be installed with sheet lengths at right angles to support framing, and with
sheet ends staggered; ends shall occur at centers of framing members.
E. Unless specifically noted otherwise, and except for T & G edges, all edges shall be solid
blocked.
F. Tops of all floor support members shall have a continuous 3/16" minimum bead of
waterproof, carpentry adhesive.
G. Where not specifically noted nailing spacing is to be the following, as a minimum:
1. 6" on center at all edges and 12" on center at intermediate supports.
H. Where not specifically noted, nail sizes are to be the following, as a minimum.
1. 1/2" Wall Sheathing - 10d common nails.
2. 1/2" Floor or Roof Sheathing - 8d common nails.
3. 5/8" or 3/4" Floor or Roof Sheathing - 10d common nails.
I. For diaphragm sheathing, nailing shall be as specifically noted or scheduled.

A. Where appropriate for structural framing situations, field inspection will be performed under
provisions of Section 01400.
B. Provide free access to Work, and cooperate with the appointed firm.
C. Any necessary corrective measures, and re-inspection, are to be at no additional cost to
the Owner.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 6 - WOOD
SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete all the finish carpentry
work shown or reasonably implied in the Drawings or Specifications. This includes, but is
not limited to:
1. Base cabinets, wall cabinets, vanities, counters, etc. in place.
2. Interior casework hardware, anchorage accessories, etc.
3. Shelves and window curtain/hanger rods.
4. Wood trims; including base, chair rail, door and window frames.
5. Wood mail slots, wall paneling, coat hook panels.
6. Telephone back boards.
7. Display cases.
8. Installation of miscellaneous items and materials, provided under this and other
Sections. This includes, finish hardware, hollow metal doors, toilet partitions, toilet
and washroom accessories, etc.
9. Furnish and installation of “Ideal Shield” bumper post sleeves at guard posted door
protection.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Factory prefabricated custom casework, for installation under this Section.
B. Section 09900 Painting
C. Exterior casework hardware, for installation under Separate Section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood
B. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard
C. HPMA - Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association; American Standard for Hardwood
and Decorative Plywood
D. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association
E. AWI - Quality Standards and Guide Specifications
F. ANSI A208-1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard
G. BHMA A156.2 - Cabinet Hardware
H. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings showing unit or component profiles and elevations, assembly methods and
details, connection items, hardware locations, etc.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 06200 – Finish Carpentry

C. Samples: Trim and veneer materials for casework.
D. Color selection chips for plastic laminate materials, and pre-finished materials furnished as
a part of this work.
E. Manufacturer's cut sheets for interior casework hardware.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Perform work in accordance with reference documents.
C. Where specifically requested, inspection and testing in accordance with AWI Quality
Certification Program.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A company specializing in the fabrication of the items specified in this Section,
with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.
A. Deliver materials and items to site and store, protect, and handle under provisions of
Section 01600.
1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD OF QUALITY

A. Unless specifically shown otherwise, all millwork shall comply with Architectural Woodwork
Institute Custom quality standards.
B. AWI Quality Standards and Guide Specifications shall be a part of this Specification as
though fully included herein.
2.2 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: AWI Custom Grade, plain or quarter sawn Fir or Pine of quality suitable
for opaque finish.
B. Hardwood Lumber: AWI Premium Grade, rift sawn, Red Oak of quality suitable for
transparent finish.
C. Wood door and window frames, door and window casings, door stops and window glazing
1/4” round to be clear (stain quality) red oak.
2.3 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: AWI Custom Grade, rotary cut, Fir or Pine with exposed face C.S. "A"
for opaque finish.
B. Hardwood Plywood: AWI Premium Grade, rift cut, Red Oak with exposed face(s) P.S.
"Premium" (A) for transparent finish.
C. Wood Particleboard: For concealed components only; AWI grade to suit application.

D. Plywood for shelves shall be ¾” thick x 11½” deep (unless otherwise noted), grade B-B.
2.4 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. High Pressure Type: General purpose, 0.0625" material for exposed use.
B. Low Pressure Type: Melamine, 0.035" for semi-exposed use, and 0.020" for concealed
use, backing, etc.
2.5 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive for Wood: Moisture resistant, resorcinol-formaldehyde resin.
B. Adhesive for Plastic Laminates: Contact type cement for high pressure laminate; type as
appropriate for low pressure laminate, as recommended by the laminate manufacturer.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Wherever possible concealed items, of corrosion resistant material; type(s) as
appropriate for the application.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Stainless Steel or Aluminum Edge Trim: As appropriate for backsplash edging at wall
surfaces.
B. Wood coat hook panels shall be Model 941, red oak with radius edge, with two (2) each
Model 923 hooks (clear).
C. Wash bay rods and curtains shall be 1¼” diameter galvanized pipe with wall brackets and
36 oz/sy rubberized canvas, 8’ tall.
2.8 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A. Brush apply an appropriate oil base back-prime material for concealed faces of all millwork
items and materials.
2.9 INTERIOR CASEWORK
A. Base and upper cabinets shall be a custom grade, plastic laminate faced, prefabricated
units with concealed offset hinges. Units shall be flush overlay with drawers, shelves and
pulls.
B. Wood mail slots shall be constructed with ¾” plywood A-A, with hard wood edge banding.
Wood to be clear (stain quality) red oak. Both sides of wall to be trimmed with #1402, by
Boise M & L Co. Mail slots shall be 4” x 12”, unless otherwise noted.
2.10 INTERIOR CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. Shelf Brackets: Knape and Vogt recessed end standards, with adjustable brackets.
Typically natural color; to match finish hardware for exposed conditions.
B. Drawer Slides: Grant, ball bearing type, full extension with 100 lb. capacity per pair.
2.11 EXTERIOR CABINET HARDWARE
A. Handrail brackets, etc., as manufactured by Stanley, Grant Hardware, or an approved
alternate.
B. Door and drawer pulls are to be "hairpin" type; approximately 3-1/2" x 1-3/8" in size, of
5/16" (+) diameter bent rod.
2.12 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP)
A. Where specified, as a facing or finish, at framed partitions and/or ceilings. This does not
apply to materials applied to prefabricated, insulated panels specified in Division 13.

B. Wall and/or ceiling panels shall be KEMLITE Kemply with Surfaseal fiberglass reinforced
plastic panels as manufactured by KEMLITE COMPANY, Joliet, Illinois, USA Phone: 1-
800-435-0080 or 1-815-467-8600, Fax: 1-815-467-8666. Panel finish is to be white, class
"C" (ASTM E84); 30% glass fiber by weight, 15% maximum inorganic fillers.
C. Wall Panel types are to be 0.090" minimum solid material sheets, or with 0.050" minimum
finish permanently bonded to APA exterior grade plywood; particle board backing will not
be acceptable.
D. Trim moldings are to be white vinyl, of configurations called for, or required, for a moisture
tight installation. Aluminum angle trim, where called for, shall have finish to match panels
and non-corrosive fasteners as noted.
E. Where adhesive is required it is to be as specifically recommended by the FRP material
manufacturer.
2.13 FABRICATION
A. All work shall be fabricated in accordance with approved shop drawings; approval of shop
B. Shop prepare and identify components for site erection.
C. When it will be necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting.
D. Where appropriate, shop assemble work for delivery to site.
2.14 SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand all work smooth, and set exposed nails and screws at casework.
B. Apply filler in exposed fastener indentations at casework.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use filler which matches surrounding surfaces of
type(s) recommended for finishes to be applied.
D. Back prime all work as necessary.
E. Cabinets shall have appropriate protective wrappings applied for shipment to the site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of work of other trades which affect this
work.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK AND RELATED ITEMS
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Standards.
B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components; do not use additional overlay trim to
conceal gaps.
C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level and properly aligned.
D. Install and anchor materials and components with fasteners and/or adhesive as
appropriate for the application.
E. All exposed fasteners shall have heads set and filled. All work shall be left sanded smooth
and clean, free of all adhesive, dirt, stains, or blemishes of any nature.

F. Laminated plastic shall be smoothly and uniformly bonded and flat, in lengths as long as
possible. Jointing must be neat, tight, and hairline. Self-edging shall be applied with all
edges neatly and uniformly beveled.
G. Install exterior casework hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
H. Following completion, all casework shall have taped covers replaced; covers shall remain
until time for finishing under Separate Section.
I. Counters shall be supported with ¾” plywood plastic laminate covered bracket supports at
4’-0” on-center (maximum), unless otherwise noted.
J. Shelf supports: Where shelving is indicated as “adjustable”, provide slotted type standards
and brackets of type needed to properly support shelves with uniform 40 lbs. per square
foot loading. Where room finish schedule indicates shelving, provide 5 wood shelves high
with 2” x 3” continuous wood cleat supports below each shelf, fastened to 2” x 4” vertical
up-rights, at min. 4’-0” on center
3.3 FRP MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. At wood or light gauge metal framed construction, solid sheet material shall be applied to
previously and properly attached gypsum board or plywood, in a full bed of adhesive which
has been properly scored with a notched trowel. The sheets shall be firmly rolled flat and
smooth.
B. Sheet edges shall be fastened at 6" on center; galvanized finish nails at wood framing, and
non-corrosive, countersunk, flat head screws at light gauge metal framing. Edges are to
have one piece continuous cover molds or heavy duty batten strips as detailed or required,
to conceal fasteners; corners are to have cover molds or angles, as called for or required.
C. At wood framed construction, material factory-bonded to plywood maybe used. The
sheets shall be applied to framing faces which have been fully coated with adhesive which
has been properly scored with a notched trowel. Edges are to have one piece continuous
cover moulds or heavy duty batten strips as detailed or required, to conceal fasteners;
corners are to have cover molds or angles, as called for or required.
D. The sheets shall be firmly rolled at all bearing points at framing. Edge fastening and cover
molds and angles shall be provided as required to trim the sheets.
E. Typically, moldings and trim shall be set with white silicone sealant at the warm side of
partitions, and without sealant at the cold side.
F. All work is to be left clean and undamaged, free of adhesive and sealant smears, including
all adjacent surfaces.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Install Finish Hardware, and other items normally installed as a part of this work, in
accordance with the appropriate Sections of the Specifications.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
Separate Sections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07213 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Batt and blanket insulation for walls, ceilings, deck flutes and joist bearing end spaces.
B. Fire safing at openings, penetrations, deck flutes and joist bearing end spaces, as
required.
A. Section 05400 Cold Formed Light Gauge Metal Framing
B. Section 06200 Finish Carpentry: Perimeter insulation at foundations.
C. Section 07533 Roof Insulation
D. Division 13 Thermal insulation, for cold storage areas, when this is
required.
E. Divisions 15 and 17 Insulation as may be called for, or required, for work of
other trades.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing.
B. FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, (Mineral Fiber for Ambient Temperatures).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data on product characteristics, performance criteria,
limitations, etc.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of the materials specified in this
Section, with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.
B. Installer: A Contractor who has successfully completed a minimum of two recent projects,
of comparable size and type, using the manufacturer's products.
A. Deliver materials to site and store, protect and handle under provisions of Section 01600.
1.8 COORDINATION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 07213 – Batt and Blanket Insulation
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RELATED WORK

A. Portions of Sections 05400 and 06112 apply, as appropriate.
2.2 AT LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING: For temperature, and/or sound deadening; "Thermafiber"
products, as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., Thermafiber Div., or an approved alternate.
A. Interior studs, normal - M-S blankets, of one or more layers as required to fill stud spaces.
B. Interior studs, staggered - Sound attenuation blankets, of one or more layers as required to
obtain a nominal thickness equal to the wall space depth, woven between studs.
C. Exterior studs - M-S blankets, of one or more layers as required to fill stud spaces, or the
entire void if exterior finish material creates a space deeper than the studs.
D. A separate, 6 mil polyethylene vapor barrier shall be installed under the interior wall finish.
E. Except as specifically called for, insulation will not normally be required at suspended
acoustical ceilings.
F. At furred exterior wall conditions - "Z" furring blankets, of one or more layers as required to
fill furred space.
G. Where insulation is installed at partitions separating areas of different temperatures - a
separate, 6 mil polyethylene vapor barrier shall be installed under the wall finish at the
warmer side.
2.3 AT DECK FLUTES AND JOIST BEARING END SPACES: All deck flutes and joist bearing end
spaces shall be filled tightly with fiber insulation at the following conditions (whether called for or
shown on drawings or not):
A. Above walls constructed to bottom of decking or joist bearing, which effectively separate
conditioned spaces from each other or from non-conditioned spaces.
2.4 FIRE SAFING: For firestops to prevent passage of smoke, gases, or flame, at conditions where
required, at penetrations of walls, ceilings, floors, framing, at deck flutes and joist bearing end
spaces, etc., whether shown or called for on drawings or by this reference only.
A. "Thermafiber" products, as manufactured by U.S.G. Interiors, Inc., Thermafiber Div., or an
approved alternate.
B. Materials are to be rated non-combustible, as defined by NFPA Standard 220 when tested
in accordance with ASTM E136.
1. The material is to be tested, for various exposure periods, in accordance with
ASTM E119.
C. The material is to be minimum 4 pcf density, with melting point exceeding 2000oF, a
flamespread of 15 or less, and a smoke developed rating of 0; 25 and 5, respectively, for
foil faced material.
D. Appropriate wire supports, clips, etc. are to be furnished and installed as required.
E. Flameproof, smoke resistant caulking is to be used, as a part of the fire safing system,
where called for or required. Materials as specifically recommended by the safing material
manufacturer.
F. Deck Flutes and joist bearing end spaces above fire or smoke resistive wall assemblies
shall be fire safed, regardless of whether so shown on the drawings.
G. All flutes and bearing end spaces above walls separating one space from another shall be
filled. Spaces not included in requirements for thermal insulation listed in 2.4, A, above,
shall be filled with fire safing material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 RELATED WORK

A. Portions of 05400 and 06112 apply, as appropriate.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work.
B. Special attention shall be given to openings and penetrations, perimeters between stories,
etc.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Materials shall be installed to full height of partitions where areas are to be separated.
Where space above ceilings is required as an air plenum, in light gauge metal framing,
insulation shall be installed in stud spaces to a minimum of 4" above ceiling framing.
B. Materials shall be installed to full height of enclosed space at exterior wall framing,
including walls behind canopies, walls between ceiling height and upper floor or roof level,
etc.
C. Materials shall be installed full width of all areas, at drywall ceilings, or where insulation is
called for at framing above suspended acoustical ceilings.
D. Insulation shall fill all voids and shall be tightly fitted at all wall, partition, ceiling or floor
penetrations.
E. All work shall be carefully inspected, prior to application of finish material(s), to insure
completeness of work.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07533 ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings; including all termination details
B. Catalogue cuts for:
1. Roofing membrane
2. Insulation and tapered cants
3. Fasteners
4. Special vapor barrier
C. Color Charts/Samples for roofing related sheet metals
1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Uplift: Roofing per ASCE 7 and Perimeter Flashing per ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Guideline.
B. For cold storage roofing, the roofing membrane acts as the vapor barrier. No additional
poly layer is needed.
1.3 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE
A. Mock-Up: Prior to the installation of any roofing materials, a Pre-Roofing Conference shall
take place to construct a representative sample of the wall-to-roof juncture; complete with
special vapor barriers. The completed sample shall remain on-site as a standard for the
Project.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. In lieu of the requirements of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, provide
a 10-Year Total System Warranty.
B. The roofing contractor shall warranty the refrigerated portions of the building to be free of
frost causing vapor leaks for a two-year period from the date of occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Mechanically-Fastened: Provide all necessary anchorage to fully secure insulation and
roofing material for the specified wind uplift.
B. The roof system manufacturer’s standard specifications, for the selected system, shall
become a part of this specification as though fully included herein.
2.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Roofing Contractor shall provide a full-time roofing superintendent or foreman who is
experienced and knowledgeable in cold-storage construction. This superintendent or
foreman shall be on-site at all times when work is being performed and remain on the
project from start to finish.
B. Roofing Contractor shall provide roof edge warning line for entire perimeter of area being
roofed. In addition to roofing work mobilizations; include (1) extra mobilization for
installation of warning line prior to start of roofing work and one (1) extra mobilization for
removal of warning line after all other trades have completed their rooftop work. Regarding
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 07533 – Roofing and Sheet Metal
duration, assume warning line does not come down until substantial completion of project.
2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Loose-laid, mechanically-fastened, 60mil single-ply, reinforced, white, TPO membrane
roofing system. Approved manufacturers include:
1. Firestone
2. Carlisle
3. Johns-Manville
4. Genflex
5. Versico
6. or pre-approved equal
B. Furnish and install all accessories required for a complete roofing system. This includes,
but is not limited to: bonding adhesives, splicing cement, membrane cleaner, reinforced
flashing, sealants, water cut-off mastic, fastening plates and fasteners, prefabricated pipe
seals, preformed corners, etc.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. Flat and tapered roof insulation shall be polyisocyanurate; having the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength: 25 psi
2. FM Class 1 Approval for steel roof-deck construction
3. Maximum Single-Layer Thickness = 3 inches
B. Total thickness of roof insulation shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2.5 ROOFING RELATED SHEET METALS
A. Pre-Finished, Specially-Formed Metal: Minimum 24 gauge galvanized and pre-painted
(two-coats) sheet steel. ASTM A446, Grade “A” material, zinc-coated in accordance with
ASTM A525, G-90. Low to medium gloss baked KYNAR finish, with the reverse sheet face
coated for added protection.
B. Galvanized Metal Items: ASTM A446, Grade “A” material, zinc-coated in accordance with
ASTM A525, G-90. Parapet caps, parapet and curb flashing, gutters, etc shall be 26
gauge. Leaders, leader boxes, scuppers, etc shall be 24 gauge.
C. Gravel Stops: Butt end joints shall be set over concealed splice plates. Bottom edge shall
be fastened by hooking over a continuous cleat edge strip. Cleat shall be set in mastic and
fastened to wall panels.
D. Downspouts: Open-faced troughs with straps at 4’-0” o-c.
E. Reglets: 24 gauge, galvanized.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide 18” x 18” precast concrete splash blocks at the bottom of all downspouts, unless
they are being directly connected to an underground drainage system. When downspouts
are connected to an underground drainage system, provide a fitting to connect downspout
to underground pipe stub. This shall either be a fabricated metal piece, construction
matching downspout, or a pre-fabricated boot when possible.
B. Special vapor barrier for wall-roof juncture shall be non-reinforced peal and seal flashing
as offered as an accessory by the membrane manufacturer. Asphaltic peal and seal
products are not allowed.
2.7 FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
A. Two-component spray polyurethane foam system, FROTH-PAK by Dow or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSULATION PLACEMENT

A. Insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
B. No more insulation shall be laid than can be covered by roofing that same day.
C. Insulation shall be placed with tight joints (no gaps) and with end joints staggered 1/2
board length; succeeding layers shall be laid with joints staggered 12" minimum from the
layer below, in each direction.
D. To prevent gaps from foot traffic, roof insulation shall be fastened as soon as possible
following installation.
E. Install spray urethane foam insulation to fill all gaps or voids in the insulation, particularly at
the wall-roof perimeter juncture.
F. Whether shown on the drawings or not; install spray urethane foam on the top side of the
roof deck, filling low-flutes to top-of-deck, at all locations where interior wall panels do not
penetrate the roof deck and separate either refrigerated areas at different temperatures or
refrigerated areas from ambient areas. Top surface of sprayed insulation shall be shaved
so surface matches top-of-deck flutes. Spray insulation shall be placed 4’-0” on both sides
of partition walls.
3.2 ROOFING APPLICATION
A. Roofing membrane shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications.
B. To prevent shrinkage of roof insulation from overexposure to the sun, roofing membrane
shall be laid over insulation as soon as possible.
C. Work shall be scheduled and performed in a uniform manner to reduce traffic over in-place
work.
D. Plywood shall be used to provide work paths or work areas to protect in-place work.
E. Roof membrane shall not be placed over wet insulation. When there is a threat of wet
weather, insulation shall be covered with plastic sheets arranged, and securely anchored,
in shingle-fashion to drain water off the surface.
F. Whether shown on the drawings or not, expansion joints shall be included at all
building/structure expansion joints, between new and existing structures, and/or as
otherwise required by the roof system manufacturer.
3.3 METALS APPLICATION
A. Roofing related metals shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications.
B. All exposed fasteners shall be corrosion resistant, installed with neoprene washers, and
color coordinated when fastening pre-finished metals.
C. Any pre-finished metals damaged after installation shall be touched-up using the same
material as the original coating. Primed materials shall be touched-up with primer.
3.4 SPECIAL VAPOR BARRIERS
A. The roofing contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing roof-to-wall special vapor
barriers. This applies to all cooler and freezer partition walls that penetrate the roof deck
and/or all cooler and freezer exterior walls. The Low-Temp Contractor will be on-site during
all final terminations of the roof/wall juncture to ensure this work is being completed per the
specification and manufacturer details.
B. Special Vapor Barrier:
1. Hold back top layer of roofing insulation a minimum of one-half (½”) inch from the
inside face of the wall panel. Fill the resulting void with spray-urethane foam
insulation, two-passes, cut flush with roof insulation.
2. Fill “indented” exterior flutes of insulated wall panels with Vulkem 116; from top of
panel cap channel to a minimum four (4”) inches below the top of the wall panel.
Intent is to provide flush surface on exterior of panel. Do not proceed with
additional work until Vulkem 116 is firm to touch, not tacky.
3. Glue roof membrane to panel cap channel and then seal membrane to wall panel
with special vapor barrier
4. Attach edge metals and counterflash.
A. Field inspections by a Manufacturer’s Representative will be required at critical times
during construction, and following completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07615 DOCK AND DOOR CANOPIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precoated Galvanized steel roofing, associated integral flashings for truck dock and
entrance door canopies.
B. Counterflashings.
C. Painting: Prime and finish painting.
A. Section 05120 Structural Steel
B. Section 051210 Steel Joists and Girders
C. Section 05400 Cold Formed Light Gauge Metal Framing
D. Section 13070 Insulated Panels
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A361 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process for Roofing
and Siding.
B. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural
(Physical) Quality.
C. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual.
D. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening
methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, characteristics, and other
manufacturer’s data.
D. Submit specified trade association installation instructions.
E. Submit two samples 4"x4" inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
B. Maintain one copy of each installation related document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roof installations with
minimum 10 years experience.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 07615 – Dock and Door Canopies
provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this work with other related Sections of Work. See electrical plans for cut-in
light fixtures.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. In addition to the requirement of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract,
provide a 20 year minimum panel finish and weather-tightness warranty.
1.10 PERFORMANCE AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provision for thermal movements: The canopy system shall be designed to provide for
such expansion and contraction of component materials as will be caused by an ambient
temperature range of 150 degrees without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or
other detrimental effects.
B. Structural Properties:
1. The canopy wall system shall be designed to withstand the wind loads as derived
from ASCE 7-88 (formerly ANSI A58.1) “Minimum design loads for buildings and
other structures”, assuming a basic wind speed of 70 mph, and exposure “C”.
2. The deflection of any framing member in a direction normal to the plane of the
wall, when subjected to a uniform load deflection test at design pressures
specified above, in accordance with ASTM E 330, shall not exceed 1/180 of its
clear span.
C. Water Penetration
1. Provision shall be made for an internal secondary drainage gutter to drain to the
exterior face of the wall, any potential water entering at joints and/or condensation
occurring within the wall construction. Weep holes will be concealed.
2. No uncontrolled water penetration shall occur when the curtain wall is tested in
accordance with ASTM E 331. The differential static pressure difference use dint
he test shall be 15.0 pst.
3. Dynamic pressure: There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration as defined in
AAMA 501 at 15.0 pst.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDING SEAM ROOFING PANELS – CANOPY

A. General Description
1. Canopy panels shall be “Snap Seam” as manufactured by AEP Span or approved
Equal. Seams shall be 1 ¾” deep, panels 18” wide (SN-18).
2. Soffit shall be “Flush Panel” as manufactured by AEP Span or approved equal.
Seam shall be 7/8” deep, panel 12” wide (FP 12).
B. Materials
1. The panel shall be steel conforming to ASTM A446 Grade A, with ASTM A25
Class G90 galvanizing. Sheets shall be #22 gauge.
2. Finishes: The exterior panel facing will have a Kynar XL finish in one custom color
as indicated below:
a. Color – Selected by Architect.
b. The interior panel finish will be prime paint finish
C. Accessories: Provide clips, fasteners, caps, and flashing as required for a complete
system and as recommended b manufacturer. All accessories shall be non-corrosive.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. As required, these shall be the manufacturer’s standard unless otherwise specifically
called for.
2.3 JOINT SEALANT:
A. The manufacturer’s standard, color coordinated material applied to provide a weather tight
installation.
2.4 GASKETING:
A. The manufacturer’s standard, non-hardening, flexible material.
2.5 CLOSURE STRIPS:
A. The manufacturer’s standard, Pre-formed, flexible material conforming to metal panel
profiles.
2.6 EXPOSED FASTENERS:
A. The manufacturer’s standard, corrosion resistant type; pre-finished to match the panel
finish.
2.7 FIELD TOUCH-UP FOR PRE-FINISHED ITEMS:
A. The manufacturer’s standard, as used in the original fabrication.
2.8 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate sheet metal cleats, manufacturer’s standard, to interlockable with sheet.
C. Fabricate starter strips of same material as sheet, continuously interlocked with sheet.
D. Form pieces in single length sheets.
E. Hem exposed edges on underside; miter and seam corners.
F. Form material with standing seams.
2.9 FINISH
A. Pre-Finished items shall be given the manufacturer’s standard baked enamel finish, at
exposed faces, at exposed faces; single faced panels are to have rear faces coated for
corrosion resistance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
3.3 INSTALLATION
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct installation as
designed.
B. Safety during installation is to be the responsibility of this Contractor.
C. No alteration shall be made to members without the approval of the Manufacturer.
D. Pre-finished panels shall be carefully cut, fitted, and attached to framing members.
E. End laps shall be located at supports.
F. Concealed fasteners shall be used wherever possible.
G. Expansion/contraction joints shall be provided as required.
H. Gasketing and closure strips shall be fitted, and sealant applied, as required to provide a
tight fitting and weather tight installation.
I. The system shall be free of rattles, thermal movement sounds, and wind noise.
J. All accessories shall be properly fitted and installed, firmly anchored, and sealed to provide
a weather tight installation.
K. Care shall be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.
3.4 FINISH
A. If pre-finished surfaces have been damaged, they shall be touched up using the same
material as the original coating.
A. Field inspection shall be performed, under provisions of Section 01410.
B. Provide free access to Work, and cooperate with the appointed firm. The Representative
may require, of the Contractor, any reasonable modification of work which is necessary to
allow proper inspection
C. Re-inspection, and any necessary corrective measures, are to be at no extra cost to the
Owner.
3.6 FLASHINGS
A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit.
B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
C. Cleat and seam all joints.
D. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and
lines accurate to profiles.
F. Seal metal joints watertight.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07724 ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Prefabricated roof hatches with integral support curbs, operable hardware, and
counterflashings.
A. Installation
B. Painting
C. Padlocks
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Fire Hazard Classifications.
B. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) - Roof Assembly Classifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Submit edited product data or shop drawings, or a combination thereof,
as required to accurately describe products to be provided. Show elevations, field
measurements, reinforcement, anchorage, expansion provisions, installation accessories
and detail sections of composite numbers.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A company specializing in the manufacture of the items specified in this
A. Deliver items to site and store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600.
1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNITS
A. Prefabricated units, of series, size, etc., as called for; as manufactured by the Bilco Co., or
an approved alternate.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 07724 – Roof Hatches

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Weathertight, galvanized steel, including integral curb, with paint bond primer at all
exposed surfaces.
B. Neoprene gasketed cover.
2.3 FABRICATION
1. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Manufacturer of his responsibility for
correct fabrication as designed.
B. Curbs: Double metal faced, enclosing a minimum of 1" of rigid insulation; 9" minimum
height with integral, pre-drilled, metal flanges for mounting.
1. If flanges are light gauge, subject to flexing or "crinkling", the manufacturer shall
provide extra flat metal cover strips; the intent is to protect the membrane roofing
from cutting or tearing.
C. Lids: Double metal faced, enclosing a minimum of 1" rigid insulation; heavy duty pintle
hinges, spring operators, positive snap latch with interior lift handle, automatic hold-open
device, and interior padlock hasp.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of roof deck openings, anchoring framing,
etc
3.2 INSTALLATION
drawing, by the Office of the Engineer, shall be for design intent only.
1. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
correct installation as called for.
B. Care must be exercised to protect item finish, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
C. Units shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper operation and
latching.
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be touched up.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
Separate Section.
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 07724 – Roof Hatches

SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparation of substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backer rod.
A. Section 03400 Materials and application at joints for Specially Placed Concrete Floors,
when these are specified.
B. Division 13 Materials and application for thermal insulation work, when that work is
specified.
C. Section 02515 Materials and application for concrete paving, when that work is specified.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The Specification of the manufacturer whose material is selected, including installation
instructions, and all ASTM and/or Federal Standards included therein.
B. SWRI - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Color selection samples, of the actual materials.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements;
provide instructions for substrate preparation and installation.
B. Maintain one copy of each application related reference document, on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Applicator: A Contractor specializing in performing the work of this Section, with a
minimum of 10 years documented experience.
1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 07900 – Joint Sealants

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Joint Backer Rod: "Soft-Cell" by Sonneborn Building Products, or "Ethafoam" by the Dow
Corning Corp.
B. Sealant at Exterior Concrete Flatwork: Rubberized asphalt material which will not bleed or
run when exposed to sunlight.
1. Two component, self-leveling, fuel-resistant, non-priming material; "Sonomeric 2",
by Sonneborn Building Products, or an approved alternate
C. Joint Sealant: Two components, 100% solid, self-leveling, gray semi-rigid epoxy having a
minimum Shore “D” hardness of 50.
1. “MM-80”, as manufactured by the Metzger-McGuire Co., 1-800-2236680.
D. Joint Sealant at Freezer/Cooler Applications: Two part liquid, pour grad, 100% solids
epoxy resin having a minimum Shore “D” hardness of D79-85 at -20F, Polar Fill as
manufactured by Metzger-McGuire Co.
E. Sealant at Non-Traffic Joints: Floor slab perimeter joints, joints around columns, etc.,
where joint filler material is called for.
1. Single component, pourable, gray polyurethane material; “Vulkem 45”, as
manufactured by Mameko International, Inc. (216)752-5005, or an approved
alternate.
F. Interior Concrete Curb Sealant: USDA approved, white, non-toxic, mildew resistant, single
component polyurethane material; as manufactured by Mameko International, Inc. or the
Sika Corp.
G. Wall Joint Sealant: Tilt-up concrete wall panel joints, joints at door and window frames,
etc.
1. "Sonolastic NP2" by Sonneborn Building Products; "Dymeric" three component
(including "color pack"), as manufactured by Tremco, Inc.; "Vulkem 227", two
component, as manufactured by Mameko International, Inc.
H. All sealants shall match contiguous material surface colors, or paint colors; sealants shall
not be painted unless specifically noted as "paintable" in the manufacturer's literature.
I. Joint Cleaning Solvent: Toluol, Tylol or "MEK", unless otherwise specifically recommended
by the sealant material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. All joints shall be cleaned prior to sealant application; joints must be free of dirt, dust, oil,
grease, bond breaker, etc. Joints shall be brushed, vacuumed, cleaned by air pressure, or
otherwise treated as necessary.
B. Joint cleaning solvent shall be used in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Typically, sealant depths are to be approximately 1/2 of the width; depths may vary from +

1/4" to + 1/2".
B. Sawn joints must be filled to full depth, including joints requiring repeated applications.
C. Semi-rigid epoxy material is to be over-filled and ground smooth; this work must be done
by a thoroughly experienced applicator to prevent grinding damage to the floor surface.
D. Where joints between dissimilar materials are of excessive depth, a backing rod shall be
installed, prior to sealant application, as called for in D. of the foregoing.
E. Sealants shall be gun applied, or poured, as required by the specific material; materials
shall be applied to full depths required; skim beads will not be accepted.
F. Excess sealant shall be struck off with a tool or knife and removed as the work progresses;
finished beads shall be made flush with adjoining surfaces.
G. Sealant materials shall not be applied to damp surfaces, nor at temperatures lower than
those recommended by the material manufacturer. Refer to manufacturer's
recommendations for materials to be used in refrigerated areas.
H. For multiple component materials, joints shall be masked with tape, at both sides, to
prevent staining of adjoining surfaces.
I. Unacceptable joint work shall be raked clean and redone. Any necessary corrective
measures are to be at no extra cost to the Owner.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEAN UP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08111 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Hollow metal doors and frames, including glazing frames.
B. Preparation for electrical operation, if required.
A. Section 08800 Glazing, if required
B. Section 08710 Finish Hardware
C. Section 09900 Painting
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. CS24L – Commercial Standard, latest edition for Doors & Frames.
E. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) – The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel
Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
G. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
H. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Door schedule and details.
C. Frame schedule and details.
D. Manufacturer's literature.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of the items specified in this
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All work shall comply with the American National Standards Institute, Inc. recommended
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 08111 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
specifications, as sponsored by the Steel Door Institute.
1. All pertinent ANSI, SDI, UL, ASTM and NFPA requirements, noted therein, shall
apply.
B. This specification is intended in no way to prohibit the use of knock-down frames, unless
otherwise noted. Welded frames, with masonry headers, are only required where
installation is adjacent to masonry construction.
2.2 DOORS
A. Unless specifically noted or required otherwise; doors shall be heavy-duty, 1-3/4” thick,
swing type, flush with provisions, if scheduled, for glazing and/or louvers.
B. Door leaves up to 3’-0” in width and 8’-0” in height shall have 18 ga. minimum face sheets.
Greater dimensions shall have minimum 16 ga. face sheets.
C. Door leaves shall have flush end closures.
D. Provide concealed reinforcement for hardware. Doors shall be mortised, drilled and
tapped at the factory to receive mortise-type hardware. Location of hardware shall be as
standard for the manufacturer.
E. Uninsulated doors shall have honeycomb core laminated under pressure to face sheets.
Insulated doors shall have polyurethane core laminated under pressure to face sheets.
2.3 FRAMES
A. Single doors shall have 16 ga. minimum frames, double-doors shall have 14 ga. minimum
frames.
B. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for the installation of
hardware. Location of hardware shall be as standard for the manufacturer.
C. Each door opening shall be prepared for single-stud door silencers; three for single-doors,
two for double doors.
D. When welded frames are furnished:
1. Corner miters shall be ground flush to a seamless appearance.
2. Wall anchors shall be located within 6” of the top and bottom of each jamb,
immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb and
directly opposite on the strike jamb. Intermediate anchors shall not exceed 24”
spacing.
3. They shall be shipped with spreader bracing.
E. Where required, provide concealed metal reinforcement for lintels.
F. Paired doors shall be fitted with astragal strips, where called for or where appropriate.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Doors and frames at all exterior locations and adjacent to interior refrigerated areas shall
be galvanized.
B. All doors and frames shall have a baked-on prime coat finish, unless stainless steel is
scheduled.
C. If scheduled to be stainless steel; material shall be Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4
finish and all reinforcements and anchors shall be stainless steel.
2.5 FIRE-RATING
A. If scheduled to be fire-rated, doors and frames shall carry FM label, in addition to any other
testing agency labels required by the local authority.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All units shall be set plumb, level and properly aligned.
B. During installation, care shall be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage
to adjacent finishes.
C. Doors and hardware shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper
operation, latching, and locking.
D. Frames at all exterior locations and adjacent to interior refrigerated areas shall be drilled
and filled solid with SUFI (spray-urethane foam insulation) following installation. Drill hole
shall be patched, sanded smooth and touch-up painted.
E. All frames shall be caulked, full-perimeter, on both sides to adjacent surfaces.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum allowable variation from plumb, level, and alignment; per SDI.
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where prime coat or galvanizing has been damaged shall be
touched-up.
3.4 CLEANUP
Separate Section.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08211 WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Wood doors.
B. Preparation for electrical operation, if this is required.
A. Installation is by other specification section or scope of work.
B. Section 08800 Glazing, if this is required.
C. Section 08710 Finish Hardware
D. Section 09900 Staining
1.3 REFERENCES
A. HPMA - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
B. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
C. AWI - Quality Standards and Guide Specifications.
D. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
E. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction, veneer species, type and
characteristics, etc.
D. Samples: Submit two 6" x 6" samples of door veneer, or plastic laminates, as appropriate.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A company specializing in the fabrication of the items specified in this Section,
with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.
1.8 COORDINATION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 08211 – Wood Doors

1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All work shall comply with the Architectural Woodwork Institute Standards for Custom
Grade.
B. All pertinent ASTM, ANSI, UL, and NFPA Standards shall apply.
C. Stain Finish, Solid Core, Flush Panel Doors: Kiln dried, softwood, solid stave core
construction, with tightly fitted stiles and rails.
1. 1/8" minimum veneer of plain sliced red oak, or an approved alternate.
D. Adhesives: Typically water resistive with waterproof type at possible wet conditions, such
as toilet rooms, janitor rooms, shower areas, etc.
E. If labeled doors are scheduled, the Specification shall be modified as appropriate.
2.2 FABRICATION
B. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Fabricator of his responsibility for correct
C. Fabrication tolerances, and finish following fabrication, shall be as required.
D. All work is to be tightly fitted, fully glued, with veneers fully bonded.
E. Warp: Not to exceed AWIS Tolerances, when measured from a straightedge placed in
any position across the "hollow" face of the door.
F. Where scheduled, doors are to have glazed openings.
G. Where scheduled, doors are to have louvers.
H. Where scheduled, doors are to be rated and shall bear the appropriate label.
1. Rated doors shall be prepared for hardware by the fabricator, with label attached
in the appropriate position in accordance with NFPA Requirements.
2. The label shall be attached in the appropriate alternate position.
3. Subsequent modifications may be made only by certified suppliers or distributor's,
in strict conformance with Manufacturer's Inspection Services Procedures.
I. Templates shall be provided by the Finish Hardware Supplier.
2.3 FINISH
A. All doors shall be smoothly sanded, free of blemishes, tool marks, or other damage.
B. Doors shall have appropriate protective wrappings applied for shipment to the site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

B. Open protective wrappings at the appropriate time.
3.2 INSTALLATION
erection as designed.
C. Doors shall be stored flat, with wrappings opened for air circulation, in a clean, enclosed,
well ventilated area protected from damage and weather.
D. Doors shall be allowed an appropriate period to become acclimated to the project
temperature and humidity, prior to hanging.
E. Doors shall be fitted, with proper bevels, and the minimum standard clearance at all sides.
1. Non-rated doors may be trimmed equally at sides, and equally at top and bottom.
2. Rated doors may be trimmed only in accordance with AWI and other applicable
standards.
F. Hardware locations are to be as required; templates shall be provided by the Finish
Hardware Supplier.
G. Normally, doors shall be prepared for 1-1/2 pairs of hinges; doors 3'-6" or greater in width,
and/or 8'-0" or greater in height, shall be prepared for two pairs of hinges.
H. Doors shall be finish sanded and sealed as early as possible; this is especially important at
top, bottom and edges.
I. Care shall be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.
J. Doors and hardware shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper
3.3 TOLERANCES
appropriate AWI Requirements.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
Separate Section.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08300 HIGH-SPEED DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, supplies, services, all other necessary
incidentals, and adequate supervision necessary to complete this Work in accordance with
the referenced drawings, specifications and Bid Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HIGH-SPEED DOORS
A. Door #103B
1 Type: High-Speed Roll-Up Door
2 Model/Manufacturer: TURBO-SEAL INSULATED by RYTEC, or pre-approved equal.
3 Travel Speed: 100 inches/second
4 Dimensions: 9’-0” wide x 12’-0” tall
5 Temperatures: -10F Freezer / +34F Cooler
6 Door Mount Side: +34F Cooler
7 Fabric: Manufacturer’s premium fabric; standard color
8 Control Panel Location: right, +34F Cooler
9 Activation: pull-cord (both sides)
10 Floor slab: new
11 Vision panels: none
B. Door #101B
2 Model/Manufacturer: PREDADOOR NXT by RYTEC, or pre-approved equal.
5 Temperatures: +34F Cooler / +45 Repack Room
8 Control Panel Location: right, +45F Repack Room
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 08300– High Speed Doors
10 Floor slab: new
C. Door #101C
5 Temperatures: +45F Repack Room / +45F Refrigerated Dock
6 Door Mount Side: +45F Refrigerated Dock
8 Control Panel Location: left, +45F Refrigerated Dock
10 Floor slab: new
D. Door #102C
5 Temperatures: +34 Cooler / +45F Refrigerated Dock
6 Door Mount Side: +45 Refrigerated Dock
10 Floor slab: new
E. Door #104C
5 Temperatures: +55F Cooler / +45F Cooler
8 Control Panel Location: left, +55F Cooler
10 Floor slab: new
F. Door #104D
5 Temperatures: +34F Cooler / +55F Cooler
8 Control Panel Location: right (remote), +55F Cooler
10 Floor slab: new
G. Door #105D
5 Temperatures: +55F Cooler / +34F Wet Cooler
8 Control Panel Location: left (remote), +55F Cooler
10 Floor slab: new
H. Door #105C
5 Temperatures: +34F Wet Cooler / +45F Refrigerated Dock
6 Door Mount Side: +45F Refrigerated Dock
10 Floor slab: new
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish and install a control panel at each door. Control panel shall be NEMA 12, UL-
approved as a complete assembly and contain solid-state PLC controls. Controls shall be
clearly labeled.
B. Door limits shall be adjustable at floor level from the control panel, without the use of tools.
Mechanical limit switches are not acceptable.
C. Control panel shall include an integral rotary circuit breaker disconnect and be sole-source of
power distribution and control for all door components. Control panel door accessories shall
be designed to be fed with 480V/3Ph/60Hz power only.
D. Building electrician will provide/terminate 480V/3Ph power (single-feed) at door control panel.
The High-Speed Door Contractor is responsible for all power and control wiring downstream
of the control panel (this includes furnishing and installing step-down transformers as
required).
E. All doors shall have manual override in case of power failure.
A. Doors shall be designed for travel and environmental conditions (i.e. cooler doors shall be
condensation free and freezer doors frost free). At manufacturer’s discretion, doors shall be
outfitted with heat lamps, unheated blowers, and/or heated blowers to maintain these
conditions. If any of these features needed to be added after installation to maintain
condensation/frost free conditions, they shall be added at no additional cost.
B. Provide automatic close feature with adjustable time delay and manual override switch to
disable. Provide photo eye hold open safety sensors.
C. Provide two (2) wall-mounted mushroom head style push-buttons (NEMA 12) at each door.
One on each side of opening.
A. Provide shop drawings for all doors within two (2) weeks of receiving a written notice-to-
proceed or letter of intent.
B. Shop drawings shall be specific to the doors being provided; standard manufacturer detail
sheets requiring completion by the Design-Builder are not acceptable.
3.4 EXCLUSIONS
A. Steel bollards/goalposts providing doorway protection are by others.
3.5 WARRANTY
A. One (1) year parts and labor.
B. Five (5) year limited warranty on fabric.
C. Lifetime warranty on door counterweights and tension springs.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Sectional overhead doors, operating hardware, door controls and operators, in-place.
A. Section 11163 Loading Dock Equipment
B. Division 16 Electrical
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A216.1 - Sectional Overhead Type Door - NAGDM 103.
B. ASTM A227 - Hard Drawn Spring Wire.
C. ASTM A229 - Oil Tempered Spring Wire.
D. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot
Dip Process.
E. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial
Quality.
F. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Literature
B. Installation Instructions and Drawings, including Wiring Diagrams
C. Operator and Control Details
A. Design assemblies to withstand wind pressures, as required at the place where the project is
located.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: A company, with a minimum 10 years experience, specializing in the

B. Installer: An authorized installed of the manufacturer; who has completed a minimum of two
recent projects of similar size and type, using the manufacturer's product.
1.7 WARRANTY
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 08360 – Sectional Overhead Doors
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNITS
A. Doors shall be:
1. Thermospan 200 by Wayne-Dalton

2. Thermacore 592 by Overhead Door Corporation.
3. Or Pre-Approved Equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A526 galvanized to G60 minimum; pre-painted with manufacturer's
standard prime and finish coats.
B. Panels: Door panel sections are to be double-faced, 26 ga. minimum, galvanized steel with
galvanized steel ends and, when required, interior galvanized steel strut reinforcement.
Interior and exterior face sheets shall be separated by a rigid vinyl thermal break. Doors to
have weather tight seals between sections, sides, top and bottom.
C. Insulation: Foamed-in-place polyurethane; nominal 2 pcf density, flame spread of 75 or less,

and smoke developed as allowed by the governing code.
D. Hardware: All door hardware shall be heavy-duty galvanized steel; track rollers shall be ball-
bearing type. Track shall be 3” with high/vertical lift configuration, unless otherwise noted.
Tracks shall be one-piece. Torsion springs shall be 25,000 cycle springs.
E. Vision Panel: Unless specifically shown otherwise on drawings, doors shall have double
glazed view panels. See Architectural Drawings for layout.
F. Operators: Doors shall have manufacturer's power operation option, "job-rated" for this
installation. Operation speed shall be a minimum of 12” per second. Doors shall have bottom
safety edge. Motor voltage shall be 460V/3Ph/60Hz.
1. Operator installation position must be carefully considered, and clearly shown on

shop drawings; space may be critical at the interior wall face due to requirements for
other equipment.
G. Controls: Provide push-button controls and wiring diagrams to the Electrical Contractor for
installation.
1. Dock door controls will be included on the main dock equipment control panel.
2. Doors, not at dock positions, shall be provided with 3-button (open-close-stop)

stations, mounted on the interior side of the building.
H. Limit Switches: Dock doors shall be provided with upper and lower limit switches, including
additional contacts, as necessary for communication with operator and dock equipment. See
Section 11163 for additional information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. This Contractor shall verify all dimensions of doors, openings, framing, etc. in the field prior to
fabrication of the door, jambs and heads.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All Work shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and approved
shop drawings.
B. The Structural and Architectural Drawings have attempted to provide support for tracks,
torsion springs and motor operators. This Contractor is responsible for providing any
additional mounting supports not shown on the Drawings. Additional steel for motor operator
or torsion spring support shall be hot-rolled steel angles, painted finish.
C. Units shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper operation.
D. Doors shall be given a final adjustment for smooth operation and tight sealing after all
elements are in place (i.e. dock equipment installed).
E. Care shall be exercised to protect unit finish, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where finish has been damaged shall be touched-up.
3.4 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Aluminum doors and frames, including glazing frames, in place.
B. Operating hardware and finish hardware.
C. Gaskets, supporting blocks, etc., for glazing.
D. Perimeter sealant.
A. Section 08800 Glazing
B. Division 16 Electrical power supply, and connections, when power actuated operation is
required. Items for power operation which are not normally provided as a part of the work
of this Section; key card equipment, etc.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications
Manual.
B. AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From
Shop to Site.
C. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls.
D. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic
Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
E. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels.
F. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
G. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
H. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
I. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual.
J. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
K. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
L. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
M. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
N. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
O. Handicap Standards - As required at the place where the Project is located.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 08410 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Samples: Color selection chips; anodized or painted finish, as specifically called for.
D. Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.
E. Maintenance Data.
A. Design exterior systems to withstand wind pressures, as required at the place where the
project is located.
C. Field verify all window/door openings prior to fabricating windows/doors.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Installer: An authorized representative of the manufacturer who has satisfactorily
completed a minimum of two recent projects, of comparable size and type, using the
manufacturer's system.
1.9 COORDINATION
1.10 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLAZING SYSTEM

A. An aluminum entry and/or storefront glazing frame system designed, fabricated, and
installed in accordance with standards as specified; as manufactured by the Kawneer Co.,
or an approved alternate.
2.2 SERIES/STYLE
A. Except as otherwise specifically called for, the following shall apply:
1. Frame Members: Series "450" (1-3/4" x 4-1/2") and/or "451" (2" x 4-1/2").
2. Doors: Series "190".
3. Push/Pull Hardware: Style "F2".
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Exposed members are to be 6063-T5 alloy, extruded aluminum; minimum wall thickness
of 0.125".
B. Except where a painted finish is specifically called for, exposed members shall be caustic
etched, followed by an Architectural Class I anodic coating with integral color.
C. Exposed members are to have a protective coating; the material is to be easily removable
using water and a mild detergent.
D. Internal components, miscellaneous fasteners, and screws are to be stainless steel or
corrosion resistant materials of size and strength as appropriate for specific usage.
E. Glazing gaskets are to be tight fitting elastomeric material, with supporting blocks at
glazing units as required, for a fully resilient, weathertight installation.
1. These shall be provided for use during glazing, as installed under a Separate
Section
F. Except as otherwise called for, doors are to be single acting with offset pivot hinges;
surface closers with hold open device, and matched thresholds, shall be provided.
G. Where panic hardware is called for it is to be concealed, vertical rod type.
H. Door cylinders shall be keyed as required by the Owner.
I. Doors are to have full, pile type weather stripping.
J. Sealants: Wall joint sealant, as specifically called for at Section 07900, or as otherwise
specifically recommended by the system manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
B. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Manufacturer of his responsibility for correct
C. Fabricate components with minimum clearances, correct perimeter shim spacings, etc.
D. Joints shall be accurately fitted, securely jointed, hairline, and weatherproof.
E. Fasteners and anchoring attachments are to be hidden wherever possible.
F. Members shall be fabricated to withstand all imposed live and dead loads; member
deflection shall be within flexural limits of glazing, and shall allow full recovery of glazing
materials.
G. Members shall include internal reinforcement for structural requirements, and for hardware
backup.
H. The system shall be designed and fabricated to limit air and water leakage, as required by
appropriate AAMA and ANSI/ASTM Standards.
I. A weep drainage system shall be provided within the system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of wall openings, framing, etc.
3.2 INSTALLATION
drawing, by the Office of the Engineer, shall be for design intent only.
installation as called for.
C. The system shall be installed to allow for natural expansion and contraction, and normal
building movement, without damage to any component materials or deterioration of seals.
D. Care shall be exercised to protect unit finish, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
E. Operable elements shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where finish has been damaged shall be touched up, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to match anodized color or painted color.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum allowable variations from plumb, level, alignment, etc.; in accordance with
appropriate industry requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Excess sealant shall be carefully removed to prevent damage to member finish, and to
adjacent surfaces.
B. Protective coatings shall be removed and frame members washed down using warm water
and a mild detergent; members shall be rinsed and wiped dry.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed and/or operating sash; shop glazed.
B. Operating hardware and insect screens.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 101 - Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.
B. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for
C. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
D. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
E. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
F. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
G. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
H. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
I. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
J. FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic.
K. FS RR-W-365 - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening).
L. Handicap Standards - As required at the place where the Project is located.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Samples: Color selection chips.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Design exterior systems to withstand wind pressures, as required at the place where the
project is located.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 08520 – Aluminum Windows

1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLAZING SYSTEM

A. Anodized aluminum, pre-glazed, windows designed, fabricated, and installed in
accordance with standards as specified; as manufactured by Kawneer or an approved
alternate.
2.2 SASH
A. Standard, fixed with nailing flange type frames; thermal break type where double glazed.
Series BP insulated.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Exposed members are to be 6063-T5 alloy aluminum with anodized color as selected.
B. Exposed members shall be caustic etched, followed by an Architectural Class I anodic
coating with integral color.
1. Casement hardware may be enameled to match the anodized color
C. Units are to have a protective coating; the material must be removable using only water
and a mild detergent.
D. Units are to be complete, as necessary to provide a finished, weathertight installation.
E. Glazing is to be as follows:
1. Exterior Frames - Double glazing with clear interior panes and exterior panes
tinted in color as selected.
2. Interior Frames - Single glazing with clear panes
F. Glass for interior installations is to be of thickness necessary for opening size; glass for
exterior installations is to be of thickness necessary to withstand pressures generated by
wind velocities, as required for the place where the project is located.
G. Glazing moulds are to be in color to match frames, of mitered aluminum of continuous
vinyl, snap-in type, tightly fitted for a fully resilient, weathertight installation.
H. Sealant: Wall joint sealant, as specifically called for at Section 07900.
2.4 ALUMINUM SLIDING PASS WINDOW
A. Provide 275 Single Panel Slider Series; as manufactured by Ready Access, Inc (West
Chicago, IL) or approved equal.
1. Provide a manufacturer’s standard size that most closely matches dimensions
called for on the Drawings.
2. Provide clear anodized aluminum.
3. Operating mode shall be: manual open/self-closing.
4. Special features:
a. Window shall be operable from both sides (provide necessary hardware
and delete any self-locking upon close features).
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of wall openings, framing, etc.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Care shall be exercised to protect unit finish, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
B. Operable vents shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper operation,
latching, and locking.
3.3 FINISH
recommended by the manufacturer, to match anodized color.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Excess sealant shall be carefully removed to prevent damage to anodized finish, and to
adjacent surfaces.
B. Protective coatings shall be removed and frame members washed down using warm water
and a mild detergent; members shall be rinsed and wiped dry.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Finish hardware for hollow metal and wood doors.
B. Thresholds.
C. Weatherstripping.
D. Furnish and deliver to the job site all finish hardware required to complete the Work as
indicated on the Drawings and Specifications. Provide all trim attachments and fastenings
specified or required for proper and complete installation.
E. Meet with the Owner and Construction Manager to develop the keying schedule.
F. Many new doors have card readers, see schedule and plans for location.
A. Interior casework hardware.
B. Electrical power supply, and connections, when power actuated operation is required.
C. Items for power operation which are not normally provided as a part of the work of this
Section; key card equipment, etc.
D. Padlocks, by Owner, when these are required.
E. Hardware for industrial doors, storefront entries, roof hatches, toilet partitions, etc.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
B. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
C. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.
F. ANSI A117.1 – Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People.
A. Hardware Suppliers shall be provided with floor plans, door schedules and this Specification.
B. Suppliers will be expected to determine appropriate hardware "functions" and prepare a

schedule for submittal, together with manufacturer's catalogue cuts for all items.
C. Locks are to be of "Construction Master Key System". All doors shall be mastered grade and
mastered keyed.
D. A permanent keying system shall be agreed upon, between the Hardware Supplier and the
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 08710 – Finish Hardware

Owner's Representative, according to the Owner's requirements for security and building
control.
E. Permanent keys shall be shipped, by registered mail, to the owner.
F. Provide temporary construction cores at all exterior doors.
G. Quantities:
Furnish appropriate hardware for all doors in the Project. Approval of incomplete Hardware
Schedule or acceptance of incorrect quantities at the job site will not alter this requirement. It
is the intent of the Hardware Sets, indicated herein, to accurately list the hardware required for
each door on this project. However, should any doors have been inadvertently omitted from
the sets, it will be the hardware supplier’s responsibility to furnish hardware for these doors
that is of the same quality, type, size, function, and finish as that specified for similar doors on
the Project.
H. Requirements of Regulatory Authorities:
1. Comply with requirements of governing authorities. Furnish hardware of the type

required under applicable codes and ordinances. Furnish Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) – listed hardware at all labeled doors and frames. In the event that a labeled
door is inadvertently listed with a Hardware Set that does not meet the label
requirements for that particular door, it shall be the responsibility of the Hardware
Supplier to furnish the proper hardware to meet the label requirements.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in the compliance

with NFPA Standard No. 80, NFPA Standard No. 101, and Uniform Building Code
requirements. Provide only hardware, which has been tested and listed by UL or RM
for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and
door frame labels.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Formal hardware schedule.
C. Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified standards.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Hardware Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing

facilities who has been furnishing hardware for a period of not less than 10 years and who is
or who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant who is available, at
reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about the project’s hardware
requirements to Owner and Construction Manager.

A. Deliver materials to the site and store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600.
B. All items shall be delivered in their original packages, marked for installation locations to
coordinate with the hardware schedule.
1.9 WARRANTY
In accordance with the General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOCK AND LATCH SETS
A. The following manufacturer’s products may be offered:
1. Sargent
2. Schlage
3. Best
4. Corbin
5. Hager
6. McKinney
7. Glynn-Johnson
8. Von Duprin
9. Stanley
10. LCN
B. Lock and latch sets are to be as manufactured by the Schlage Lock Co., or an approved
alternate, as follows:
1. Series - D Heavy Duty
2. Unless otherwise noted, standard 2-3/4" backset.
3. Design - Athens (ATH)
4. Finish – 26D
5. Certification - ANSI A 156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.
6. Assemblies are to be UL rated, where rated doors are called for.
7. Locksets shall be provided with cylinders keyed to the keying schedule as described
above.
C. Where electrically actuated locksets are scheduled, appropriate finish hardware (DEU
Function) shall be provided as a part of the work of this Section.
1. This shall include a control module, a door transfer loop (or power transfer device),
and wiring within the door.

2. Doors shall be properly prepared and fitted as a part of the work of the appropriate
door Section of the Specifications.
3. Electrical power shall be provided, by the Electrical Contractor, to a junction box

located above the ceiling at the wall where the door is located.
4. This circuit shall include necessary switches and transformers; the control module
shall be provided, by the Hardware Supplier, to the Electrical Contractor.
5. In addition, the Electrical Contractor shall provide conduit and wiring from the control
module to the electrical connection at the door jamb.
D. The following items are to be of finish compatible with lock and latch set finish; only closers
may have a sprayed on finish:
1. Hinges:
a. Non-removable pins at exterior doors.
b. Five-knuckle Ball bearing type at doors with closers.
c. Normally, doors are to have 1-1/2 pairs of hinges.
d. Doors 3'-6" or greater in width, or 8'-0" or greater in height, are to have two
pairs of hinges.
2. Closers:
a. Certification - ANSI A 156.4, Grade 1.
3. Panic devices, where called for or required, and not an integral part of door units, (i.e.,
aluminum entrances, etc.). Units shall be labeled for fire rating of door(s). Except
where specifically noted as "Exit Only", panic device shall include exterior trim with
lever handle which can be unlocked by key. Cylinders shall match lockset cylinders.
"Exit Only" installations shall have no exterior trim.
4. Kick plates, where called for shall be 10" height, with eased edges and counter-sunk
holes for screw mounting; as manufactured by Ives, or an approved alternate.
5. Provide door stops, at all latch/lockset doors floor type if appropriate. Omit at doors
with closers.
6. Weatherstripping, where called for, Series 294 (finish as appropriate), as

manufactured by Pemko, or an approved alternate.
7. Provide Ives silencers at all hollow metal frames, Model 20.
8. All necessary templates shall be provided.
9. Provide one key cabinet suitable for 40 keys. Unit to be Kekab T-40 by MPL or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All work shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Care shall be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
C. Hardware shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper operation, latching
and locking.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
B. Refer to pertinent portions of Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls,
and Section 01700 Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08800 GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Glass and glazing for:
1. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
2. Hollow Metal Doors
3. Wood Doors
A. 08520 Aluminum Windows
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing
Used in Buildings.
B. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
C. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
D. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
E. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
F. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical
Position.
G. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
H. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
I. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
J. FGMA - Sealant Manual.
K. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
L. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent
Release Type.
M. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound, Rubber Base, Two Component.
N. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic-Rubber Base, Single Component,
Chemically Curing.
O. FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
P. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not
for Channel or Stop Glazing).
Q. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual.
R. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association.
S. Manufacturer's Instructions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 08800 – Glazing

B. Product Data: Provide structural and physical characteristics.
C. Samples: Submit two 12"x12" samples of each type, color, and pattern of materials used.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Installer: A Contractor who has satisfactorily completed a minimum of two recent projects,
of comparable size and type, using the manufacturer's materials.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS THICKNESS AND TYPE

A. Where not specifically noted, glass for interior installations shall be of a thickness
necessary for opening size.
B. Where not specifically noted, glass for exterior installations shall be of a thickness
necessary to withstand pressures generated by wind velocities, as required for the place
where the Project is located.
C. Where not specifically noted, determination of glass thickness is the responsibility of this
Contractor, and shall be in strict accordance with the recommendations of the glass
manufacturer and standard industry practices.
D. Where required by Code, glazing shall comply with all applicable Consumer Products
Safety Standards.
E. Where not specifically noted, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to determine the need
for heat strengthened glass (for thermal stresses) or for tempered glass (for human safety)
at walking areas.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Minimum approximate shading coefficients, for the usual glass thicknesses and tints, are
to be as follows:
1. Clear Monolithic 1/8" 1.00
1/4" 0.95
2. Clear Insulating 1/8" (1/4" airspace) 0.89
1/4" (1/2" airspace) 0.82
B. Cleaning solvents, primer/sealers, glazing compounds, and accessories are to be as
specifically recommended by the glazing material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work. Ensure that
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer/sealer.
C. Prime surfaces where necessary.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All work shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. All exterior glazing shall be set to provide a completely weathertight installation.
C. Glazing with metal stops, where required, shall be set with glazing tape or fully bedded in
glazing compound. Excess compound or tape shall be neatly cut away.
D. Glazing in entrance and storefront frames, where required, shall be set with pre-formed
gaskets and supporting blocks provided with frames.
E. Care shall be exercised to protect materials, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess glazing materials from finished surfaces, and from adjacent surfaces,
without scratching or otherwise damaging those surfaces.
B. Remove labels after work is complete.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. After installation, mark panes with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape, or paste and
tape. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
B. Markings shall be left in place until time of final cleanup at Substantial Completion of the
Project.
C. Warped, scratched, or broken glass shall be replaced at no extra cost; this is to include
glass damaged following installation.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Gypsum board, in place, including miscellaneous galvanized metal accessory items.
B. Taping and sanding.
C. Textured finish, when this is specified.
D. Cementitious backing board, when this is specified.
A. Light gauge metal framing systems.
B. Acoustical ceiling systems.
C. Building insulation.
D. Applied finishes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board.
C. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
D. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard.
E. ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
F. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
G. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
H. ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.
I. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Where appropriate, special details for fire resistive construction,
acoustical seals, etc.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal accessories, joints, etc.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of the products specified in this
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 09260 – Gypsum Board

B. Installer: A company specializing in performing the work of this Section, with a minimum of
10 years documented experience.
A. Delivery materials to site and store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600.
1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RELATED WORK

A. Portions of Sections 05400, 06112, 09311, 09900 and 09955 apply, as appropriate.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Materials are to be as manufactured by the U.S. Gypsum Co., or an approved alternate.
B. Insofar as possible, all materials, accessories, etc., are to be from a single manufacturer;
items or materials not manufactured by the gypsum board manufacturer are to be as
specifically recommended by that manufacturer.
C. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all gypsum board is to be 5/8" thick; where rated
construction is required it will be so noted or scheduled.
D. Materials are to be water resistive or fire resistive types where so noted or scheduled, or
where used in Locker Rooms, Shower Rooms or Toilet Rooms.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Cover beads, edge mouldings, furring channels, etc. are to be standard zinc coated items
as called for, or as normally required.
B. Fasteners: At wood framing, phosphate coated nailers with dimpled heads; at light gauge
metal framing, Type "S", corrosion resistant, self-tapping "bugle" head screws.
C. Joint Materials: Standard width, perforated joint tape with standard joint compound.
D. Texture Finish: Standard, latex-based compound.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Backing Board: 1/2" or 5/8" thick (as appropriate) high density, glass fiber
reinforced material; the board for cementitious backer units.
B. The board is to be 4' x 4' or 4' x 8', with one side smooth (for mastic) and one side textured
(for mortar); joint tape and cement as specifically recommended by the board
manufacturer.
C. "Durock Cement Board", as manufactured by the U.S. Gypsum Co., or an approved
alternate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 RELATED WORK

A. Portions of Sections 05400, 06112, 09311, 09900, and 09955 apply, as appropriate.

3.2 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of alignment tolerances of framing, proper
backing for work of other trades, openings for miscellaneous penetrations, etc.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Wall boards shall be installed horizontally, with sheet ends staggered; joints shall occur at
center lines of studs.
B. Ceiling or soffit boards shall be installed at right angles to framing, with sheet ends
staggered; joints shall occur at center lines of joists.
C. Boards shall be neatly cut, and tightly fitted, at all intersections, penetrations, etc.
D. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to comply with the requirements of the
OBBC, or other governing code at the place where the project is located, for the following:
1. Fastener length, gauge, and head diameter for board thickness used, and for
layered work for rated conditions.
2. Fastener spacings, at board edges and intermediate bearings, for both single
sheets and layered work for rated conditions.
3. Board edge laps at layered work for rated conditions
E. Metal trim accessories shall be installed, in single lengths where possible, at exterior
corners, where gypsum board abuts other materials, etc. This does not include edges
which will be covered by metal frames, wood casings, etc.
F. Fastener head shall be set only deeply enough to support a covering of spackle.
G. All joints (and related fastener heads) shall be taped and sealed; all exposed intermediate
fastener heads shall be sealed. This does not include fastener heads, which will be
covered by metal frames, wood casings, etc.
H. All surfaces to receive enamel shall be sanded smooth.surfaces to receive thinset ceramic
tile need not be sanded.
I. Surfaces scheduled for paint (i.e. not enamel) shall have a uniform, light to medium "skip
trowel" texture applied following taping and sealing.
J. Care must be exercised to protect finished surfaces, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
Separate Sections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09311 CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Ceramic tile finish, as called for.
B. Thresholds at door openings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. TCA A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive.
B. TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
C. TCA A108.6 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable
Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy.
D. TCA A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
E. TCA A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy.
F. TCA A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
G. TCA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2.
H. TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
I. TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
J. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
A. The Contractor shall recommend alternate materials or methods, in accordance with TCA
Specifications, if he is not in agreement with the material and/or application portions of this
Section of the Specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Where required to delineate patterns, feature areas,
expansion/contraction joints, etc.
C. Provide product data describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns,
and colors available.
D. Submit samples, of appropriate size, illustrating color and pattern for each tile material
used.
E. Maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials and suggested schedule
for cleaning.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 09311 – Ceramic Tile

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Installer: A Contractor specializing in the work of this Section, with a minimum of 10 years
documented experience.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this work with other Sections of the Work.
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE SYSTEM

A. Standard grade floor and wall tile, for thinset and/or setting bed applications, as called for;
as manufactured by the American Olean Tile Company, or an approved alternate.color
variations, patterns, feature areas, etc., where required, are to be as called for.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Filler/Leveler: Where required, as specifically recommended by the tile material
manufacturer, for the substrate in question.
B. Primer/Sealer: Where required, as specifically recommended by the tile and/or substrate
manufacturer(s).
C. Thinset Mortar:
1. Base, Wainscot and Walls: Organic adhesive; Type I. Handbook Method W242.
2. Floors: Dryset Factory Sanded, or Latex Portland Cement. Handbook Method
F113.
D. Setting Bed: Portland Cement/sand; 1:6 ratio, by volume; water is to be potable.
E. Mortar Bed Bond Coat (where there is no cleavage membrane):
1. Portland Cement slurry.
F. Tile Bond Coat:
1. Portland Cement paste on plastic setting bed; pre-soak absorption type tile.
Handbook method F111 or F112.
2. Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement mortar, on a thoroughly cured setting bed.
Handbook method F111 or F112.
G. Grout: Latex Portland Cement. Damp curing is not required.
H. Thresholds:
1. Shape as detailed; color to coordinate with floor tile, and type as commonly used
at the place where the Project is located. Top of threshold shall be no greater than
1/2" above adjacent floor surfaces.
I.

J. Tile Materials:
1. Ceramic Floor Mosaic: 2" x 2" x 1/4", with light abrasive finish.
2. Glazed Wall Ceramic: 4" x 4" x 1/4"; plain or scored, with crystalline, bright, or
matte glaze.
3. Glazed Trim:
a. Bullnosed at wainscot caps and vertical edges (at ends of runs); square
edged at ceilings, and where abutting door jambs, window frames, etc.
b. Square edged at inside corners; bullnosed at outside corners.
c. Base: Coved at wainscot or wall tile; coved with bullnosed top at base
alone.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum existing substrate surfaces; damp clean as necessary.
B. Fill and/or level substrate(s) as required.
C. Prime and/or seal substrates as required.
D. Proper lighting, ventilation, and temperature must be maintained during this work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
C. Install tile to a square grid pattern, with all joints aligned; typically, the beginning joints shall
be at room centerlines. Joints are to be uniform in width.
D. Cut and fit tile neatly at all interruptions; keep tile cuts to the required minimum.
E. Tile (including the setting bed, where that system is used) shall be jointed at all structural
breaks - construction joints, seismic joints, etc. - in accordance with TCA Specifications.
F. Joints shall be left open for the minimum required time prior to grouting; normally, 48
hours. Moisture cure when recommended by TCA Specifications.
G. Grout shall completely fill joints, without voids; surfaces shall be tooled smooth and firm to
provide a watertight seal. Improper joints shall be raked clean and regrouted, as directed.
H. Expansion/Contraction joints shall be kept free of mortar or adhesive, and grout.
I. Following drying of grout, sealer shall be applied at expansion/contraction joints. Excess
materials shall be removed from adjoining tile and grout surfaces.
J. At the end of each day's work, finished surfaces shall be cleaned and left covered for
protection.
K. When grout has cured, all haze shall be removed using the recommended cleaner; rinse
and dry.
L. Care must be exercised to protect finished surfaces, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.

3.4 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2% extra tile of each type, color, and pattern
used; the material shall be packaged for protection, for the Owner's future use.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Completed work shall have a final cleaning, using the recommended material; rinse and
dry. Adhesive, grout, sealer, etc. must be removed from all finished surfaces, and from
adjacent material surfaces, without scraping or otherwise damaging those surfaces.
B. Protective covers shall be placed over completed areas, with joints taped, and left in place
until time of final cleanup at Substantial Completion of Project. Untreated building paper or
plastic sheeting of comparable thickness.
C. No traffic shall be allowed over floors for a minimum of 3 days; subsequent traffic shall be
kept to an absolute minimum.
D. Following completion, costs for repair or replacement of floor, wall, or base areas, as
directed, shall be borne by the Contractor(s) responsible for damage.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical tile.
A. Structural framing.
B. Support of mechanical equipment, lighting fixtures, etc.
C. See 09770 for Special Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels and ceiling suspension
systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
D. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products.
E. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use
and Practice.
F. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop drawings.
and colors available for both tile and grid.
D. Submit two tile samples, 12" x 12" in size, and a 12" length of each grid element.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Installer: An authorized representative of the manufacturer who has satisfactorily
completed a minimum of two recent projects, of comparable size and type, using the
manufacturer's system.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 09511 – Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this work with other related Sections of Work and including the following:
1. Light fixtures
2. HVAC equipment
3. Fire suppression system components
4. Partitions
5. Speakers
B. Prepare and distribute to affected installers data necessary for coordination with related
work. Include diagrams showing placement of attachment devices for acoustical ceiling
hangers.
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING SYSTEM

A. A total assembly, by one manufacturer; Armstrong World Industries, Inc., USG Interiors,
Inc., or The Celotex Corp.
B. Rated or non-rated systems, as scheduled.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal Grid: 15/16” Painted steel interlocking grid system, with matching perimeter edge
angles.
B. Suspension: Unless otherwise specifically called for, suspension is to be by wire hangers
at 4' - 0" o.c. each way (maximum).
C. General Office Lay-In Panels: 3/4" thick, 24” x 48” acoustical tile, as called for, square lay-
in edges and grid.
1. Medium textured non-directional fissured pattern in standard white finish; similar to
"Natural Fissured" medium, as manufactured by The Celotex Corp or F Fissured
tile, as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Fine Fissured by Armstrong.
Panels to be foil-backed where called for or required.
D. Conference and President’s Room Lay-In Panels: ¾” thick; 24” x 24” acoustical tile, as
called for, tegular edges.
1. 12” x 12” scored pattern, medium textured non-directional fissured pattern in
standard white finish, similar to Cortega Second Look I by Armstrong or equal.
E. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products having the following characteristics
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84:
1. Maximum flamespread: 25.
2. Maximum smoke developed: 50.
F. Standard Accessories: All appropriate galvanized items such as clips, splices, hold downs,
etc., shall be provided as required for a complete installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to structural framing, to which wire hangers will be
attached.
C. Reference must be made to locations of, and requirements for, related mechanical
registers, electrical lighting fixtures, etc.
3.2 INSTALLATION
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct installation as
called for.
B. The grid system shall be laid out to a square or rectangular pattern, true to line. Typically,
beginning layout points shall be room centerlines; this may vary, according to the lighting
layout.
C. The grid is to be level to within 1/8" in 12 feet; perimeter angles are to be at the same
elevation at all sides of any given area.
D. Lay-in panels shall be neatly cut to fit, where required, including shaping of tegular edges
of cut panels. Cut edges shall be spray painted to match panel finish.
E. Care must be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.
3.3 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one dozen extra lay-in panels of each type,
color, and pattern used; the material shall be packaged for protection, for the Owner's
future use.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 9 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 09651 RESILIENT WALL BASE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Resilient wall base.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary
conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, Type TP, Group 1.
B. ASTM E 648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater,
Class I.
C. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials,
Class A, Smoke <450.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical components.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size
samples of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 55
deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).
A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 65
deg F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during
the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 09651 – Resilient Wall Base
D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE
Manufacturer:
Johnsonite, Inc. Phone: (800) 899-8916
16910 Munn Road (440) 543-8916

Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023 Tech: Ext 9297
Web: www.tarkettna.com Samples: Ext 9299
E-mail: info@johnsonite.com Fax: (440) 543-8920
2.2 TRADITIONAL WALL BASE

A. JOHNSONITE TRADITIONAL WALL BASE – Traditional Wall Base or an approved equal with
the following physical characteristics:
1. Profile: DC
Color: as selected by Architect.
Height: 6"
2. Flexibility: Does not crack, break, or show any signs of fatigue when bent around a 1 1/4"
diameter cylinder when tested according to ASTM F 137 Standard Test Method for
Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials protocols.
3. Color Stability: Meets or exceeds ASTM F 1861 requirements for color stability when
tested to ASTM F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient
Flooring protocols.
4. Phthalate-free.
5. 100% Recyclable.
6. SCS FloorScore® Certified and meets California Specifications Section 01350
7. Johnsonite facilities are ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 Certified.
B. INSTALLATION MATERIALS
1. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based
formulation manufactured and warranted by a reputable manufacturer.
2. Adhesives: as recommended by Johnsonite to meet site conditions.
a. Johnsonite 960 Cove Base Adhesive
b. Johnsonite 946 Premium Contact Bond Adhesive
PART 3 EXECUTION
C. EXAMINATION
1. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
2. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other
Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits
that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. PREPARATION
1. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient wall base.
2. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound
and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
3. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
4. Vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
E. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
1. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installing resilient base.
2. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
3. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
4. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
5. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
6. Preformed corners: Install preformed corners if available before installing straight pieces.
7. Job-formed corners:
a. Outside corners: Form by bending without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
b. Inside corners: Butt one piece to corner then scribe next piece to fit.
PART 4 COMPLETION
A. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
1. Comply with Johnsonite's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
2. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product
installation:
a. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
b. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
1. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09686 CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Modular, tufted Carpet Tile.
B. Related accessory items and materials.
A. 09651 - Resilient Bases.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester,
Polypropylene.
C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcove6ng Materials; Carpet
and Rug Institute; 1996.
D. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 1995.
E. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Where required to delineate patterns, feature areas, etc.
and colors available. Include manufacturer’s written data on physical characteristics,
durability and fade resistance.
D. Submit (2) full size samples, illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material
specified.
E. Maintenance Data:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products
and procedures and manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
carpet.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
B. Applicator: A Contractor who has satisfactorily completed a minimum of two recent
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 09686 – Carpeting

projects, of comparable size and type, using the manufacturer's materials and a minimum
of 5 years experience.
1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
B. In addition, the Owner shall be provided with the manufacturer's written guarantee stating
essentially the following:
1. The carpet, if properly installed and maintained, shall not lose, through wear, more
than 10% of the surface pile, in any area, for a period of five years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPETING SYSTEM

A. Carpet Tile: As manufactured by Interface (Urban Grid) commercial carpet tile or an
approved equal.
B. Except as otherwise specifically scheduled rolled carpet shall be stretched with tack-strips,
over padding, at offices, conference rooms, etc.; carpet shall be adhesive applied at
hallways, open areas, etc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Filling and Leveling Compound: Where required, as manufactured by the Flintkote Co., or
an approved alternate.
B. Primer/Sealer: Where required, as specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: As specifically recommended by the flooring material manufacturer. Must be
water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated. Must comply with flammability requirements for installed
carpet.
D. Carpet Tiles: To meet or exceed the following minimum requirements:
1. Tufted Yarn Weight: 18 oz/yd²
2. Machine Gauge: 1/12”
3. Pile Height: .16 in
4. Pile Thickness: .102 in
5. Stitches Per Inch: 8.5/in.
6. Pile Density: 6353
7. Total Thickness: .28 in
8. Size: 16.69 in x 16.69 in
9. Static Electricity Generation: (AATCC-134) < 3.0 KV
10. Color Retention: Must meet appropriate, recognized industry standards for
atmospheric fading, light fastness, crocking and shampooing.

11. Flammability: Must meet or exceed appropriate, recognized industry standards
(Federal, ASTM, UL, etc.) for flamespread, fuel contributed, and smoke
developed.
12. In addition, all requirements are to be in conformance with the UBC, or other
governing code at the place where the Project is located.
E. Moldings: Where carpeting terminates at other types of floor finishes provide carpet
transition reducer of thickness to match carpet and adjacent material. Color as selected
by the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work; floors must be
clean and free of any materials which could affect adhesive bond.
B. Floors must be dry, to the appropriate acceptable moisture content.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform all substrate preparation procedures in strict accordance with carpet and adhesive
Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Surfaces to receive carpet must be free of dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster,
moisture and other substances detrimental to proper performance of the adhesive and
carpet.
C. Concrete Surfaces:
1. Verify that moisture and alkalinity conditions of the concrete slabs are acceptable
before installation.
2. Check to ensure there is no dusting.
3. Grind down ridges and bumps. Fill low spots..
D. Apply, float, and trowel filler to a smooth, level, dense surface.
E. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
F. Vacuum floor surfaces.
G. Proper lighting, ventilation, and temperature must be maintained during this work.
3.3 CARPET TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install adhesive, and carpet, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesion.
C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds and nosings without gaps.
Bind or seal cut edges as specified or recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
D. Joints: modules in the complete installation should be tight, but not compressed. To
insure proper spacing when installing modular carpet, measure the distance covered by 11
modules (10 joints) installed on the floor with no visible gaps, peaks or overlaps. Take
care not to trap yarn between modules.
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes and openings that are in place or marked for future

cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-
staining marking device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
H. Blend carpet from difference cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
3.4 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 5% extra carpet of each type, color, and
pattern used; the material shall be packaged for protection, for the Owner's future use.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Completed work shall be vacuumed clean.
B. Protective covers shall be placed over completed areas, with joints taped, and left in place
until time of final cleanup at Substantial Completion of Project.
C. Untreated building paper or plastic sheeting of comparable thickness.
D. Following completion, costs for repair or replacement of floor areas shall be borne by the
Contractor(s) responsible for damage.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09770 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete finish: clear, chemically reactive, water
borne solution of silicate material and proprietary components, odorless, and that penetrates,
hardens and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces leaving no surface film.
A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
B. Section 03367 – Specially Placed Concrete Floor Slabs
A. ASTM C-642-06 Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete.
B. ASTM D-5178-98/08 Standard Test Method for Mar Resistance of Organic Coatings.
C. ASTM D-4060-07 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the
Taber Abrasion: Modified.
D. ASTM D-2369-07 Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings.
E. ASTM D-2047-04 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated
Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
F. Reflectivity according to use of Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker.
G. ASTM C-1378-04 (2009) Standard Test Method for Determination of Resistance to Staining.
H. ANSI Standard B-101.1-2009 – Manufacturer required to have letter certifying compliance.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Installer to schedule and hold a pre-installation meeting prior to project start. Attendees shall
include Installer, Construction Manager, Architect and Owner Representative.
B. Mock-Up shall be complete prior to pre-installation meeting; intended for review/approval.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Division 1 submittal requirements.
B. MSD Sheet indicating VOC content and safety precautions.
C. Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance: Submit manufacturer’s certification that floor treatment

complies with specified requirements and is suitable for intended application.
D. Warranty
Project Name, Project No. Page 1 of 4 09770 – Polished Concrete Finishing

E. Applicator Qualifications: Submit list of project references satisfying the requirements of this
specification. Submit Contractor’s certificate, signed by the manufacturer, declaring Contractor is
a certified and approved installer of the manufacturer’s system.
F. Quality Control Submittals: Provide protection plan for surrounding areas and non-work surfaces.
G. Product Data: Provide data on all products, including information on compatibility of different
products and limitation.
H. Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.
I. Provide Manufacturers Maintenance Instructions.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Installation: Provide an 8’ x 10’ test area of polished floor as specified herein. Sample panel shall
be located at the jobsite, exact location determined by Construction Manager. Location shall have
conditions similar to those which will exist during actual placement.
B. Mock-up will be used to evaluate material application and shine.
C. When approved, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality expected for proceeding
with this work.
D. Approved Mock-up shall remain for comparison as part of the finished work.
A. Store material in dry, enclosed area protected from exposure to moisture and temperatures
above the manufacturer minimums.
B. Keep Containers closed and upright to prevent leakage.
A. Protect concrete slabs from staining prior to application of concrete finish system.
B. Diaper hydraulic powered equipment.
C. Place drop cloths under parked vehicles.
D. Do not store structural steel or metal fabrications on slab.
E. Do not allow pipe-cutting machine on slab.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide 20 year manufacturer’s material warranty commencing at date of building substantial

completion. Manufacturer shall warrant that polished surface will remain water repellent,
dustproof, hardened, abrasion resistant and food stain resistant.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide Certi-Shine FSR by Vexcon Chemicals or pre-approved equals having a minimum of 5
years recognized polishing use for similar applications.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Polished Concrete: Includes grinding installation of silicate sealer (hardener/densifier), polishing

and a stain repellent.
B. Performance Criteria: Polishing systems shall have the following minimum performance
properties:
a. ASTM C-642 Absorption: Reduction of 75% of control.
b. ASTM D-5178 Balance Beam Mar Tester: Greater than 50% harder.
c. ASTM D-4060 Modified Taber Abrasion 600 Rev: 0.37% treated vs. 0.68% untreated.
d. ASTM G-154: 5000 HR QUV: No fade, change or erosion.
e. ASTM D-2369 Solids: 18% minimum.
f. ASTM D-2047 Coefficient of Friction: average – 0.54
g. Reflectivity: Change in gloss to 60, as measured using a gloss meter in accordance with
Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker.
h. ASTM C-1378 Stain resistance: Food, chemical, oil and common stain resistance.
i. ANSI B-101.1-2009 Non-slip properties – high traction rating.
2.03 PRODUCTS/SYSTEM
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment for Polished Concrete Finishes: Clear, chemically reactive,
water borne solution of silicate material and proprietary components, odorless, that penetrates,
hardens and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces leaving no surface film.
a. Certi-Shine Clear FSR by Vexcon Chemicals or pre-approved equal.
B. Unreacted Silicate Rinse: Liquid rinse solution, increases stain resistance.
a. Certi-Shine Fixative by Vexcon Chemicals or pre-approved equal.
C. Stain Repellent (non-film forming): Ready to use, food (oil and acid), hydraulic fluid and motor oil
stain and water repellent.
a. Certi-Shine Finish Coat Ultra by Vexcon Chemicals or pre-approved equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencement of installation, installer and manufacturer’s representative shall

examine surfaces receiving polishing system and verify that it conforms to product
manufacturer’s requirements for substrate conditions.

B. Commencement of work will be recorded as an acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 CONCRETE PREPARATION
A. These preparation steps are considered a minimum. Preparation shall be in strict accordance
with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Power sweep floor area, blow out corners and column footings.
C. Initial grind should clean the concrete surface, removing all coatings, dirt, oil and laitance.
D. If grinding does not remove oil spots, treat oil spots with emulsifier and oil absorber materials.
Detail scrub with high pH detergent.
a. StarSeal EF Stripper by Vexcon Chemicals or pre-approved equal.
E. Double scrub floor with automatic scrubber capable of 80 to 120 pounds of head pressure,
equipped with black stripping pads. Use proper dilution of high pH detergent. Scrub floor
once without squeegee or vacuum. On second pass, remove water solution.
F. Power rinse surface removing all traces of soap residue.
G. Inspect the concrete surface.
H. Perform water absorbency test.
a. Repeat any steps as necessary to prepare for polishing.
3.03 CONCRETE FINISH APPLICATION AND POLISHING
A. Immediately following cleaning operation, install concrete polishing material(s) per

manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Perform polishing operation to the specified polish level.
a. Medium Shine – Equivalent to 60° film gloss of 60 when viewed on an angle.
3.04 JOINT FILLER
A. Prime and fill, with manufacturer’s approved epoxy joint sealant, those joints that require the
application of joint sealant after the application of the finishing system or as directed by the
manufacturer.
a. Powercoat Primer/Powercoat Flexible Epoxy Joint Sealant by Vexcon Chemicals or pre-

approved equal.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished surfaces from damage and soiling and other construction activities.
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective cover.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09900 PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings; materials and finished
surfaces as called for.
B. *Following categories of work are not included as part of field applied finish work, or are
included in other sections of these specifications:
1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is
included under various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow
metal work and similar items. Also, for fabricated components such as
architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop fabricated or factory built
mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories.
2. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when
factory finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited
to) prefinished doors, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light
fixtures and air diffusers, switchgear and distribution cabinets.
3. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on
surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible
areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct
shafts.
4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel,
chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish
painting unless otherwise indicated.
5. Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and
electrical parts, such as valve and damper operations, linkages, sinkages, sensing
devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Do not paint over any code required labels such as Underwriters’
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification,
performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.
A. Work as required under Mechanical, Refrigeration, or Electrical Sections of these or
separate Specifications.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
C. AWWA D102 - Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks.
D. NACE - Industrial Maintenance Painting.
E. NPCA - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications.
F. PDCA - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual.
G. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 7 09900 – Painting

1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Provide product data describing physical and performance characteristics; colors available.
C. Materials must meet or exceed appropriate, recognized industry standards (Federal, UL,
ASTM, OSHA, etc.). Materials shall conform to volatile organic chemical (VOC) emission
standards at the place where the project is located.
D. No material used may contain lead.
E. Mockup - Provide minimum 4’ X 4’ sample of each color selected for final review applied to
base material simulating field conditions.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of the products specified in this
B. Applicator: A Contractor who has satisfactorily completed a minimum of two recent
projects, of comparable size and type, using the manufacturer's materials.
1.8 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50°F (10°C) and 90°F (32°C), unless otherwise permitted by
paint manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45°F (7°C) and 95°F (34°C), unless otherwise
permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to
damp or wet surfaces unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if area and surfaces to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
D. Apply paint only with minimum 50 FC light provided at all surfaces.
E. Provide barriers to occupied portions of the facility during painting and curing operations.
F. At all interior applications, provide ventilation of at least 6 air changes per hour during
painting and curing operations.
1.9 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COLORS AND FINISHES

A. Surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the Finish Schedule of the contract
documents.
B. Prior to beginning work, Architect will make selection from manufacturer’s complete range
of colors for surfaces to be painted.
C. Color Pigments
1. Pure, non-fading, application types to suit substrates and service indicated.
2. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.6% lead as
lead metal based on the total non-volatile (dry film) or paint by weight.
D. Paint Coordination
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paint used. Review other
sections of these specifications in which prime paint are to be provided to ensure
compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from
other trades, furnish information in characteristics of finish materials proposed for
use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.
2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as
required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified
coating systems with substrates primed by others.
2.2 MATERIAL QUALITY
A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer’s
identification as a standard, best grade product will not be acceptable.
B. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that
products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other
manufacturers.
1. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only
thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Conventional Paints Special Coatings
Benjamin Moore Tnemec
MA Bruder DuPont
California Hempel
2.3 SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Exposed interior and exterior surfaces normally finished as a part of the work of this
Section of the Specifications.
1. Omission of an item shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to include
such work, when it is a part of the general intent as stated herein.
B. Surfaces to be finished shall include the following:
1. Exterior:
a. Bollards not noted to be galvanized.

b. Hollow metal doors and frames.
c. Exterior handrails, platforms, and equipment support frames where not
noted to be galvanized.
2. Interior:
a. Gypsum wall board.
b. Bollards, Goalposts, Rails, Dock Equipment Control Panel Assemblies &
embedded plate at floor not noted to be galvanized.
c. Hollow metal doors and frames.
d. Wood doors and frames.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied,
and notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator.
B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and
other conditions within any particular area.
C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions
otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
D. Wall surfaces must be dry, to the appropriate acceptable moisture content for each
substrate material, when tested by electronic moisture meter.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General
1. Remove electrical, telephone, and other wall plates and covers. Reinstall after
painting.
a. Wire brush as necessary to remove efflorescence, loose particles, spatter,
soil, etc., with emphasis on joints.
b. Remove all stains with dilute acid solution, or TSP, as appropriate.
2. Remove door finish hardware. Reinstall after painting.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove
oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so
that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted
surfaces.
4. Wash all existing surfaces with solution of trisodium phosphate or equal cleaner,
followed by a wash with clear water.
5. Vacuum surfaces clean and free of loose particles, dust, etc., where appropriate;
wipe clean with "tack" cloth following sanding.
6. Proper lighting, ventilation, and temperature must be maintained during work.
B. Specific, By Material
1. Structural Steel or Miscellaneous Metal (SSPC SP3 preparation and shop prime).

a. Sand or scrape as required to remove any loose prime, rust, etc.; wash,
rinse, and dry.
b. Touch up prime coat.
c. Treat unprimed areas, field welds, bolts and nuts, etc., with a phosphoric
acid solution; rinse, dry and apply primer.
2. Galvanized Sheet Metal, Industrial Type Galvanized Doors, etc. (where not
prefinished or primed).
a. Clean with solvent; rinse and dry.
b. Touch up damaged galvanizing.
c. Apply etching primer.
3. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, and Industrial Type Doors and Frames (where
not prefinished).
a. Wash down and dry, or light sand and clean as appropriate.
b. Touch up prime coat, at all exposed surfaces.
4. Gypsum Board (taped, sealed, and sanded or textured).
a. Spackle minor imperfections and spot prime.
b. Spot sand where appropriate.
5. Wood Doors and Trim (for stain finish).
a. Sand smooth and clean; wipe dust free.
b. Seal knots, pitch areas, etc.
c. Seal knots, pitch areas, etc.
d. Sand and wipe dust free.
3.3 FINISH APPLICATION
A. All materials shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; dilute or thin
materials only as specifically recommended. In the event of a conflict between this
Specification and the manufacturer's instructions, the latter shall govern; this applies
especially to surface preparation
1. No finish shall be applied to a surface which is not dry. Each coat must be dry prior
to application of further material.
2. Each coat shall be applied to a uniform finish. Skips, holidays, "orange peel",
runs, brush marks, etc., will not be accepted.
3. Lightly sand work between coats, as appropriate. Vacuum and/or wipe with tack
cloths prior to applying subsequent coats.
4. Unexposed material surfaces shall be back primed as appropriate.
5. Care must be exercised to protect finishes and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces. Masking tape and covers, drop cloths, etc., shall be used as required.
6. Remove unfinished louvres, grilles, covers, access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and print separately.
7. Following completion, costs for repair shall be borne by the Contractor(s)
responsible for damage.

3.4 FINISH PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The following finish systems refer to products of Benjamin Moore, unless indicated
otherwise. Provide these systems or comparable systems from any specified
manufacturer.
1. EXTERIOR FERROUS METAL

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP#6) Coordinate with Sections 05120, 05500
Coat 1: Tnemec Series 394 Omnithane (shop applied) at 3.0 mils DFT
Coat 2: Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II at 3.0 mils DFT
Coat 3: Tnemec Series 1075U at 3.0 mils DFT
2. EXTERIOR NON-FERROUS METAL- Urethane system

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP#1) Followed by SSPC-SP3 or SP7 or
Galv Prep by Henkel
Coat 1: Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II at 3.0 mils DFT
Coat 2: Tnemec Series 1075U Endura-Shield at 3.0 mils DFT
3. EXTERIOR GALVANIZED METAL- Flouropolymer system

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP7 Brush-off Blast)
Coat 1: Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II at 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT
Coat 2: Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield at 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT
Coat 3: Tnemec Series 1075 U at 2.0 mils DFT-For
Metallics use 1077 Series
4. INTERIOR WOOD-PAINTED- Leeds latex System

(Satin Latex System)
Coat 1: Rodda Latex Enamel Underbody
Coat 2: Rodda Satin
Coat 3: Same as Coat 2
5. INTERIOR WOOD-TRANSPARENT Leeds Manufacturer

(Satin Water Base Polyurethane System)
Coat 1: Sealer/wash coat
Coat 2: Rodda Architectural Penetrating Stain
Coat 3: Rodda Paste Wood Filler (Tinted)
Coat 4: Satin Urethane

6. INTERIOR DRYWALL AND PLASTER- Leeds Latex
(Eggshell** Latex System)
Coat 1: Rodda Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal or Latex Enamel Underbody
Coat 2: Rodda Horizon Line Interior
Note**: Provide Moore’s Vinyl Latex flat finish on ceilings
7. INTERIOR DRYWALL AND PLASTER

(Variegated Paint System)
Coat 1: Polomyx 202/208 or wall primer
Coat 2: Polomyx “Aegis Water Based” tone on tone finish at 175 sq. ft. per gallon
8. INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS METAL (High Impact or Traffic)

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP#3)
Coat 1: Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline at 2.5 mils DFT
Coat 2: Tnemec Series 1080 Endura-Sheild WB at 2.0 mils DFT
9. INTERIOR FERROUS METAL

(Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP#1 Solvent Wipe and SSPC-SP3 Power Tool or
SP7)
Coat 1: Tnemec Series 394 Omnithane at 3.0 mils DFT
Coat 2: Tnemec Series N 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II at 3.0 mils DFT
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10160 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Toilet compartments; floor supported unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Urinal screens; wall mounted, floor braced, unless specifically noted otherwise.
A. Section 06112 – Rough Carpentry
Backing in walls or partitions, for anchorage of support and connection elements.
B. Section 09311 – Ceramic Tile
Tiling, coordination with layout and installation.
C. Section 10800 – Toilet and Washroom Accessories
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
B. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural
Quality.
D. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, Galvanized by the Hot-
Dip Process.
E. FS RR-P-1352 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop drawings.
C. Provide product data describing physical and performance characteristics; types and
colors available.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 10160 – Toilet Compartments

1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard 25 year limited warranty for panels,
doors, and stiles against breakage, corrosion, delamination, and defects in factory
workmanship. Manufacturer’s standard 1 year guarantee against defects in material and
workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PARTITION/SCREEN SYSTEM

A. Compact Laminate, Moisture Resistant Substrate: Bobrick DuraLineSeries® (Vandal
Resistant) as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, or an approved alternate.
1. Toilet Partitions:
Configuration: Floor-Anchored.
2. Urinal Privacy Screens:
Configuration: Floor-Anchored.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compact Laminate material for stiles, panels, doors and screens.
1. Phenolic Construction: Solidly fused high pressure laminate with matte-finish
melamine surfaces; integrally bonded colored face sheets and black phenolic-resin
core.
2. Phenolic Edges: Black; brown edges not acceptable.
B. Color: As selected by the Architect.
C. Finished Thickness:
1. Stiles and Doors: 3/4 inch.
a. Finished thickness of doors and stiles to ensure flush front.
2. Panels and Screens: 1/2 inch.
D. Wall Posts: Pre-drilled for door hardware, 18-8, Type 304, 16 gauge stainless steel with
satin finish; 1 inch x 1-1/2 inches x 58 inches high.
E. Stiles: Floor-Anchored stiles furnished with expansion shields and threaded rods.
1. Leveling Devices: 7 gauge, 3/16 inches thick, corrosion-resistant, chromate-
treated, double zinc-plated steel angle leveling bar bolted to stile; furnished with 3/8
inch diameter threaded rods, hex nuts, lock washers, flat washers, spacer sleeves,
expansion anchors, and shoe retainers.
2. Stile Shoes: One-piece, 22 gauge , 18-8, Type 304 stainless steel, 4 inch height;
tops with 90 degree return to stile. One-piece shoe capable of adapting to 3/4 inch
or 1 inch stile thickness and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at
wall line.
F. Anchors: Expansion shields and threaded rods at floor connections as applicable.
Threaded rods secured to supports above ceiling as applicable. Supports above ceiling
furnished and installed as Work of Section 05500.

G. Hardware:
1. Compliance: Operable with one hand, without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of
the wrist, and force to operate does not exceed five pounds.
2. Emergency Access: Hinges, latch allow door to be lifted over keeper from outside
compartment.
3. Materials: 18-8, Type 304, heavy-gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Chrome-
plated “Zamak”, aluminum, or extruded plastic hardware not acceptable.
4. Fastening: Hardware secured to door and stile by through-bolted, theft-resistant,
pin-in-head Torx stainless steel machine screws into factory-installed, threaded
brass inserts. Fasteners secured directly into core not acceptable.
a. Threaded Brass Inserts: Factory-installed; withstand direct pull force
exceeding 1500 lb per insert.
5. Clothes Hooks: Projecting no more than 1-1/8 inch from face of door.
6. Mounting: Hinges, keepers, latches, clothes hooks and their fasteners concealed
inside compartment. Exposed hinges, keepers, latches, clothes hooks and their
fasteners on exterior of compartment not acceptable with the exception of
accessible compartments.
7. Hardware Type: Standard, commercial hardware.
a. Latching: Track of door latch prevents inswing doors from swinging out
beyond stile; on outswing doors, door keeper prevents door from swinging in
beyond stile; 14 gauge sliding door latch, 11 gauge keeper. Black rubber
bumper on latch serves as door bumper for inswing door. Twist-style door
latch operation not acceptable.
b. Hinges: Balanced, with field-adjustable cam to permit door to be fully closed
or partially open when compartment is unoccupied.
c. Locking: Door locked from inside by sliding door latch into keeper.
d. Mounting Brackets: Mounted inside compartment; exposed brackets on
exterior of compartment not acceptable with the exception of outswing doors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
dimensions agree with drawings, including plumbing fixture spacings, built-in backing for
anchorage, etc.
3.2 INSTALLATION
installation as designed.
C. All components shall be solidly anchored, plumb, level, and properly aligned.
D. All accessories shall be properly and securely attached.
E. Doors and hardware shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper

operation and latching.
F. Hardware shall be adjusted and aligned to provide a uniform clearance between doors and
pilasters.
G. Adjust hinges to place unlatched, in-swinging doors in a partially open position; out-
swinging doors should return to a closed position.
H. Care shall be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where pre-finished material has been damaged shall not be
touched up; damaged items, including items with significant scratches, shall be replaced
as directed, at no extra cost to the Owner.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10508 METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Locker units with number hinged doors, sloped tops, etc., as called for.
B. Accessories and hardware.
C. Except as otherwise specifically called for, units are to have metal bases.
A. Padlocks, etc., by Owner, unless otherwise called for.
B. Installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural
Quality.
B. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the
Hot-Dip Process.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Provide product data describing physical and performance characteristics; types and
colors available.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
1.8 COORDINATION
1.9 WARRANTY
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 10508 – Metal Lockers

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOCKER SYSTEM

A. Heavy duty ventilated lockers, of dimension, configuration, etc., as called for; as
manufactured by the Republic Storage Systems, Inc., or an approved equal.
B. Size shall be 12” wide x 18” deep x 36” high (double tier).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Mild, cold rolled and leveled unfinished steel, free of surface defects.
B. Doors: 14 ga., flanged on four sides for rigidity; punched, diamond vent openings and full
loop, 5 knuckle hinges.
1. Two hinges for doors up to 42" in height, and three for taller doors.
C. Body Parts and Channel Frames: 16 ga., with continuous vertical strikes and cross
frames. Backs shall be 18 ga.
D. Punched, diamond vent openings at side panels, except for solid end-of-row panels.
E. Stainless steel, recessed handles, fitted for padlocks unless specifically noted otherwise;
concealed lock bars with spring steel latches.
1. Two, double-prong coat hooks at sides.
2.3 FABRICATION
B. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the manufacturer of his responsibility for correct
C. Fabrication of units is to be by both welding and riveting, as appropriate for the particular
connection.
D. Steel is to be cleaned and phosphatized; all finish edges are to be smooth and free of
burrs.
2.4 FINISH
A. Locker units are to have a baked-on, heavy enamel finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of built-in backing for wall anchorage, and to
job-built bases when these are called for.
3.2 INSTALLATION
installation as called for.
C. Units shall be installed plumb, level, and properly aligned.

D. Units shall be anchored to each other, and to walls and bases (or to floor), as specifically
recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Care must be exercised to protect item finish, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
F. Doors and hardware shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper
operation and latching.
3.3 FINISH
specifically recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
B. Refer to pertinent portions of Sections 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10800 TOILET AND WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Toilet and washroom accessories.
B. Attachment hardware and fasteners.
A. Backing in walls or partitions, for anchorage.
B. Installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
C. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
D. ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel
Plus Chromium.
E. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Provide product data describing physical and performance characteristics; types and
finishes available.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
1.8 COORDINATION
B. Use manufacturer’s instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for
products specified. Distribute the following to affected installers of related work:
1. Components and anchorage devices provided by toilet accessory manufacturer for
incorporation into other work.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 10800 – Toilet and Washroom Accessories
2. Coordination data including setting drawings, templates, instructions, etc., for
cutouts and installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNITS
A. Prefabricated units, of series or model, size, etc., as called for; as manufactured by
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or American Specialties Inc. (914) 476-9000.
B. Mounting fasteners shall be included, as appropriate for substrate construction type(s).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Chrome plated steel.
B. Stainless steel with satin or bright polished finish, as appropriate.
C. No. 1 quality, 1/4" polished float/plate glass, with electrolytic copper backing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of built-in backing for mounting.
C. Accessory locations: Coordinate locations with other work to avoid interference and to
ensure proper operation and servicing of accessories. Notify the General Contractor in
writing of any conflicts concerning product placement. Do not proceed without resolution.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Delivery any necessary rough-in items, inserts, etc. to site for building-in.
B. Provide templates, rough-in dimensions, etc., as may be necessary.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All items shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install plumb, level, and securely mounted; alignment, centering, mounting height, etc., as
called for, must be adhered to.
C. Items having operable features shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and
proper operation.
D. Handicapped Accessories: Install as indicated on drawings.
E. Mounting heights, operating pressures, etc., shall be in compliance with handicap
requirements for the place where the Project is located.
F. Care must be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent
surfaces.
3.4 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where pre-finished material has been damaged shall not be
touched up; damaged items, including items with significant scratches, shall be replaced
as directed, at no extra cost to the Owner.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEANUP
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10950 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (CLASS I STRUCTURES)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. Objective: Provide safety for the building and occupants by eliminating damage to the structure
caused by lightning, surges and other related occurrences. This Specification applies to Class I
Type Structures (buildings less than 75’ in height).
1.2. Standards: The following standards are part of this Specification:
1.2.1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL); Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection

Systems, UL 96A.
1.2.2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL); Lightning Protection Components, UL 96.
1.2.3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); Standard for the Installation of Lightning
Protection Systems, NFPA 780.
1.2.4. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI); LPI Standard of Practice, LPI-175.
1.3. System Design: This Work includes furnishing labor, materials and services required for the
completion of a functional and inconspicuous lightning protection system. The design of this
system shall be in strict accordance with these Specifications and all Contract Documents.
1.4. Submittals: Complete design submittal drawings showing the type, size, and location of all
grounding, roof conductors, down conductors, through-roof connectors and air terminals shall be
submitted for review and coordination prior to the commencement of work.
1.5. Quality Assurance: The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and
standards for lightning protection systems in accordance with UL, NFPA and LPI. Upon
completion of the installation, application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for
issuance of UL Master Label C. Upon receipt of the UL Master Label C from Underwriter
Laboratories, Label shall be provided to the Construction Manager.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Standard: The lightning protection system shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the
manufacturer’s latest approved design. All equipment shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled.
All equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is to
be used in accordance with accepted industry standards and in accordance with UL, NFPA and
LPI requirements.
2.2 Equipment: Provide and install a complete lightning protection system in compliance with the
specifications and standards of the most current editions of UL-96A, NFPA-780 and LPI-175.
The system shall be installed by a lightning protection contractor who is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) and a member in good standing of the Lightning Protection Institute.
2.3 Materials: All lightning protection materials and components shall comply in weight, size and
composition with UL-96, NFPA-780 and LPI-175 lightning protection material requirements for
this type of structure. All materials shall be copper/bronze. Aluminum components shall be used
in locations where system components are mounted to aluminum surfaces to avoid galvanic
corrosion of dissimilar metals. All bolts, nails and screws are to be stainless steel. Minimum
materials requirements shall be as follows:
2.3.1 Copper Conductors: IPC #32S, No. 2 Size, 215 pounds per 1000’, 32 strand of 17 gauge
wire, 65,600 circular mils.
2.3.2 Copper Air Terminals: IPC #86, 3/8” diameter by 12” long solid copper.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 10950 – Class I Lightning Protection System
2.3.3 Aluminum Conductors: IPC #A28, No. 1/0 Size, 130 pounds per 1000’, 28 strand of 14
gauge wire, 115,080 circular mils.
2.3.4 Aluminum Air Terminals: IPC #A86, 1/2” diameter by 12” long solid aluminum.
2.3.5 Ground Rods: IPC #138, ½” x 10’ long copperweld.
2.3.6 Fittings and Fasteners: In accordance with the standards (IPC #33L, 34L, 297A, 121A,
A121A, 265P, A265P, 123, A123, etc.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.3 Installation: An experienced installation company that is listed with Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) for lightning protection installation and a member in good standing of the Lightning
Protection Institute (LPI) shall complete the installation. All equipment shall be installed in a neat,
workmanlike manner. The system shall consist of a complete network of conductor cables at the
roof and include air terminals, connectors, splicers, appropriate bonding, down lead cables and
proper ground terminals.
3.3 Coordination: The lightning protection contractor shall work with other trade contractors to
ensure a correct, neat and inconspicuous installation. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning
protection contractor to assure a proper bond to the appropriate grounded utilities; such as the
electric service ground, telephone ground, incoming water and gas pipe, etc.
3.3 Inspection and Certification: Upon completion of the installation, the lightning protection
contractor shall furnish a Master Label C issued by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for the
system. If the protected structure is an addition to an existing structure that does not have a
lightning protection system, the lightning protection contractor shall advise the Construction
Manager of installation requirements on the existing structure to obtain the Master Label C. If the
existing structure does have a lightning protection system, the contractor shall advise the
Construction Manager of any additional work required on the existing system to achieve
compliance with current UL Master Label requirements.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 10950 – Class I Lightning Protection System
SECTION 11163 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installing:
1. Dock Levelers
2. Dock Communication Light Packages
3. Dock Trailer Arm Lights
4. Dock Equipment Master Control Panels
5. Dock Shelters
6. Dock Bumpers
7. Dock Chocks
A. Division 16 Electrical
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI MH14.1 – Industrial Loading Dock Boards
B. All applicable ASTM, ANSI, NEMA and OSHA requirements, and any other current,
applicable, industry standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Literature
B. Shop Drawings, including custom CAD layout drawings.
C. Installation Instructions and Drawings, including Wiring Diagrams
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturers: A company, with a minimum of 10 years’ experience, specializing in the

manufacture of the specified equipment.
B. Installer: Authorized representative of the manufacturer, who has recently completed a

minimum of six (6) projects, of similar size and type, using the manufacturer’s equipment.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Prior to installation, this Contractor is responsible for verifying the compatibility of all specified
loading dock equipment with field conditions.
B. Site Conditions:
1. Proposed dock height is 48”.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 11163 – Loading Dock Equipment
2. Proposed dock apron will slope away from the dock at 1%.
3. Proposed foundation wall projection is 4”.
4. Proposed dock wall construction is insulated metal wall panel. Steel tubes will be
provided for overhead door jambs and header.
5. Dock door size is 11’ tall (10’ effective with continuous 1’ pit for vertical-storing
levelers) by 9’-0” wide.
6. Dock shelters shall be able to accommodate the largest refrigerated trailers to the
smallest route trucks expected to use the dock doors. Trailer/truck dimensional
information as follows:
a. 53’ Refrigerated Trailers: 8’-6” wide x 13’-6” tall

b. Route Trucks: 8’-0” wide x 11’-0” tall
c. Route Truck Lift Gates: maximum 15” projection
d. Route Truck Step Bumpers: maximum 15” projection @ 22” above grade
A. Building electrician will provide all conduit and provide/terminate 480V power (single-feed) at
dock equipment control panel. This contractor is responsible for all power and control wiring
downstream of the control panel (this includes furnishing and installing step-down
transformers as required).
1.8 WARRANTY
A. In accordance with the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Manufacturer shall provide a 10-year structural and hydraulic warranty on all dock levelers
and 2-year warranty on all shelters.
C. Periodic, routine service and maintenance shall be provided during the first year following
acceptance of the installation; this shall include emergency call-back service during normal
working hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VERTICAL-STORING HYDRAULIC DOCK LEVELERS
A. Levelers shall have 45,000 lb. dynamic capacity and be 7’-0” wide by 6’-0” long with a 20” lip
extension. Leveler ramp and lip shall have hydraulic cylinders providing power-up and
power-down functionality. Levelers installed on refrigerated docks shall have minimum lip
crown. All lips to have 3” tapers and grease fittings.
B. Levelers shall be equipped with non-adjustable emergency stop velocity safety system to limit
platform freefall in case of a hydraulic component failure. Provide a maintenance locking bar
with lockout pin. Provide run-off levelers on all levelers. Provide a “leveler-stored” proximity
switch to be interlocked with overhead door controls; shall prohibit leveler operation unless
dock door is fully open. Leveler shall satisfy all OSHA regulations.
C. Provide steel backchannels with factory-welded hinges. Length of each backchannel shall be
door centerline spacing, minus ½”, unless otherwise noted. Backchannels at ends of
continuous pit shall be dimensioned accordingly.
D. Provide foam insulated, fabric covered, hinged bottom draft pad. Draft pad shall align with
the exterior wall panel when leveler is in the down position and completely seal the opening
under the leveler.
2.2 DOCK COMMUNICATION LIGHT PACKAGE
A. Provide a vertically-oriented, exterior LED flashing red/green traffic-style light with sun visors
and two (2) narrow “MOVE ON GREEN ONLY” (or similar caution language) signs. One sign
shall read “forward” and the other “backward”.
B. Provide interior dock-attendant “ENTER ON GREEN ONLY” (or similar caution language)
sign.
C. Communication lights shall be interlocked with dock door lower limit switches to prevent
driver “green” light if door is open.
D. In the event the spacing between seals/shelters is insufficient for mounting dock
communication lights, this Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing a stand-off
bracket that mounts the communication light beyond the seal/shelter projection. The stand-off
shall be manufactured from galvanized structural steel and mounted/braced to withstand
typical dock wall abuse. This will be of particular concern where the Architectural Drawings
show downspouts running between dock seals/shelters.
2.3 FLEXIBLE-TUBE DOCK TRAILER ARM LIGHTS
A. Furnish and install a dock arm light on a 42” stainless-steel multi-position flexible tube.
Provide a spring-mounted socket assembly, protective lamp shield, and LED lamp.
Acceptable fixtures include Series 450 by DL Manufacturing or equal.
B. If a master control panel is specified; the dock trailer arm light on/off switch shall also have an
auto-option to be interlocked to the dock door limit switches. When the switch is in the auto
position, the dock trailer arm light shall be de-energized when the dock door is closed.
2.4 DOCK EQUIPMENT MASTER CONTROL PANEL
A. Furnish and install a master control panel at each dock leveler. Panel shall be NEMA 12, UL-
approved as a complete assembly and contain solid-state PLC controls.
B. Panel shall include an integral rotary, circuit breaker disconnect switch with OSHA lock-
out/tag-out provisions and a protective guard. Panel shall be designed to be fed with
480V/3Ph/60Hz power and include step-down transformer(s) as necessary. Push-button
controls shall be clearly labeled. Control panel shall be the sole source of power distribution
and control for the following:
1. Dock Leveler (push-buttons for leveler raise and lower, lip extend and retract, and
emergency stop button).
2. Communication Light Package (LED red/green lights).
3. Dock Trailer Arm Light (on-off selector switch).
4. Sectional Overhead Doors (open-close-stop push-buttons).
C. Control panel shall incorporate the additional components required to provide the desired
interconnect and interlocks noted in this Specification.
D. Controls shall fully integrate and automate the dock equipment operational cycle from truck
entering to truck leaving. The panel control sequences shall be completely adjustable and
the sequences developed in a series of meetings with the Owner.
2.5 DOCK SHELTERS – COMPRESSIBLE FOAM SIDE MEMBERS
A. Furnish and install dock door shelters with heavy-duty, impactable foam side members and
raked head frame. Backing shall be galvanized structural and/or rolled form steel.
B. Shelter shall have a minimum 30” projection. Confirm final projection with walkthrough
inspection of owner’s fleet.
C. Side and head curtains shall provide full access to trailers. Side and head curtain shall have
flexible fiberglass stays to ensure pressure is maintained on trailer body. Stays shall be
inserted into stay pockets.
D. Fabric shall be manufacturer’s premium proprietary material; color selected by Owner from
standard colors. Head curtains shall be adjustable with pull cords and have overlapping wear
pleats on face corners. Side curtains shall have hydraulic tailgate reinforcing fabric. Provide
safety-yellow guide stripes.
E. Provide triangular-shaped compressible draft bottom pads to seal gap between side curtain
and building wall.
F. If mounting to insulated wall panel; use through bolting at a minimum 2’-0” O.C., provide with
4” x 4” x 10 gauge galvanized washers on the building’s interior face to anchor the threaded
rod.
2.6 DOCK BUMPERS (Vertical-Storing Levelers)
A. Furnish and install two (2) 11” wide x 20” high x 5¼” deep, steel-faced, tire-laminated loading
dock bumpers at each dock position. The sides of each bumper shall be flat steel plates.
Bumpers shall be bracket mounted on a steel plate assembly, with top of bumper set flush
with warehouse floor.
B. Bumpers shall set back 1” from the vertical edge of the dock leveler. Install vertically by
welding to dock pit perimeter steel and expansion bolting to the leveler slab with (2) ¾” round
x 6” long epoxy cartridge expansion bolts.
2.7 DOCK WHEEL CHOCKS
A. Furnish and install one (1) dock wheel chock at the driver’s side of each dock door. Chocks
shall be aluminum alloy, have an 11” x 7” base, and be 7” in height. Provide a 15’-0” long
heavy-duty 3/16” diameter link-chain. Weld chain to dock pit edge angle, with full welds on
three (3) links.
B. Furnish and install one (1) safety sign with each set of chocks. Safety sign shall be
approximately 12” x 16”, be mounted on the same side as the chocks and direct “ALL
TRUCKS TO BE CHOCKED” or similar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work. Ensure that dimensions
agree with Drawings.
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of electrical power.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All work shall be installed in accordance with approved shop drawings.
B. All work shall be installed plumb, level and properly aligned. Shim as necessary and weld
into pit.
C. Installation must be firm and solid to allow smooth movement, with no lateral or otherwise
undesirable motion, or vibration.
D. All temporary supports and bracing shall be provided as necessary to stabilize the unit, and
to safely maintain all loads imposed during installation.
E. Safety during installation is the responsibility of this Contractor.
F. Care shall be exercised to protect all items, and to prevent damage to adjacent construction.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Testing of all operable items shall be done by the Contractor, prior to allowing use by anyone
other than the Contractor’s personnel.
B. All operable features shall be tested, and adjusted as required, for smooth and proper
operation and complete safety.
C. Leveler tests shall be made using varying loads, up to the maximum; which can be imposed
by the Owner’s fully loaded lift trucks.
D. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to insure that all equipment, and the overall
installation, are in compliance with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, etc., for the
place where the Project is located.
3.4 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where finish has been damaged shall be touched up using the same
material as the original coating.
3.5 INSTRUCTION
A. At the same time of substantial completion, the Owner’s selected personnel shall be
instructed in proper use of the system components.
B. All features shall be carefully reviewed, and instructions given for procedures to be followed
for normal operation, and in the event of emergencies.
C. Before acceptance, a demonstration shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner’s

representative that all levelers operate properly in every respect. In addition, a detailed
user/operator training session shall be conducted at a time and place agreed upon by the
Owner and the Manufacturer.
PART 4 COMPLETION
4.1 CLEAN-UP
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11551 PALLET RACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all of the materials, labor, fabrication, erection and equipment necessary to
completely install the pallet rack as shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
A. The Drawings and Specifications are provided for reference in preparing the design of the
pallet racks. The system design shall be done by the pallet rack manufacturer and must meet
the requirements of the cited standards and applicable regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Rack systems shall conform to the Specification for the Design, Testing and
Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks, as published by RMI.
2. Rack shall be engineered for the seismic zone that is defined in the building code in
effect at the project location. Rack shall be designed to satisfy applicable provisions
of ASCE 7. Provide signed and sealed calculations for submittal to the Local Building
Authority.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Pallet design weight is 2,500 lbs.
2. Pallet size is 40” x 48”, face dimension is 40”.
3. Utilization factor = 100%.
4. Upright and load beam dimensions shown on the Drawings are for planning purposes
only; manufacturer is ultimately responsible based on system design requirements.
a. All uprights, beams, bracing and anchorage shall be designed and fabricated
to support the heaviest combination of pallet loading for the stacking heights
and weights.
b. Upright heights are as shown on the Drawings.
c. Provide double upright reinforcement, on all front legs, to 100” in height.
d. Minimum anchorage shall consist of 5/8” x 3½” expansion bolts. Install two
(2) bolts at the front upright, one (1) bolt at remaining upright locations. More
substantial anchorage shall be provided if required by design.
e. Maximum deflection of load beam shall not exceed L/180 of the span, but in
no instance impair the proper function of the rack.
f. Load beam height adjustment shall be 4” on-center. If not standard, submit

alternate. Adjustability shall not be dependant on interchanging beams or any
fabrication modification to the system such as cutting, welding or replacement
of attachment device.
g. Owner reserves the right to set final load beam heights. Verify with
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 11551 – Pallet Racks

Construction Manager prior to installation.
h. Provide channel rub rails, 4” off floor, between front and rear uprights. On
two-deep or deeper racking, rub rail only needs to run between front and
second deep upright.
5. Provide galvanized racking components in the +34F Wet Cooler.
A. The pallet rack system is designed (i.e. engineered) by the pallet rack manufacturer.
Therefore, the rack manufacturer shall carry Professional Liability Insurance (i.e. errors and
omissions coverage) to protect against claims of negligence in their performance of their
professional engineering duties.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit detailed member and assembly drawings for all rack components.
Shop drawings shall show the actual pallet rack layout; reflecting dimensions from back leg of
upright to curb, actual aisle widths, end uprights to parallel walls and depth of all flue spaces.
Provide rack elevations, noting weight capacities, and provide complete bill of materials.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall be provided to cover replacement of defective parts or workmanship for a

period of 2-years following the acceptance of this Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All rack sections shall be fabricated using a minimum of ASTM A36 steel. These sections
shall be fabricated of hot-rolled steel.
1. Hot-rolled steel shall conform to the provisions of the American Institute of Steel
Construction.
B. Vertical components of uprights to be one (1) piece continuous construction (no splices). All
racks shall be overhead braced.
C. All dimensions showing rack depth, aisle widths and distance from rack to walls are to face of
rack uprights, and do not include sway bracing requirements.
D. All components shall be clean and grease-free prior to coating with tough, enamel finish.
Color selection by Owner; from manufacturer’s standard colors.
E. All fabrication and assembly shall be designed with cleanliness and ease of sanitation as a
primary consideration; as installation will be in a food-grade facility. Tightness of fit at
connection points will be an important consideration during review of installed racks. As a
minimum, the top of open channels on double post columns and fork deflectors shall be
capped to prevent debris from accumulating in enclosed spaces.
2.2 BASE PLATES
A. Base plates shall be fully-welded to the upright. Width of the base plate shall not be greater
than ½” wider than upright width, unless required by seismic analysis.
2.3 DEFLECTORS

A. Provide bullnose-style deflector on the aisle side of all upright frames. Deflector must be
designed to accommodate lag bolting at the bottom plate. Fully weld the deflector to the base
plate. Deflector shall be a minimum of 4” high. Provide capped top for sanitation.
2.4 SHIMS
A. Shims shall be galvanized stock, plastic shims are not acceptable. Shims to achieve RMI
tolerance on upright plumbness. Where shim height exceeds ½” in thickness, the shims shall
be welded to the base plate. Bolt holes through shims must be complete holes, notched
shims are not acceptable.
2.5 ROW SPACERS
A. All rack shall be provided with back-to-back row spacers. Spacers shall be bolted in-place and
installed a minimum of every 96” of upright height.
2.6 CROSS AISLE TOP TIES
A. Rack that cannot be sufficiently tied by row spacers shall have cross aisle top ties installed.
Provide extended uprights to provide clearance in the aisle.
2.7 SAFETY BARS / PALLET SUPPORTS
A. Provide safety bars; two (2) per pallet position, mounted flush with top of load beam. Fasten to
load beams with round-head carriage bolts, hook over types not acceptable.
2.8 PUSH-BACK CARTS
A. Fully welded, structural steel angle and/or tube section construction with front, middle and rear
structural ties.
B. Rails shall be structural channel or beam sections, sized for specified loads. Rails shall be
bolted at every beam. Rail shall include an integral backstop to prevent cart from being
pushed out the back of the system.
C. Cart wheels shall be precision bearing wheels that run flat on the lower flange of the rail
surface. Wheels shall be field-installed to prevent damage in shipping.
D. Rubber bumpers, minimum of two per cart to prevent twisting, shall be provided to reduce
impact.
E. Carts shall be color-coded.
2.9 WIRE DECKING
A. Wire decking shall be constructed of #4 gauge wire minimum. General design to be by

manufacturer, based on pallet/case capacities.
B. Wire decking shall be installed at the lowest level of all tunnel sections and empty pallet
storage racking. Additional locations may be shown on Drawings.
2.10 PLACE CARDS
A. Provide 100 square inch signs, at the end of each type of rack installed, listing the design
pallet weight.
2.11 ROW END PROTECTION

A. Furnish and install row end protection consisting of three (3) 4” hot-rolled channel beams
installed parallel to the end row upright and are bolted to the columns with two (2) minimum
½” diameter bolts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PERMITTING
A. Coordinate and review Pallet Racking Plans with local authorities and pull pallet rack erection
permit prior to starting any erection work.
B. Pay all necessary fees associated with plan reviews and permitting.
C. Provide and pay all associated costs for all necessary 3rd party inspections, as required by the
local authorities.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Include all materials, complete fabrication, delivery and off-loading of material to a clear,
designated area at the site as determined by the Construction Manager.
B. Freezers and coolers will not be in operation during installation.
C. Provide protection of all finished adjacent surfaces during installation. Any damage shall be
reported to the Construction Manager immediately.
D. Forklifts and/or lifts used in construction shall have non-marking tires or tire-booties and fluid
spill prevention diapers.
E. Cooperate with other trades working in the same area.
F. Comply with all OSHA regulations for safety during erection.
G. If a hole is drilled incorrectly in the floor, drill-out the fastener and epoxy fill the hole, grind
flush.
H. Vacuum all drill hole dust.
I. All damaged rack finishes shall be touch-up painted following erection.
J. Following installation, all pallet rack shall be hand-wiped clean.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12484 ENTRANCE MATS AND GRIDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of entrance flooring systems:
1. Floor Grids & Frame Assemblies.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:
1. Grouting frames into recess; refer to drawings for additional information.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B. The Aluminum Association.
C. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI).
D. The National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1
specification section 01300.
B. Product data for each type of floor grid and frame specified, including manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions.
C. Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of grid and frame specified including
details indicating construction relative to materials, direction of traffic, spline locations,
profiles, anchors and accessories.
D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit an assembled section of floor grid and frame
members with selected tread insert showing each type of color for exposed floor grid,
frame and accessories required.
E. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and
maintaining floor grids.
A. Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux, minimum 0.45
watts/m.
B. Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of Friction, minimum 0.60
for accessible routes.
C. Standard rolling load performance is 300 lb./wheel with larger loading requirements as
specified (load applied to a solid 5” x 2” wide polyurethane wheel, 1000 passes without
damage).
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor grids and frames from one source of a single
manufacturer.
E. Utilize superior structural aluminum alloys 6105-T5 & 6016-T6 for rail components.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the project site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 12484 – Entrance Mats and Grids
assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to identify
manufacturer.
A. Field measurements: Check actual openings for grids by accurate field measurements
before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
B. Coordinate frame installation with concrete construction to ensure recess and frame
anchorage are accurate and that the base is level and flat. Defer frame installation until
building enclosure is complete and related interior finish work is in progress.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Drawings and specifications are based on manufacturer's literature from Construction
Specialties, Inc. unless otherwise indicated. Other manufacturers must comply with the
minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum - ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5 for rail extrusions and 6061-T6 for key lock bars.
B. Tread insert options - refer to section 2.05.
2.3 Floor Grids
A. Model and Description - G1 Pedigrid shall be extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy tread rails
joined mechanically by extruded 6106-T6 aluminum alloy key lock bars. (welding or bolting
shall not be permitted.) Shall have an anodized finish, color as selected by the Architect.
2.4 GRID FRAMES
A. LB - Level Base Frame Shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with 1/2" (12.7mm) exposed
surface and a depth of 1-13/16" (46.0mm). These assemblies receive 1/4"(6.4mm) thick
heavy gauge support cushions 1" (25.4mm) long mounted to each continuous foot at 20"
(0.51m) on center. Frame shall have an anodized finish; color as selected by the Architect.
2.5 TREAD INSERT OPTIONS
A. HC - Heavy Duty Carpet shall be colorfast, solution dyed 100% nylon, with 12-mil
monofilament, available in one of 37 standard colors as offered by manufacturer. Each
carpet fiber and monofilament shall be fusion-bonded to a rigid two-ply backing to prevent
fraying and supplied in continuous splice-free lengths. Anti-static carpet fiber shall contain
antimicrobial additive and be treated with Scotchgard® to reduce soiling. Carpet weight
shall be 33-oz./yd².
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular shaped
grid assemblies to ensure a proper installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Set grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.
C. Coordinate top of grid surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across to provide ample
clearance between door and grid.
3.4 CLEANING
A. It is important to the life cycle of the entrance mat that a maintenance schedule be
developed which includes regular vacuuming and extraction that correctly matches the
amount of traffic the mat incurs.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring.
Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of
substantial completion.
B. Defer installation of floor grids until time of substantial completion of project
END OF SECTION
SECTION 13070 THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish detailed shop drawings and manufacturer’s data sheets on the following:
1. Insulated panels; including head, sill and corner details
2. Panel color samples
3. Fasteners and calculations for wind and seismic loads
4. Vapor barrier
5. Sealants
6. Underfloor insulation
7. Trim
B. Warranties
A. Exterior Panels: Maximum deflection of L/180 (combined loading).
B. Interior Panels: Minimum 5 PSF uniform load with maximum deflection of L/240 (combined
loading).
C. Girt spacing is shown on the Drawings. The Thermal Contractor is responsible for providing
panels with face thicknesses to meet design load requirements.
D. Girt Fasteners: The Drawings indicate general intent only; the Thermal Contractor is
responsible for the design of the fastening system.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Two (2) year installation warranty for vapor tight junctures at all cold storage work.
B. Five (5) year manufacturer warranty against defects including blisters and delaminations.
Provide a twenty-five year warranty for the paint system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED INSULATED PANELS
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. Metl-Span
2. Kingspan
3. Vicwest / All Weather
4. or pre-approved equal
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 6 13070 – Thermal Insulation

B. Physical properties of insulating materials: urethane insulation shall be rigid poured-in-place
isocyanurate with a 2 pcf density and K of 0.16 at +40F.
C. Panel facings: wall panel facings shall be minimum 26 gauge, G90, galvanized steel,
conforming to ASTM A 446, Grade A with an embossed stucco finish on the exterior and
finish interior, unless noted otherwise.
D. Panel Finishes:
1. Interior painting shall be acrylic baked enamel or modified siliconized polyester, with
0.2 mil primer and 0.8 mil finish coat. All interior facings shall be USDA approved,
prefinished Polar White or Regal White.
2. Exterior painting shall be 0.2 mil epoxy primer followed by 0.8 mil finished coat of 70%
Kynar 500 in the manufacturer’s standard color. Provide manufacturer’s written
twenty-year warranty. Color choice shall be by the Owner, submit samples.
3. Concealed facings on liner panels or facings exposed above any suspended ceilings
may be Regal White or galvanized at the Contractor’s option.
E. Panel Profile:
1. Exterior wall panel profile shall be: Alumashield, AW-200 or Metl-Span Corp., CF-
Fluted.
2. Interior wall and ceiling panels and interior face of exterior wall panels shall be:
Alumashield, AW-300 or Metl-Span Corp., CF-Light Mesa.
F. Panel Fasteners:
1. Wall panels shall have the following minimum fasteners, shop drawings shall show
the manufacturer’s requirements to comply with the specified building code and wind
load requirements.
a. Roof-to-Wall: Drill through panels with self-tapping screws at minimum 16”

O.C.
b. Girts: Provide concealed, self-tapping screws with hidden galvanized fastener

plates at all panel joints and Fab-Lok fasteners at intermediate points
between joints. Space per building code and panel manufacturer’s design
requirements.
c. Panel Base: Set base channel in bead of water cut-off mastic, Tapcon base
channel to concrete foundation with 5/16” x 2” fasteners at 16” O.C. Set panel
in bead of water cut-off mastic applied to the inside bed of the base channel.
2.2 UNDERFLOOR INSULATION AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
A. Dow Styrofoam Freezermate, R=5.0/inch, minimum compressive strength of 25 psi. Provide

two layers with staggered and offset joints, thickness as shown on the Drawings.
B. Vapor Barrier / Slip Sheet:
1. Special Vapor Barrier Flashing: 45 mil EPDM membrane. Provided below column
bearing/isolation blocks (installed by Steel Erector) and below wall panel base
channels (furnished and installed by Thermal Contractor).
2. Below Insulation Vapor Barrier: Provide 10 mil, black, polyethylene sheet. Extend to
all special vapor barrier flashing locations and tape joints.

a. Adhesive: “contact cement” compatible with polyethylene sheets.
b. Joint Tape: 4" width, self-adhesive, "Griff-Tape" by Griffolyn Co. or equal.
3. Above Insulation Slip Sheet: Provide 6 mil polyethylene sheet. Extend up the walls 4’;
do not tape joints.
C. Bearing Blocks: high-density polyurethane, "Last-A-Foam", as manufactured by General

Plastics or equal, with 35pcf and 2% deflection at 1500 psi. Dimensions and thickness as
shown on the Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORY ITEMS AND MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealant:
1. Mastic shall be water cut-off mastic by Carlisle or equal.
2. Special vapor barrier shall be uncured EPDM, 45 mil Elastaform by Carlisle or equal.
Vapor barrier shall be adhered with a full coat of "bonding adhesive" by Carlisle or
equal.
a. Where called for, this material shall also be used for cover strips at vertical
joints between tilt-up concrete wall panels.
b. Mastic: "C.I." (60-25 trowel grade, or 60-26 spray grade), as manufactured

by the N. B. Fuller Co. (800) 231-9541.
c. Backer Rod: 3/4" diameter (or larger, if required) "Sonofoam", by Sonneborn

Building Products (612) 835-3434.
3. Concealed caulking within panel joints, panel base channels and at panel cap
channels shall be butyl, GE Silpruf or equal.
4. Exposed caulking on the metal face of panels shall be a single component

polyurethane, Sika 1a, Sonneborn NP-1 or equal.
B. Moldings and Trim: Angle corner trim, base trim, edge covers, etc., as called for or required;
items must be appropriate for each specific condition.
1. Items are to be extruded aluminum, galvanized iron, or vinyl, pre-finished to match

insulated panel finish.
C. Fasteners: All fasteners are to be non-corrosive and appropriate for each specific condition,
with exposed portions pre-finished to match insulated panel finish. Use Fab-Lok fasteners for
surface fastening other than at panel joints.
D. Foam-in-Place Insulation: Polyurethane, 2 pcf nominal density and flamespread of 75 or less.

Versi-Foam by RHH Foam Systems, "Handi-Foam" by FOMO Products or equal.
1. Sprayed Thermal Barrier: "Z-3300" by W.R. Grace or equal. The color is to be "off-
white", not gray.
2. Metal Covers: Material, gauge, color, and texture to match the related insulated
panels. A heavier gauge may be noted for a specific condition.
E. Thermal Break Separations: Where called for at steel roof framing connection(s), at concrete
tilt-up wall panels.

1. Commercial grade, elastomeric, bearing pad material having a minimum durometer
hardness rating of 70 (Duro-70), unless specifically noted otherwise. Manufactured
by Fabreeka Products Co. or equal.
F. Metal Cladding, at door openings: with fasteners as detailed; material and gauge as called for.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
dimensions agree with Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wall Panels
1. Wall panels shall be erected in galvanized steel channels and set in a bead of mastic.
Sills shall have full bearing on concrete or grout. The panels shall be mechanically-
fastened to each other and to the structure as detailed. The fastening system shall
permit thermal movement while maintaining structural integrity. Spacing of fasteners
shall be as recommended by Panel Manufacturer. Panels shall be erected plumb and
true and with tight fitting joints.
a. Set special vapor barrier flashing, in a full bed of mastic, under base channels
of walls adjacent to rooms with underfloor insulation in a full bed of mastic.
2. Panel stack joints shall not be permitted, install panels full height.
3. Thermal cuts shall be provided behind girts where required by the Panel Manufacturer
to minimize thermal deflection. Locate thermal cuts on shop drawings for exact
location. Install Fab-Lok fasteners on either side of thermal cuts at girts. Locate a
thermal cut just above the roof edge angle on freezers.
4. Perform all cutting, patching and trim for steel joist and beam penetration of the wall
panels. Fill all voids in panels at these locations with spray urethane foam insulation
(SUFI). Provide panel lagging on structural steel where shown or required.
a. Lagging: Provide panel lagging on columns, beams, girts, cross-bracing or

joists where these members pass from refrigerated space through wall or
ceiling panels to ambient space. See structural drawings to determine
locations requiring lagging. Provide corner trim. Dow SM infill and SUFI for
vapor tight lagging. 4’ on either side of wall panels or 6’ on one side only if
access is limited. CSI panel lagging thickness to match the adjacent wall or
ceiling panel thickness.
5. Spray urethane foam insulation (SUFI) or foam caulk at all locations as necessary to
eliminate any voids in the insulated envelope.
B. Sealants
1. The wall panel exterior (warm) side shall provide a continuous sealed, vapor barrier.
All panel-to-panel splined connections shall be sealed with two continuous beads of
butyl sealant at the spline. All panel-to-panel tongue and groove joints shall be sealed
with butyl, near the warm side face. Install sealant prior to erecting panels.

2. All panel interior surface joints shall be sealed with a bead of sealant after panel
erection of the panels face in food process areas subject to wash down.
3. The exterior side of all wall panel joints above low roofs shall have a bead of sealant
installed full height, roof metal to roof metal after the walls panels are erected.
C. Flashing and Trim
1. Metal panel trim shall include all trim metals shown on the Drawings or required for
the installation that are in contact with the wall panels, except for roof gravel stop
metals. This includes, but is not limited to, interior and exterior doors, openings,
corner trim and base flashing, etc. Attach with cadmium plated or stainless steel
color coated Tec screws.
2. Install base flashings with preformed foam insert and sealant.
3. All special vapor barriers shall be concealed with trim. All panel to masonry wall
junctures shall have trim metal to conceal the joint.
D. Underfloor Insulation / Vapor Barrier:
1. Underfloor vapor barrier shall be loose laid over slab subgrade or subslab and gently
pulled smooth. Vapor barrier shall be laid wall-to-wall, fully lapping special vapor
barrier flashing at walls and columns.
2. All joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 6” and have adhesive applied. Roll joints
to remove all bubbles, wrinkles and fish-mouths.
3. Extreme caution shall be exercised to prevent tearing or puncturing the vapor barrier
or vapor barrier flashing; damage must be immediately repaired with additional
material and/or tape.
4. The vapor barrier is to be fully sealed, clean, dry, and free of refuse or debris prior to
insulation placement. No insulation shall be placed prior to examination of the vapor
barrier surface by the Construction Manager.
5. Underfloor insulation shall be placed dry, over the vapor barrier. All boards shall be
tightly butted and neatly cut at perimeters, column bearing blocks, etc. to insure
tightness of fit.
6. Placement of the first layer must be kept a minimum of three board joints ahead of
second layer to assure the first layer joints remain tight. The second layer shall be
placed dry, tightly butted and fitted as noted for the first layer, with all joints staggered
a minimum of 6" from those in the first layer.
7. Completed insulation shall be kept dry and clean with a 6 mil black polyethylene cover
sheet. Joints shall be lapped 6"; do not tape joints.
E. Foam-in-Place Insulation (SUFI)
1. Where foamed urethane insulation is called for, the material shall be applied, in
increments of 3/4" thickness, up to a total thickness as called for. Material shall be
applied to achieve a light "orange peel" finish surface - a maximum +1/2" tolerance
will be permitted in the plane on the finished surface.
2. Surfaces may be required to be "shaved", or otherwise corrected to achieve the

required, relatively uniform condition.

3. All contiguous areas which are not to receive insulation and thermal barrier materials
shall be masked off and covered. Careful cleaning will be required for surfaces
where insulation is not required.
4. Off-ratio material having a caramel color (rather than the "normal" amber/yellow color)
must be removed down to solid, acceptable material, or down to the substrate, as
directed.
5. Following a proper curing time, the thermal barrier material shall be applied to a
minimum (not average) 1/2" thickness to achieve the required, relatively uniform
condition.
6. Where metal covers are called for, the material shall be installed as detailed, securely
fastened, with ends capped where required.
F. Care shall be exercised to protect item finishes, and to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces.
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where finish has been damaged shall be touched up.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 13090 THERMAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Insulated thermal doors and frames, operating hardware, manual and/or power operations.
Including the following:
1. Freezer and cooler personnel doors
A. Section 13070 Thermal Insulation
B. Division 16 Electrical
1.3 REFERENCES
A. All applicable requirements of the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA), Meat Inspection
Division of the USDA (MID), National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), ASTM, UL, NEMA, OSHA,
etc.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings showing door elevations with hardware, clearance, construction, finish,
gaskets, casings, trim, options and mounting details.
B. Wiring diagrams for power operators and controls.
A. Design exterior assemblies to withstand wind pressures as required for the area where the
project is located.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. In lieu of the requirement of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, provide
minimum warranties as follows: 3 years for hinged doors and 5 years for other doors.
B. Doors shall be frost-free under normal travel conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FREEZER AND COOLER PERSONNEL DOORS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Hercules
2. Enviro
3. Jamison
4. Weiland Doors
B. Personal doors shall be USDA approved hinged doors constructed of molded fiberglass shells
or 20 ga. galvanized steel facings. Doors shall be reinforcement for hardware attachment at
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 13090 – Thermal Doors

edges and corners as necessary.
C. Doors shall be insulated with foamed in place, polyurethane foam. 3” thick doors for coolers
and 4” doors for freezers. See Door Schedule for sill types.
D. Casings, jamb extension, and inside trim shall be PVC, color to match door. Jamb extensions
shall be provided to match wall thickness.
E. Hardware to be heavy-duty, chrome plated, Kason hardware with adjustable strike and all
hinges spring-assisted.
F. Provide double neoprene gasket sill seal with camlift hinges at all flat floor installations.
Gaskets shall be grease resistant rubber on head, jambs and bottom of high sill doors.
G. Provide padlocking provision and inside safety release.
H. Provide UL listed, 120V, single-phase, full perimeter heat cables on all doors installed at
locations of +32F and lower.
I. Doors shall be prefinished white.
J. Exterior egress doors shall have no exterior hardware, unless noted otherwise.
2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, AND WINDOW FRAMES
A. Doors noted to be hollow metal or pressed metal from ambient spaces to cooler spaces shall
be polyurethane foam filled, fully gasketed, thermally broken doors and frames. The Door
panels shall be constructed of 26-gauge galvanized steel and factory painted white. The Door
Frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel (primed). Acceptable Personnel Door models
include:
1. Model 1120W by Insulators Supply
2. Personnel Door by Weiland Doors
3. An approved equal
Door hardware package shall include: Stainless steel passage or security latch, panic bar,
kick plates, Threshold, weather seal, sweep seal and a heavy duty closer as supplied by the
Door manufacturer.
B. Windows noted to be hollow metal or pressed metal from ambient spaces to cooler spaces
shall be polyurethane foam filled, insulated glazing, fully gasketed, thermally broken frames.
The Window Frame shall be galvanized steel (white stucco embossed). The glazing shall be
1” insulated and tempered. Acceptable Personnel Door models include:
1. Model 920SW by Insulators Supply or equal.
2. Weiland Insulated Panel Window
3. An approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Special attention shall be given to verification of wall openings, framing, power supply, where
required, etc.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All material and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the directions and
recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. Frames shall be set in vapor sealing mastic. Final caulking shall be applied after all wall
panels and doors are finally set and adjusted.
C. Use only stainless steel bolts and fastening devices set truly so that gaskets have uniform
bearing pressure while sealing all around and so that all hardware functions properly.
D. All bolts shall be countersunk and holes capped with plastic or stainless inserts.
E. Pull cords shall be mounted at the maximum practical height, securely attached to the building
framing; supplemental, light metal framing shall be provided and installed, as required, as part
of this work.
F. Doors shall be aligned and plumbed for the correct operation.
G. Doors shall be given a final adjustment for smooth operation and tight sealing after all
elements are in place.
3.3 FINISH
A. After installation, areas where galvanized or molded plastic finish has been damaged shall be
touched up.
3.4 CLEANUP
A. All work shall be left clean and undamaged, ready for finish, as appropriate, under Separate
Section.
B. Refer to pertinent portions of Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls,
and Section 01700 Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Basic mechanical requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition
to provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
A. Nothing contained in these specifications, or shown on the drawings, shall be so construed
as to conflict with any local, municipal, or state or federal laws, regulations, codes or
ordinances, governing the installation of mechanical systems or any other work specified.
All such laws, regulations, codes or ordinances are hereby incorporated and made a part
of these specifications. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall satisfy all
such requirements.
B. The mechanical drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and are based generally on the
manufacturer’s equipment specified. Due to the layout, and small scale of the drawings, it
is not possible to show every item in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the
details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual dimensions of the
proposed equipment to insure that equipment will fit into the available space.
C. Installation shall be within the limitations imposed by the architectural, structural, and
electrical requirements.
D. All equipment shall be installed in such a way that all components requiring access
(valves, dampers, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be serviced, reset,
replaced or recalibrated etc., by service people with normal service tools and equipment. If
any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot
comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and attempt to resolve the
problem of access.
E. Equipment, devices, and materials of similar types, and function as one system, shall be of
the same manufacturer.
F. Equipment Furnished by the Owner:
1. The Contractor shall unload, uncrate, assemble and connect any and all
equipment shown on the Drawings, or called out in the Specifications, to be
furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor.
2. The Contractor shall take full charge of such equipment from the time the items
are delivered to the job until set in place, connected, tested, adjusted, and place
into operation.
G. Contractor Qualifications:
1. The Contractor or Subcontractor performing work under all section of this division
shall be licensed firm(s) regularly engaged in the type of work to be furnished
under these sections.
2. Each shall be able to provide, upon request, a list of at least five similar jobs
completed in the last two years.
H. Quiet Operation and Vibration:
1. All equipment provided under this section shall operate under all conditions of
load, free from objectionable sound and vibration. Sound and vibration conditions
considered objectionable by the A/E shall be corrected in an approved manner.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 15010 – General Requirements

2. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators as specified
and as recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. No mechanical or mechanical associated equipment shall be installed prior to approval of
such equipment by Engineer.
C. Refer to individual specification Sections for additional submittal requirements.
D. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related
systems, products and accessories in a single submittal.
E. Acceptance by Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from complying with all the
requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
F. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
G. Erection Drawings:
1. Submit required erection drawings and obtain written approval before ordering or
installing any equipment or material. Equipment of material ordered or installed
without written approval may not be accepted.
2. Erection drawings shall consist of scale drawings of the work including foundations
in plan and elevation. Drawings shall show clearances between units and relation
of equipment to space assigned. Make erection drawings and submit to the
Engineer to supplement the Engineer’s diagrammatic drawings.
3. Normally, erection drawings are required only in central plant, mechanical
equipment rooms, and in congested areas. The drawings shall also show the
work of all other trades in the immediate vicinity of such areas.
H. These drawings shall become part of the final as-built records. Coordinate with structural
and architectural drawings for available clearances.
1.4 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
A. When the Contractor desires to furnish equipment of a manufacturer other than that
specified or intended, they shall include a complete specification of the substituted item,
along with each submission copy of shop drawings indicating the necessary modifications
to the substituted product to satisfy the requirements of the contract specifications.
Manufacturer’s specifications shall be written as close as possible to the contract
specifications and each paragraph shall bear the same paragraph number as the contract
specification so that close comparison can be made.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All mechanical and related work, equipment and materials furnished or installed under this
contract shall conform to the requirements of the following:
1. American Gas Association
2. American National Standards Institute
3. American Society for Testing Materials
4. Applicable municipal, county, and state mechanical, electrical, gas, plumbing,
health and sanitary codes, laws, and ordinances.
5. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA)
6. National Electrical Code.

7. Notional Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
9. International Plumbing and Mechanical Codes.
10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
11. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
B. Where any of the above items deviate from the drawings and specifications, the code
requirements shall take precedence and any cost necessary to comply with these shall be
included in the contract.
C. The Contractor shall secure and deliver to the A/E all permits, certificates and legal
evidence of compliance with the above-mentioned laws, codes, ordinances and
regulations.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install work in locations shown on drawing, unless prevented by project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions,
including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of A/E before
proceeding.
1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Anything shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or anything
mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor. Should any incidental work or materials be required by not set
forth in the drawings and specifications, either directly or indirectly, but which is
nevertheless, necessary for the proper carrying out of completeness of the intent thereof,
the Contractor is to understand same to be implied and required and shall perform all such
work and furnish all such materials as if they were particularly described.
1.8 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES
A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from leaks or defects. Any defective materials or
workmanship as well as damage to work from other trades shall be replaced or repaired as
directed for the duration of stipulated guarantee periods.
B. The duration of guarantee periods following the date of beneficial use of the system shall
be one year. Beneficial use is defined as operation of the system to obtain its intended
use.
C. The date of acceptance shall be the date of final payment for the work, or the date of a
formal notice of acceptance, whichever is earlier.
D. Certification shall be submitted attesting to the fact that specified performance criteria are
met by all items of the installed equipment.
1.9 ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall carefully read all applicable sections of these specifications and prepare
and assemble necessary test reports, maintenance manuals, certificates, guarantees,
letters of instruction, etc., that are required.
B. These documents shall be delivered to the A/E office at least 48 hours before requesting
final acceptance inspection of work covered under this division of the specifications.
C. Contractor’s representatives responsible for work under this division shall be present at
time of acceptance inspections and shall furnish required mechanics, tools and ladders to
assist in the inspection.

D. A list of items to be corrected as a result of acceptance inspection will be furnished to the
Contractor. Notify Architect in writing of any items appearing on list of corrections that are
disputed by Contractor. When ready, request in writing, a new inspection of work.
E. Should items appearing on substantial completion inspection remain uncorrected at time of
final acceptance inspection and additional inspections are required to ascertain
completion, these additional inspections will be paid by the Contractor at a rate of $150.00
per hour to A/E whose time is involved. This amount will be deducted from the General
Contractor and Subcontractor’s final payment.
1.10 OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUALS
A. Contractor shall provide Owner with three copies of hardbound operating manuals for all
equipment furnished and installed under contract.
B. The manual shall include a manufacturer’s maintenance and operating instructions and
parts list and serial numbers for all operating equipment.
C. All controls and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently embossed or print plated
as to purpose and operation. Plates shall be laminated plastic (color selected by Owner’s
representative A/E) with black letters, attached to the equipment or device with screws,
rivets or insoluble cement (glue).
D. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall put the system into service. The Contractor
shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TECHNICAL DEFINITIONS/INTERPRETATION OF THE DRAWINGS & SPECS

A. Specific items of terminology, as used herein, shall have the following meanings:
1. Work: Includes all material, labor, equipment and operation required for complete
and proper installation.
2. Ducting: Shall mean duct constructed materials, dampers, hangers, controls,
insulation, and items customarily required in connection with the transfer of air.
3. Piping: Shall mean pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, control, hangers, drains,
insulation, and items customarily required in connection with the transfer of fluids.
4. By Other Trades: Shall mean by persons or parties responsible for work at the
project other than the party of parties who have been duly awarded the contract for
the work of this trade. In the event that this document is used to acquire work as
part of a general construction contract, the words “by other trades” shall mean by
persons or parties who are not anticipated to be the Subcontractor for this trade
working together with the General Contractor. In this context, the words “by other
trades” shall not be interpreted to mean not included in the overall contract.
B. As used in the drawings and specifications, certain non-technical words shall be
understood to have specific meanings as follows:
1. Furnish: Shall mean purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every
necessary appurtenance and support.
2. Install: Shall mean unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every
operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the
proper location in the project.

3. Provide: Shall mean, “furnish” and “install”.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any item, in the drawings or specifications, or both, carries
either instruction to furnish and install that item, regardless of whether or not this
instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.
D. It shall be understood that the specifications and drawings are complementary and are to
be taken together for a complete interpretation of the work. Exceptions are those notes on
the drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take precedence over the
specifications where they conflict.
E. No exclusions from, or limitations, in the language used in the drawings or specifications
shall be interpreted as meaning that the appurtenances or accessories necessary to
complete any required system or item of equipment are to be omitted.
F. The drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various
items of work. Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate
every item required for the intended installation. The work shall be installed in accordance
with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the drawings and in conformity with the
dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural working drawings, and on
equipment shown drawings.
G. No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that any
elements necessary for complete work are excluded.
H. Certain details appear on the Drawings that are specific with regards to the dimensions
and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of
establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated
work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15290 HEAT TAPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Furnish and install a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved system of heating cables,
components, and controls to prevent domestic water pipes from freezing.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel-copper bus wires
embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to
temperature all along its length, allowing the heating cable to be cut to length in the field. The
heating cable shall be covered by radiation-crosslinked, modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. To
provide a ground path and to enhance the heating cable’s ruggedness, the heating cable shall
have a braid of tinned copper and an outer jacket of modified polyolefin (-CR) as required per
section 427-23 of the NEC-1996.
2.2 In order to conserve energy and to prevent overheating, the heating cable shall have a self-
regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation factor is defined as the percentage
reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heating cable output going from 40°F pipe
temperature operation to 150°F pipe temperature operation.
2.3 The heating cable shall operate on line voltages of 120 volts without the use of transformers.
2.4 The heating cable for metal-pipe freeze protection shall be sized according to the table below. The
required heating cable output rating is in the watts per foot at 50°F. (Heating cable selection based
on 1 inch fiberglass insulation on metal piping.)
Minimum Ambient Temperature
Pipe size (inches) 30°F

And less 3 watts
2.5 The heating cable shall be XL-Trace cable as manufactured by Raychem Corporation.
2.6 Power connection, end seal, splices, and tee kit components shall be applied in the field.
2.7 Heating cable circuit shall be protected by a ground-fault device for equipment protection. This
requirement is in accordance with section 427-22 of the NEC-1996.
PART 3 COMPONENTS
3.1 All heating-cable components shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved for use as part of
system to provide pipe freeze protection. Component enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to
prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall not require the installing contractor to cut
into the heating-cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection systems that require the installing
contractor to strip the bus wires or that us crimps or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. All
components that make an electrical connection shall be re-enterable for servicing. No component
shall use silicone to seal the electrical connections. An exception will be made in areas where a
conduit transition is required.
PART 4 SYSTEM CONTROL
4.1 MANUAL CONTROL

A. The system shall be controlled by a switch, either directly or through an appropriate
contractor.
PART 5 EXECUTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 15290 – Heat Tape

5.1 INSTALLATION
System must be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Apply the heating cable linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully pressure-
tested. Secure the heating cable to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape.
Apply “Electric Traced” labels to the outside of the thermal insulation.
5.2 TESTS
After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heating
cable to testing using a 2500-Vdc Megger, Minimum insulation resistance shall be 20
megohms or greater.
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 15290 – Heat Tape

SECTION 15400 PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide all material, labor, equipment and supplies, and perform all operations to furnish a
complete fully functional plumbing system in full compliance with applicable codes and as
shown on the Drawings and specifications including but not limited to the following:
1. All plumbing fixtures, trim, sleeves, inserts, hangers, insulation, escutcheons, and
all required incidental specialties and accessories.
2. Hot and cold water supply systems, Sanitary drain, waste and vent systems from
connections at fixtures to locations as shown on Drawings, including final
connection of all plumbing connected equipment and systems.
3. Coordinating plumbing work above and below floor with Owner’s equipment where
applicable.
4. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections, certificates, permits,
insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under
this section. Give all requisite notices.
5. This work includes the underground domestic water line to connect the Fire Pump
Room to the Office Area.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Report: Submit copy of any required tests performed on the plumbing work.
B. Maintenance Manual: Submit copy of operation and maintenance manuals for equipment
furnished under this section.
C. Equipment data, fixtures and piping substitutions.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA/QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with latest local Plumbing Code and OSHA regulations. The most restrictive shall
govern.
B. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers that have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for three years. Use experienced installers.
C. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangement of new piping and
equipment. All offsets, drops and rises of pipe runs may not be shown on Drawings. It
shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to install his work in such a manner as to avoid
obstruction, maintain maximum headroom, provide adequate accessibility for maintenance
and keep openings and passageways clear without cost or instructions. Site conditions
shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets and similar items.
D. Coordinate location of plumbing systems to avoid interference with location of structure
and other building systems.
E. Provide ample access for service and adjustment.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 8 15400 – Plumbing

1.5 OWNER INSTRUCTION
A. Provide Owner personnel with detailed walk-through description of all plumbing work and
entire system; detailed instruction about proper inspection, maintenance, and operation of
all parts of the work, and a complete review of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all
equipment and systems.
A. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for plumbing items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 08305 Access Doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide all new materials and equipment as specified herein, except where existing items
are specifically indicated to be re-used.
2.2 PIPING, VALVES, AND FITTINGS
A. Above Ground Domestic hot and cold water piping: Type L seamless hard drawn copper
tubing (ASTM B-88) with cast bronze or copper fittings joined with approved 95/5 (lead
free) solder.
1. Fittings & Joints: Wrought copper, ASA B16.22, Sweat 95/5.
B. Under Ground Domestic cold water piping: Copper

1. Copper tubing shall be "soft annealed" and shall conform to the standards for
"Type K", prescribed in Federal Specifications WW-T-799, for "Seamless Copper
Tubing for use with Flared Fittings" and to ASTM, Designation B88, and current
revisions thereof. It shall be free from grooving cracks, indentations, flaws or other
defects. At intervals of not greater than one and one-half feet, the tubing shall
bear clear, permanent markings indicating the type and manufacturer.
2. Flare type fittings shall be used. Fittings shall be cast brass meeting the
requirements of ASTM B62.
C. Storm, Sanitary waste and vent pipe and fittings:

1. Below slab: Pipe shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe. Fittings and joints shall
be service weight cast iron hub and spigot with compression type neoprene
gaskets. PVC shall be allowed if acceptable to the local inspector.
2. Above slab: Pipe 2½" and larger shall be service weight spun cast iron no-hub with
mechanical couplers made of compression type neoprene gaskets and stainless
steel clamps.
3. Waste pipe 2-inch and smaller located above slab, may be Type M copper tubing
with cast bronze or copper drainage fittings joined with 95/5 solder.
D. Valves 2-inch and under for domestic water service shall be bronze, full port ball valves

rated for 400 PSI W.G.
2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
A. General: Fixtures shall be white vitreous china with chrome-plated faucets, stops and
traps. Insulation of drain and supply piping shall be in accordance with INSULATION
paragraph.
B. Water closet-WC-1 – Kohler Kingston model K-4325, white, 1.6 Gallons per flush, wall
mounted, elongated bowl, siphon jet water closet with integral trap, wall hangers and 4"
female flanged outlet connection and 1-1/2" top spud. Sloan Royal 111, 1.6 GPF flush
valve assembly.
1. Seat: Model #95 open front seat by Olsonite.
2. Flush valve: Sloan 111 Manual Flush Valve 1.6 GPF
C. ADA Water closet – same unit as WC-1 mounted for barrier free use.
D. Toilet Room Lavatory L-1 – Kohler Model K-2196-4 white, vitreous china, countertop drop-
in bathroom sink. Supply with overflow, 4” centers.
1. Faucet: American Standard 2175.202 single lever-operated manual faucet.
Washerless ceramic disc valve cartridge Cast brass waterway. Metal body.
Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Toilet Room Lavatory L-2 – Kohler Model K-1729 white, vitreous china, wall-mounted
bathroom sink, drilled for concealed arm carrier, ledge-back, hanger, with hanger. Supply
with overflow, 4” centers.
1. Faucet: American Standard 2175.202 single lever-operated manual faucet.
Washerless ceramic disc valve cartridge Cast brass waterway. Metal body.
Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Janitors Sink – Mustee, Model 63M, one piece molded high impact resistant structural
fiberglass floor mop basin supplied with vinyl rim guard, wall guards, mop hanger, hose
and hose hanger.
1. Faucet: Mustee Model 63.600A, heavy duty, chrome plated brass dual handle
faucet with top reinforcing bar and pail hook.
2. Furnished with non removable vacuum breaker – Watts 8A.
G. Kitchen Counter Sink – Two Compartment:
1. Elkay Model LR3321PD, self-rimming, 18 gauge 304 stainless steel, with three
faucet holes 4-inches on center as manufactured by Elkay Manufacturing Co.
2. Size overall: 33-inches x 21-1/4 inches x 9-3/8 inches deep with 3-1/2 inch drains.
3. Faucet: American Standard Model 6275.000 dual handle, gooseneck swivel spout.
Finish: polished chrome. Furnish with wristblade handles, A.D.A Compliant.
C. Single Compartment Service Sink:
1. Elkay Rigidbilt Model RNSF81182, 16 gauge stainless steel, with two faucet holes
8-inches on center.
2. Size overall: approx. 27-inches x 30 inches x 13 inches deep with 3-1/2 inch drain
centered in bowl.

3. Faucet: Elkay Model LK940AT08L2H wall mount 8” center arc tube swing spout
faucet. Finish: solid brass with replacement cartridges for hot and cold inlets.
Note: Furnish with replacement cartridges.
4. Drain: Elkay LK24RT rotary lever operated grid drain fitting for 3-1/2” opening, 4-
1/8” top flange. Chrome plated brass with 1-1/2” x 4” tailpiece and stainless steel
lever arm.
H. Three Compartment Service Sink:
1. Elkay Rigidbilt Model RNSF8354LR4, 16 gauge stainless steel, with two sets of
faucet holes 8-inches on center.
2. Size overall: approx. 97-inches x 30 inches x 13 inches deep with 3-1/2 inch drain
centered in bowls.
3. Faucet: Elkay Model LK940AT08L2H wall mount 8” center arc tube swing spout
faucet. Finish: solid brass with replacement cartridges for hot and cold inlets.
Note: Furnish with replacement cartridges.
4. Drain: Elkay LK25RT rotary lever operated grid drain fitting for 3-1/2” opening, 4-
1/8” top flange. Chrome plated brass with 2” x 4” tailpiece and stainless steel lever
arm.
I. Urinal U-1- Kohler Bardon Model K-4991-ET, white vitreous china, wall hung, washout
urinal with integral trap, wall hangers and 2" female flanged outlet connection and 3/4" top
spud. Sloan Royal 186, manual flushometer valve assembly. 1.0 GPF flush valve.
J. Shower Module:
1. Aquatic Model 1363BFSC, gelcoat surface, ¾” skirt, barrier free , smooth wall
shower module with centered drain.
2. Size overall: approx. 36-inches x 36 inches x 75 inches tall.
3. Provide with fold up seat, hand-held shower assembly with slide bar, pressure
balancing mixing valve, grab bars, and curtain rod with shower curtain.
a. Mixing Valve: American Standard R125SS with Soft Colony Trim Kit.
K. Emergency Eyewash and Shower Module:
1. Shower: ANSI Z358.1; free standing, self- cleaning, non-clogging 3.1 inch
diameter drench shower head, instant action stay open valve actuated by rigid
stainless steel pull rod.
2. Eyewash: ANSI Z358.1; plastic bowl with elbow, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) galvanized
steel pipe pedestal with floor flange, instant action stay open valve actuated by
push flag, twin spray heads, and tailpiece and brass P-trap.
L. Hose Bibbs, wall hydrants, roof hydrants:
1. Interior hose bibb: Bronze or brass, anti-siphon protected wall faucet. Hose
thread spout, handwheel operated, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with
ASSE 1011.
2. Exterior hose bibb: Bronze or brass, anti-siphon protected wall faucet, ASSE
1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type, hose thread spout, key operated
operated, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011.
3. Roof hydrant: Bronze or brass, ASSE 1052 double check backflow

preventer. Built in vent for drainage. Valve body is drilled and tapped with

1/8” drain hole which must be piped to drain location. Provide unit with
mounting system for roof installation.
2.4 WATER HEATER
A. Rheem-Ruud Model ELD120 tank type heater, 120 gallon storage, 12.5 KW 480 volts, with
magnesium anode rod, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
2.5 INSULATION
A. Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Office, Mechanical Areas: Minimum 1-1/2 inch thick preformed
sectional fiberglass pipe insulation with 3.25 pcf density, vapor barrier jacket and factory
applied double self-sealing lap. Owens Corning Fiberglass “ASJ/SSL II” or approved
equal.
B. Cold Water Pipe, Cooler and Loading Dock Areas: Minimum 2-inch thick preformed
sectional fiberglass pipe insulation with 3.25 pcf density, vapor barrier jacket and factory
applied double self-sealing lap. Owens Corning Fiberglass “ASJ/SSL II” or approved
equal. Provide 15 mil, white PVC jacketing. Pipe will be heat taped by others prior to
installation of insulation.
C. Roof Leaders, Conductors, Cooler Areas: Minimum 2-inch thick preformed sectional
fiberglass pipe insulation with 3.25 pcf density, vapor barrier jacket and factory applied
double self-sealing lap on all piping. Owens Corning Fiberglass “ASJ/SSL II” or approved
equal. Provide 30 mil, white PVC jacketing within 15’ of the floor and 15 mil PVC jacketing
above 15’. Pipe will be heat taped by others prior to installation of insulation.
D. Roof Leaders, Conductors, and Office Areas: Minimum 1-inch thick preformed sectional
fiberglass pipe insulation with 3.25 pcf density, vapor barrier jacket and factory applied
double self-sealing lap. Install on all horizontal piping and on the upper 4’ of all vertical
conductors. Owens Corning Fiberglass “ASJ/SSL II” or approved equal.
E. Provide 18 gage protection saddles between insulation and pipe hangers.
F. Fittings: High impact resistant PVC jackets "Zeston" with fiberglass inserts. Seal throats
and joints to pipe insulation with vinyl adhesive or 1-1/2 inch wide vinyl tape.
G. Toilet room lavatory and counter sink supply and drain piping shall be insulated with
"Handi-Lav Guard" kits No. 102, as manufactured by Truebro Inc. Color: gray.
2.6 HANGERS
A. For cast iron pipe, provide heavy wrought iron pipe hangers, brackets or clamps at 5-foot
intervals.
B. For water piping, provide adjustable wrought iron copper plated hangers at 6 foot intervals
maximum. Hangers shall allow for full thickness of insulation.
2.7 DRAINS
A. Provide floor drains and cleanouts as indicated on the plans.
B. Floor Drain (FD-1): ASME A112.6.3; Epoxy coated cast iron floor drain with bottom outlet,
combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with seepage slots. Provide
with nickel bronze strainer.
C. Floor Drain (FD-2): ASME A112.21.1; 12 inch square top drain, constructed using
industrial, pickled finish stainless steel with a removable basket and pvc pipe outlet. Drain
shall be capable of withstanding traffic from four wheel carts and forklifts.
D. Floor Drain (FD-3): ASME A112.21.1; cast iron shallow floor drain with double drainage
flange, reversible clamping collar, seepage openings, ½” plugged primer tap, sediment
bucket, and loose set ductile iron grate supported by bucket.

E. Floor Cleanout (FCO-1): Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping
collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and
round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
F. Floor Cleanout (FCO-2): All stainless steel construction, “O” ring, sealed, floor level plate,
screw-in type brass plug, adjustable top, and round stainless steel cover. Provide unit with
special duty ANSI load class rating for over 10,000 lbs.
G. Trench Drain (TD-1): Frame and grate system shall be meet overall length as indicated on
Architectural plans. Nominal width of trench drain shall be 4 inches width. Trench system
shall be polyester polymer concrete precast units. Units shall be manufactured with
neutral or invert slope of 0.5%. Units shall have horizontal cast anchoring keys to bond to
surrounding bedding and pavement. Ductile iron edge with slotted ductile iron grates.
Frame shall provide a method for securing grating into place with slotted or vandal-proof
fasteners. Catch basin system shall integrate into trench drain system installed.
H. Wall Cleanout (WCO): Lacquered cast iron body with gas and watertight ABS tapered
thread plug, and round, smooth stainless steel wall access cover with securing screw.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Heavy cast brass, bright chrome plated.
2.9 SLEEVES
A. Provide 20 USSG galvanized iron sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors or
ceilings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate plumbing work with all work of other trades and with all related and adjacent
work. In cases of conflict, piping requiring slope has right-of-way. Coordinate work to
minimize cutting and patching.
B. Install carriers and hangers for wall-mounted fixtures in walls before wall surface is
completed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hangers: Attach hangers directly to building structure. Provide all miscellaneous metal
framing as needed to by-pass obstructions such as duct work and equipment. Space
hangers not over 6 feet on center. Do not hang from bottom chord of ceiling joists.
B. Escutcheons: Provide tight fitting escutcheons wherever exposed piping passes through
finished walls, floors, or ceilings.
C. Firestopping: Effectively firestop in compliance with Section 07270 - Firestopping,
wherever piping passes through fire-rated assemblies.
D. Sleeves: Provide, set, and anchor all sleeves and inserts needed to accommodate
installation of plumbing work. Provide ½-inch clearance between pipe insulation and inside
of sleeve. Install sleeves to be flush with ceilings. For sleeves in floors subject to flooding,
extend sleeve at 1 ½ inches above finish floor and provide a watertight seal between floor
and outside of sleeve.
E. Floor Penetrations: Plumbing contractor shall seal all floor penetrations as per Owner's
requirements.
F. Piping, fittings and valves:

1. Run piping at right angles and parallel to major building lines. Do not run work
diagonally.
2. Run piping with uniform slope to drain.
3. Install shutoff valves on hot and cold water supplies to each fixture.
4. Install with pipe expansion loops, mechanical expansion joints, and anchors.
5. Install all valves so as to be readily accessible, but no valve handles pointing down
below horizontal position and removable without separating or lifting pipe in which
installed.
6. Furnish and install 3/8” supplies to all trap primers from an adjacent cold water
line, furnish shut off at point.
G. Conceal Work: Conceal all work, except where specifically indicated or permitted to be run
exposed.
H. Locations: Drawings are often diagrammatic. Locate work to accommodate field
conditions and where approved before installation by Owner.
I. Clearance: Provide maximum possible headroom and never less than 8’-0” clearance from
floor.
J. Connection: Provide all hardware, connections and anchors needed. Attach wall mounted
work with not less than 3/8-inch diameter expansion bolts. Attach floor and overhead
mounted work with minimum ½-inch diameter expansion bolts. Do not use wooden plugs.
K. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary caps and seals for piping work and cover
equipment to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and obstructions. Protect all work from
damage.
L. Dielectric Unions: Provide isolating dielectric union, EPCO or equal at connections
between ferrous and non-ferrous materials.
M. Insulation:
1. Thermally insulate all hot and cold lines and surfaces. Completely insulate all
system components and surfaces including, without limitation, piping, valves, and
all piping below handicap lavatories.
2. Install pipe insulation continuously in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions
and recommendations. Do not use staples. Seal butt joints with manufacturer’s
standard butt joint seal strips. Seal exposed ends of insulation with flame
retardant vapor seal.
N. Install fixtures and fittings at heights required by ADA and applicable plumbing code.
O. Anchor water closets to floor with screws or bolts
P. Hot Water Heater (tank type):
1. Heater shall be fitted with a temperature and pressure relief valve piped down to
floor drain as directed. Extend drain pipe to not more than 12-inches above the
floor drain. The termination shall not be threaded.
2. Provide shut off valves on the hot and cold water connections and a shock
absorber on the cold water inlet.
3. Substantially support the heater and drain pan from the building structure.

Q. Shut-off valves, with unions shall be installed for each service to each unit of equipment, to
facilitate isolation for repair or replacement. Unions shall be installed for servicing all
specialties.
R. All connections of heating, air conditioning or other non-potable water systems shall be
protected with a reduced pressure type backflow preventer except for fire protection
system connections that shall be protected by a double check-detector check valve
assembly. Verify the local Water Authority requirements and advise the Architect of any
differences before proceeding with this work.
3.3 TESTING
A. Fully test plumbing work in presence of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner. Comply with
requirements of local Plumbing Inspector.
1. Report test results in format acceptable to Owner and certify that all required
testing has been made and are approved by local authorities.
2. Correct all deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean out all traps and piping systems. Thoroughly clean and polish all fixtures and visible
plumbing work.
B. Disinfect domestic water piping systems in compliance with Building Codes.
C. Adjust water flow rates to comply with manufacturer's rating of the fixture.
D. Clean fixtures of labels, dirt, and construction debris.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide all material, labor, equipment and supplies, and perform all operations to furnish a
complete fully functional HVAC system in full compliance with applicable codes and as
shown on the Drawings and specifications.
1. Final connection of all HVAC connected equipment and systems.
2. Sheet metal ductwork system, diffusers, registers, grilles, insulation, dampers,
flexible ductwork, refrigerant piping distribution, automatic temperature control,
wiring and appurtenances and all required incidental specialties and accessories.
3. Testing, adjusting and balancing.
4. Coordination with Owner' Maintenance Contractor and HVAC equipment
manufacturer to obtain checkout and approvals.
B. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections, certificates, permits, insurance,
documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section. Give
all requisite notices.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-
Conditioned Engineers.
B. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
C. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning contractor's National
Association, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manuals: Provide two sets of all equipment and system operating procedures and
maintenance requirements. As a minimum, provide other information listed below for
inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals.
1. All concealed equipment and access panels plans showing locations.
2. Thermostats and all temperature controls including wiring diagrams with sequence
of operation description, instructions and operation manuals.
3. All equipment specifications.
4. Copies of all warranties for equipment including extended warranties as specified
in this section.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for HVAC units shall include principal dimensions, size and
locations of connections and performance data. Floor plan indicating concealed
equipment and location of access panels for HVAC equipment.
C. Final Balancing Report.
D. Certification that all equipment is operating correctly.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 23 15600 – HVAC

E. Report for equipment inspection and installation verification for any installed HVAC
equipment above finished ceiling prior to ceiling closing. Site Superintendent shall be
required to sign off the report.
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials under cover and keep dry and protected against damage, corrosion,
construction traffic and other causes.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing and protecting during
installation.
1.6 DESIGN CRITERIA AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with latest standards of ASHRAE and SMACNA. The most restrictive shall
govern.
B. The system shall conform to any requirements set forth by insurance underwriters, state
and local authorities having jurisdiction and any applicable "tenant fit-up" criteria.
C. Items such as filters, dampers, controls, access doors, etc. shall be installed so as to be
readily accessible for operating, servicing, maintaining and repairing and to provide all
applicable code clearances.
1. All equipment and/or accessories that are installed without proper access, in the
opinion of the Construction Project Manager, shall be removed and revised as
directed by the CPM at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Arrangement of systems indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic, and indicates the
minimum requirements for mechanical work. Site conditions shall determine the actual
arrangement of systems. Take field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 OWNER INSTRUCTION
A. Provide Owner personnel with detailed walk-through description of all HVAC work and
entire system; detailed instruction about proper inspection, maintenance, and operation of
all parts of the work; and a complete review of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all
equipment and systems.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. All materials, equipment, and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed
against all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year commencing with
the date of turnover.
B. All refrigeration compressors shall have the Manufacturer's extended replacement
warranty for a total of five years.
1.9 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A. Coordinate and arrange for a system checkout and approval by Owner prior to turnover.
Replace and/or repair all system deficiencies found by Owner. Owner shall provide a
signed checkout list.
B. Coordinate with the HVAC Equipment Manufacturer and arrange for an operations and
installation checkout by the Manufacturer's Field Representative. Coordinate, in advance,
and notify Owner of schedule date and time which shall be prior to project turnover.
Provide a signed check list from the Manufacturer's Field Representative following the
completion of any required work.

C. Refer to the "General Requirements" and Section 01700 portion of the specification for
additional project close-out requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide all new materials and equipment as specified herein. (except where an existing
item is specifically indicated to be reused).
B. All existing ductwork to remain must be clearly shown and noted on floor plans.
2.2 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate from galvanized sheet steel in strict compliance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards" manual including without limitation, gages, bracing, and
construction.
B. Turns and Vanes: Provide double thickness turning vane elbows in all 90o turns.
C. Joints: All ducts shall have joints sealed with 3M No EC-800 or approved equal and in
accordance with SMACNA seal classification.
D. Provide volume dampers with locking-type quadrants in all terminal branch ductwork and
wherever required to balance all air systems.
2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Flexible ducts between branch ducts and outlets shall be single ply, 1" thick insulated
neoprene impregnated fiberglass fabric jacket over a continuous galvanized non-kinkable
steel wire helix. Provide duct manufacturer’s recommended couplings and fittings.
B. Limitation: Limit length of flex duct to 4 feet maximum.
2.4 DUCTWORK SILENCERS
A. Provide prefabricated duct silencers as scheduled and as described herein, at locations
shown on Drawings, by Industrial Acoustics, United Sheet Metal, Commercial Acoustics,
Semco, or Titus. Industrial Acoustics model designations and performance data are
specified to establish standard of quality for material and performance.
B. Outer casings of rectangular silencers shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel as required by
ASHRAE and SMACNA Standards.
1. Seams shall be lock-formed and mastic filled.
2. Interior casing for rectangular silencers shall be 26 gauge perforated galvanized
steel.
C. Filler material shall be inorganic mineral or glass fiber packed under not less than 5%
compression. Material shall be inert and vermin- and moisture-proof. Filler shall have
ASTM E-84 (NFPA Standard 255, UL No. 723) combustion rating of no greater than 25
flame spread, 15 smoke developed and 20 fuel contributed.
D. Silencers shall not leak air or fail structurally when subjected to differential pressure of 8"
w.g. inside to outside of casing.
1. Acoustic testing shall meet ASTM E-477 standard method of testing duct liner
materials and manufactured silencers for acoustical and airflow performance.
2. Tests shall be run both with and without air flowing through silencer, and at not
less than three different flow rates.
3. Ratings shall be based on test data from nationally known, qualified independent

laboratory.
4. Test methods shall eliminate effects due to end reflection, vibration, flanking
transmission, and standing waves in reverberant room.
5. Air flow and pressure loss measurements shall be made in accordance with
applicable portions of ASME, AMCS, and ADC airflow tests.
E. Air flow shall be in same direction as attenuation for tests on dynamic insertion loss.
Sound power levels shall be measured at downstream end of silencer. Dynamic insertion
loss in dB shall not be less than that scheduled at scheduled face velocity.
F. Silencers shall not produce self-noise levels that would create sufficient noise to cause the
occupied space noise to be above its target noise level.
G. Installation of Duct Silencers:
6. Silencer manufacturer's basic installation instructions shall not be compromised.
Duct silencer supplier or qualified representative shall be responsible for providing
such supervision as may be required to ensure correct and complete installation of
duct silencers.
7. Silencers shall be resiliently isolated from building construction at points of
penetration of building structure with 1/2" - 3/4" minimum of 3 lb/cf density fibrous
glass. Seal penetration airtight with non-hardening caulk.
8. Multiple silencer units grouped together in parallel within duct system shall be
sealed airtight with sealant by Ductmate, United Sheet Metal, 3M or Hardcast.
See "Ductwork" paragraph for other sealant requirements.
2.5 SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
A. Provide diffusers as manufactured by Titus, Metalaire or approved equal as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
1. Diffuser types shall be Titus TMSA border Type 1 (surface mount) and plaster
mounting frame (lay-in), ceiling module size 24 inch x 24 inch. Use with Model
AG-125 double blade damper – as scheduled. Provide Model TRV throw
reduction vanes where indicated on drawings.
B. All square and rectangular supply air diffusers shall be of steel construction with removable
cores and double blade air deflecting dampers full size of the neck size shown. All
diffusers neck shall be as shown or as required to obtain the air diffusion pattern with
portions of the neck blanked off to give the proper air distribution pattern and to limit the
maximum neck velocity to 500 fpm. Provide with throw reduction vanes where indicated.
C. Gypsum board ceilings: Provide "Surface mount" design diffusers with Type 1 Border.
Install in plaster mounting frame.
D. Modular type acoustical tile ceilings: Provide "Lay-in" design diffusers with Type 3 Border.
Use with module size steel pan with diffuser spot welded to the back surface of the pan.
E. All flanges, frames, blades and diffusers exposed to view shall be painted factory standard
white. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black.
2.6 RETURN REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Provide Titus, Metalaire or approved equal registers and grilles as shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
B. All return registers shall be of aluminum construction Titus 50F with Model AG35 opposed
blade key operated damper as scheduled.
C. All exhaust registers in ceilings other than Toilet Room exhaust shall be of aluminum

construction Titus 50F with Model AG35 opposed blade key operated damper as
scheduled.
D. All registers and grilles to be mounted in gypsum board ceilings shall have plaster frames
equal to Titus Model PF mounting frame. All register or grilles mounted in acoustical tile
ceilings shall have Border Type 3 for lay-in.
E. All return grilles shall be equal to return air registers without dampers Model 23RL.
F. All flanges, frames, blades and diffusers exposed to view shall be painted factory standard
white. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black.
2.7 FANS - ROOF EXHAUST (CENTRIFUGAL)
A. Provide dome, low silhouette, V-belt variable-pitch belt-drive fans that are certified to bear
the AMCA seal, with:
1. 12" high aluminum prefabricated roof curb with (thermal/acoustical lining with 10%
sound reduction) (lining with at least 30% sound reduction).
2. Gravity backdraft dampers.
3. Bird screen.
4. Spun aluminum housing.
5. Disconnect switch.
6. Inlet venturi orifice.
7. Vibration isolation.
8. Permanently-lubricated ball bearings.
9. Enclosed, fan-cooled motor.
10. Junction box.
B. Belt drives shall have +5% speed variation and spring-loaded belt tensioner. Direct drives
shall have speed controller in junction boxes.
C. Fans shall be by Greenheck, Cook, ACME, ILG or Peerless.
2.8 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Provide horizontal and vertical U.L. labeled fire dampers as manufactured by Ruskin, Air
Balance or Prefco, equal to Ruskin Type IBD2, Style B, C, CR or CO. Assembly shall be
of the fully enclosed type with duct collars and fire dampers that consists of formed steel
blades with 100 percent interlocking joints to form a continuous steel curtain when closed.
Assembly shall be suitable for horizontal and vertical air flow as required. Damper shall
meet NFPA 90A requirements. Fire dampers are indicated on the Drawings by the symbol
"FD".
B. Provide 16 gage galvanized steel duct wall or floor sleeves for dampers in ducts with
maximum height dimension 24 inches and maximum width dimension of 36 inches and 14
gage sleeves for larger ducts. Depth of the wall or floor sleeve shall be sufficient to install
perimeter angles attached to the sleeve on both sides of the wall or floor openings as
required by UL-555. Fire dampers shall be installed in sleeves or in housings of 16 gage
or 14 gage as applicable. Sleeves and housings shall be constructed and installed in
accordance with SMACNA "Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for
HVAC Systems", Case 2 or Case 3 of Figure 5 and Case 2 or Case 3 of Figure 6.
Connection of duct to the fire damper enclosure or housing shall be rigid and sealed air
tight.

C. Fire dampers shall be designed and constructed so that the blade stack in the open
damper position is completely outside of the air stream.
D. Where duct pass through fire walls or partitions, the spaces around the duct sleeves shall
have the necessary clearance for expansion in conformance with the UL approval.
Installation shall conform to all U.L.-555 requirements.
E. Provide access panels in duct and the ceiling or wall as applicable for each fire damper
location.
F. Rating of damper shall be in accordance with the wall or floor rating it is installed in.
2.9 DX ROOFTOP UNIT
A. Provide Trane, Carrier or York rooftop air conditioning system of the size and capacity as
shown on the Drawings. The system shall include the preassembled components as
specified herein and shall be factory tested and shipped in one piece with a single point
electric power connection. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop
application and include a weather proof cabinet. Unit shall have direct expansion cooling
coils. The unit shall have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and to aid unit service.
Nameplates shall be fixed to the unit. Installation and maintenance bulletin shall be
supplied with each unit. Fan and coil performance shall be ARI Certified.
B. Exterior surfaces shall be phosphatized and coated with baked on dark gray enamel
accepted by UL for protection of listed outdoor equipment. Hinged access doors with lever
latching mechanisms shall provide access to each cabinet section from both sides.
C. Coil sections shall incorporate multiple coils. The condensate drain pan shall extend
beyond the leaving air side of the cooling coil and extend underneath the coil connections.
The drain pan shall be thermally isolated from the unit casing with 1 inch insulation and be
mastic coated. A threaded drain connections shall extend through the unit base.
D. The supply air fan shall be a centrifugal air blower of the size shown on the drawings. The
motor shall be mounted to permit ease of motor changeover and belt tension adjustment.
E. The filter section shall be supplied complete with galvanized steel filter racks as an integral
part of the unit. Filters shall be accessible from both sides of the unit. The filter section
shall be provided with panel filters. Panel filters shall be 35 percent efficient pleated type
mounted in a galvanized steel filter frame.
F. Unit shall have 100% economizer with enthalpy control.
G. Each unit shall be wired and tested at the factory before shipment. Wiring shall comply
with NEC requirements and shall conform with all applicable UL standards. All wiring shall
be number coded to conform to the manufacturers electrical wiring diagrams. All electrical
components shall be labeled according to the electrical diagram and be UL recognized
where applicable.
H. Provide a roof curb. The roof curb shall be made in accordance with National Roofing
Contractors Association requirements.
2.10 ELECTRICAL WALL HEATERS
A. Provide electric wall heaters of the capacities scheduled. Heaters shall be Qmark or equal
as manufactured by Berko or Emerson.
B. Recessed cabinets shall have a one-piece (16 gauge), tamper proof, fully louvered steel
front panel. Flanges of enclosures at all four sides shall serve as plater stops. The front
shall be sealed against the flanges with a sponge rubber gasket to prevent any air leakage.
Front panels shall be held in place by Allen-head screws.
C. Electric heating coils shall be finned tube construction with resistance elements inserted in
tubes. Units shall be factory wired with unit mounted fan delay switch, magnetic

contactors, high temperature cutout safety control integral thermostat and fan override
thermostat. The fan delay switch shall prevent discharge of cold air, by delaying start-up of
the fan motor unit heating elements have warmed up. This same fan delay switch shall
maintain motor operation after heating elements have been de-energized to dissipate any
residual heat.
D. Fan shall be the propeller type. Fan shall be corrosion resistant aluminum. Provide baked
enamel finish in colors selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
E. Units shall be furnished complete with integral thermostat, (built-in) disconnect and factory
wired for automatic operation.
2.11 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS
A. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Environmental Technologies or
Metalaire.
B. Casing — Rolled and seam welded 18-gauge galvanized steel. Discharge end is roll
crimped to fit standard round ductwork.
C. Damper — 22 gauge, galvanized steel damper blade seats against a single rolled bead in
the casing with a factory provided integral 24 VAC electric actuator.
D. Drive Train — Gear driven drive train. Drive time is 57 seconds. Microswitches stop the
drive motor at full open and full closed positions.
E. Direct Digital Controls: VAV Unit Control Module — The microprocessor-based terminal
unit controller provides pressure dependent flow control. The controller monitors zone
temperature set points, zone temperature, zone temperature rate of change and the actual
valve position. Airflow is controlled through direct digital control to maintain the zone
temperature setpoint.
2.12 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING
A. Provide motors and controls.
B. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be NEMA Design B, constant speed,
self-ventilated squirrel cage induction. Motors shall have 1.15 service factor unless totally
enclosed. Motors shall have Class B insulation.
1. Motors under 1/2 HP, shall be designed for 120 V, 60 Hz, single phase, unless
otherwise specified.
2. Motors 1/2 HP and over shall be as required in schedules.
C. All motors shall be premium efficiency type. They shall conform to NEMA Standard
MG-1-12.53a and shall have their efficiencies determined in accordance with IEEE
Standard 112 Method B. The NEMA nominal efficiency shall be listed on the motor
nameplate. Minimum nominal efficiencies shall be according to the tables below:
TABLE I
PERFORMANCE DATA for ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS
DRIP-PROOF TYPE
Minimum Efficiency at Full Load
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
Eff. Eff. Eff.

TABLE I
DRIP-PROOF TYPE
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
Eff. Eff. Eff.
1 82.5 85.5 80.0
1.5 86.5 86.5 85.5
2 87.5 86.5 86.5
3 89.5 89.5 86.5
5 89.5 89.5 89.5
7.5 91.7 91.0 89.5
10 91.7 91.7 90.2
TABLE II
TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN COOLED TYPE
(percent)
HP 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
Eff. Eff. Eff.
1 82.5 85.5 78.5
1.5 87.5 86.5 85.5
2 88.5 86.5 86.5
3 89.5 89.5 88.5
5 89.5 89.5 89.5
7.5 91.7 91.7 91.0
10 91.7 91.7 91.7
1.1
2.13 DRIVES
A. Drives for belted motors shall be flame retardant and by Allis-Chalmers, Browning or

Woods V-belt drives with adjustable motor sheave. Drives shall be as short as practical
and shall have number of belts necessary to transmit required horsepower without undue
slip or strain.
B. Sheaves shall be balanced statically and dynamically.
C. Hazardous exhaust drives shall be 2 groove (2 belt) minimum.
2.14 INSULATION
A. Ductwork insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Manville, Certainteed,
Knauf or approved equal.
B. Ductwork insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket and adhesive) fire and smoke
hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL-723, not exceeding a
flame spread of twenty five (25), fuel contribution of fifty (50) and smoke developed of fifty
(50).
C. Duct Thermal Insulation:
1. Insulation shall have a minimum density of one (1) pound per cubic foot.
2. Insulation and Vapor Seal Tape Adhesive: Foster No. 81-13 or Minnesota Mining
EC-1329 or approved equal.
3. Vapor seal tape: same material vapor seal.
D. Duct Sound Insulation:
1. Lining in ducts shall be one inch thick, similar and equal to Owens-Corning
Fiberglas "Aeroflex" Type 200 Duct Liner.
2. Adhesive shall be Benjamin Foster 85-15, or equal adhesive complying with ASTM
C916.
2.15 VIBRATION ELIMINATORS
A. Furnish and install Mason Industries, Korfund, Peabody Kinetics, Vibration Eliminator
Company, or Vibration Mounting Company vibration eliminators. Vibration isolators shall
be selected to produce uniform deflection and loading even though the equipment weight
is not evenly distributed. Vibration isolators shall be selected for the lowest operating
speed of the equipment suspended on them. The isolators shall be single rubber-in-shear
for static deflections of up to 1/4 inch; double rubber-in-shear for static deflections from
5/16 inch to ½ inch; and spring type for static deflection above ½ inch. Spring isolators
shall be free standing laterally stable type without a housing and shall have steel top plate
and base plate welded to the spring and combined with two (2) layers of ribbed rubber
separated by 16 gauge galvanized sheet glued to the base plate. The spring diameter
shall not be less than the allowable compressed spring height. Springs with deflections of
2 inches or greater shall have neoprene limit stops.
B. Suspended fans, fan units and fan sections of air conditioning units shall have structural
steel rails fastened to the lower edge or upper edge as shown on the units or fans and the
vibration isolators shall be installed in the hanger rods. This type of isolator shall be
combination rubber-in-shear and springs with 1/4 inch static deflection in the rubber and
3/4 inch static deflection in the springs.
2.16 BCS - ELECTRIC/ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Provide complete electric/electronic temperature control system furnished by the
local office of Johnson Controls, Inc., Lynnfield, MA. Siemens, Portland ME.
Honeywell Controls Co., Manchester, NH. or Invensys, Manchester, NH.

B. Scope:
1. Control system shall consist of thermostats, humidistats, temperature transmitters,
controllers, automatic valves and dampers, damper operators, control panels,
electrical wiring and other components required to fill intent of Specifications and
provide for complete and operable system. Control equipment shall be fully
proportioning, except as noted otherwise. Sequence of operation shall be as
indicated on Drawings.
2. In general this Specification morning warm-up is intended to cover following:
occupied-unoccupied control, summer/winter changeover controls, central station
air handling unit controls, hot water controls, interlocking of fans, pumps and
equipment, including H-O-A switch sequences.
C. Local Control Panels:
1. Controllers, relays, switches, etc. shall be mounted on enclosed control panels
with hinge lock type door mounted adjacent to system controlled. Temperature
settings, adjustments and calibrations shall be made at system control panel.
Panel shall have canopy light and on-off switch.
2. Provide remote transmission thermometers on local panels. Temperature
indications shall be provided for each point of temperature measurement for
control and, additionally, for those points outlined in this Section or shown on
Drawings.
3. Details of each panel shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
Locations of each panel shall be convenient for adjustment and service. Provide
engraved nameplates beneath each panel mounted control device. Manual
switches, dial thermometers and indicating gauges shall be flush mounted on
hinged door.
4. Electrical devices within panels shall be factory pre-wired to numbered terminal
strip. Wiring within panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL standards.
5. Following items shall be mounted on control panels: water supply and return
temperature indicators, 7 day time clock, selector switches, occupied/ unoccupied
switch and humidity indicators.
D. Miscellaneous Devices:
1. Provide relays, positioners, electric switches, clocks, transformers, etc. necessary
to make complete and operable system. Locate these devices on local panel
unless specified otherwise. Time clocks shall be seven day program type with ten
hour spring reserve and manual override.
E. Thermometers:
1. Thermometers shall be flush mounted on local panels. These thermometers shall
be electronic transmission type with dials with minimum 3-1/2" diameter. Accuracy
shall be +2% of full scale values. Linear scale shall be -40 F to 150 F. Indication
meter shall be suitable for use with 1000 ohm temperature sensors.
2. Thermometers shall be provided for following locations for each system:
a. Outside air temperature
b. Entering each coil
c. After each coil
d. Return air

e. Mixed air
F. Optimal Logic Network:
1. Provide optimal start logic network programmer to start air handling equipment to
properly condition spaces prior to occupancy. Optimal time to start primary
equipment shall be determined by external conditions, building construction and
conditioning equipment. Factors to be considered in determining warm-up period
for air handling systems shall be type of building construction, U factor and outside
air temperature.
2. Programmer shall work in conjunction with occupied-unoccupied programming
schedules and be equipped with precision 24 hour synchronous clock systems.
G. Input Devices:
1. The system shall maintain the specified analog end-to-end accuracy throughout
the warranty period from sensor to controller readout.
2. Transducers may be supplied as an integral unit with the field sensor, or mounted
separately in a field interface panel, or as part of the controller. All transducers
shall be calibrated in the field for mounting and connected to the final terminations.
3. Sensors and transducers shall be appropriately packaged for the location.
a. Architectural housing for space mounting
b. Weatherproof/sunshield housing for outdoors
c. Thermal well housing for water applications
d. Protective housing for duct mounting
4. The sensor/transducer shall be selected to withstand ambient conditions where:
a. Moisture or condensation is a factor
b. Vibration exists from ductwork, equipment, etc.
c. Reasonably expected transient conditions exist for temperatures,
pressures, humidities, etc. outside the normal sensing range
5. The sensor/transducer shall be appropriately selected to most closely match the
expected sensing range. If, upon start-up and balancing, a sensor/transducer is
operating below 20% or above 80% of its range, the sensor/transducer shall be
replaced at no additional cost with a unit of an appropriate range such that the
measured value is between 30% and 70% of the range.
6. System accuracy of sensed conditions shall be as follows:
+/- 0.5 F for space temperature in the 0 - 130 F range
+/- 0.5 F for duct temperatures in the 40 to 130F range
+/- 1.0 F for outside air temperatures in the -30 to 230 F range
+/- 1.0 F for water temperatures in the 30 to 230 F range
+/- 1% of reading for KWH and KW monitoring
+/- 2% RH for relative humidity in the 10 to 90% range
+/- 0.1 inches for static pressure over 0-5 inch water gauge
+/- 0.05 inch for filter status differential over a 0- 2 inch range

+/- 1% of reading for pressure switches and sensors
+/- 1% of reading for air flow
+/- 3% of reading for water flow
+/- 1% of reading for differential water pressure
+/- 1% of span for level
7. Sensors in the return or discharge duct shall be of the single point type. Sensors
in the mixed air shall be of the averaging type.
8. Thermowells shall be brass or steel for non- corrosive fluids below 250 deg.F and
300 series stainless steel for all other applications.
9. All digital inputs shall be provided by dry contacts. The contacts shall be wired
normally open or normally closed as required.
10. Temperature sensors shall be by the use of thermistors or Resistance
Temperature Detectors (RTD).
11. Motor status shall be monitored by current sensing switches.
12. Fluid flow status shall be by differential pressure sensors.
13. Utility metered or sub-metered KWH or KW shall be sensed by a pulse producing
transducer.
14. Provide differential pressure sensors and transmitters as follows:
a. Differential pressure sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure
with an accuracy 1% of full scale, including non-linearity, hysteresis, and
repeatability. Sensors shall have transmitters with outputs compatible with
system. Sensors shall be industrial grade.
(1) Duct mounted airflow differential pressure sensors used for
measuring supply duct static pressure for VAV applications, shall
have a range of 0.0" to +5.0" WC. Sensors for measuring building
static pressure shall have a range of -0.3" to +0.3" WG.
(2) Steam and water pressure sensors shall be diaphragm type with
stainless steel diaphragm with range as appropriate for each
system.
(3) Water pressure switches shall be Bourdon tube type, 316 SS.
15. Room sensors shall be as follows:
a. Sensing element only. (Public Areas)
b. Sensing element, setpoint adjustment, override switch. (Open Offices)
c. Sensing element, setpoint adjustment, override switch and LCD display.
(Closed Offices)
d. Thermostats in public and multi-occupancy areas shall have metal cover
with tamper proof screws and satin chrome finish, with concealed
adjustment, without thermometer.
e. Thermostats for private offices and single occupancy areas shall have
open adjustment for use with key, exposed dial and accurate red-reading
thermometer.
f. Transmitters shall have closed adjustment.

g. Room thermostats shall be of heavy duty, all-metal.
h. Heating/cooling thermostats shall be deadband.
i. Modulating room transmitters shall be tamper proof. Transmitters shall
have concealed adjustable setpoints. Thermostat shall be solid state with
nominal 1000 ohm linear nickel wire sensing element. Element shall have
positive temperature coefficient. Temperature limits shall be 0 to 125° F
with operating range of 55 to 85° F. Accuracy shall be ∀1%.
j. Two position room thermostats shall be tamper proof without
thermometers. Thermostat shall have concealed adjustable setpoints.
Sensing elements shall be liquid charged.
k. Thermostats in public and multi-occupancy areas shall be tamper proof
screws and satin chrome finish, with concealed adjustment without
thermometer.
l. Thermostats for private offices and single occupancy type areas shall
have open adjustment for use with key, exposed dial and accurate red-
reading thermometer.
m. Room thermostats shall be of heavy duty, all metal.
n. Heating/cooling thermostats shall be deadband.
o. Refer to drawing and/or points list for sensor type and location.
16. Current to pneumatic (I/P) transducers shall have an accuracy of 1% (including
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability), over their ranges.
17. Air flow status shall be sensed by static differential pressure sensor or switch
piped across all fans (low-port to fan suction, high-port to fan discharge). Where
status indication is required across VAV or 2 speed fan, provide analog static
differential pressure sensor for accurate status indication at minimum speed or
VAV discharge.
18. Common alarms shall be wired relay coils in parallel with common alarm pilot light.
Contacts shall input to BCS.
19. Wire contacts normally open (NO). When in an alarm condition the contact shall
open and the BCS shall sense alarm condition.
20. Air flow transducers for volume control terminals shall have the ability to control air
flow with a velocity pressure signal of 0.02" WC or less with an accuracy of +10%
of reading.
H. Output Devices
1. The use of multiplexers will not be accepted.
2. All digital outputs shall be electrically isolated from the digital controller by interface
relays.
3. Field relays shall have a minimum life of 1 million cycles without failure.
4. Electric to pneumatic transducers (E/P) shall operate from an analog signal. E/P
transducers shall be rated for 0 -20 PSIG operation and accurate to 1% of full
scale. E/P transducers shall have a maximum air consumption of 100 SCIM.
5. Electric solenoid operated pneumatic valves (EP's) shall have a three port
operation: common, normally open and normally closed. They shall be rated for
50 psig when used for 25 psig or less applications, or rated for 150 psig when
used for 100 psig or less applications. The coils shall be equipped with transient

suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of the rated coil voltage.
I. Actuators:
1. General Application of Actuators:
a. Actuators for valves and dampers 2 ½" and larger, greater than 8 ft² may
be pneumatic.
b. Actuators for valves and dampers servicing terminal equipment (i.e.
reheat coil valves, fan coil unit valves, variable air volume boxes, etc.) May
be electric or pneumatic.
c. Actuators for valves servicing the fuel oil system and valves located
outdoors shall be electric.
2. Damper actuator mounting shall be outside of the air stream. The actuators shall
have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The linkage arrangement shall
permit normally open or normally closed positions as indicated on the drawings.
3. Modulating damper and control valve actuators and actuators operating valves or
dampers which must be sequenced with other valves or dampers shall be
equipped with pilot positioners to provide feedback, repeatability and rapid
response.
4. When fail-safe positioning is required, actuators shall have spring return.
5. Provide actuator auxiliary (end) switches or slaved potentiometers as required.
6. Pneumatic damper and control valve actuators shall be fully proportioning with
molded rubber diaphragms unless specified otherwise. Pneumatic actuators shall
have full metal bodies and utilize replaceable diaphragms.
7. Provide one pneumatic gauge on the control air line to each pneumatic actuator.
8. Provide two adjustable restrictors on each pneumatic damper actuator to adjust
the speed of opening and closing.
9. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two position action.
a. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely
oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-
spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or
adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback
potentiometer.
J. Control Valves:
1. Control valves shall be rated for 150 percent of system operating pressure at the
valve location, but not less than 125 psig.
2. Close off rating shall be no less than 150 percent of system pressure at the valve
location.
3. Valves shall be as specified in Section 15600 and as scheduled on the drawings.
K. Control Dampers:
1. Provide control dampers where indicated on the drawings.
2. Bearings shall be molded synthetic or bronze oilite.
3. Linkage shall be concealed in the frame.

4. Dampers shall be opposed blade in all locations except mixing plenums, where
parallel blades shall be positioned to direct air streams into each other, thus
facilitating mixing.
5. Furnish single or multiple blade automatic and smoke (UL555S) rated dampers for
installation under ductwork paragraph as required.
6. Provide one linkage connection point per eight square feet of section area, equally
spaced. Sections shall not exceed 48" x 48". Provide shaft linkage (1/2" minimum
bar with crankdown arms attached to blades) on dampers 12 feet or wider.
Dampers 12 feet or wider and more than four feet high shall have one line shaft for
each four feet of height, or any increment thereof; where size of damper required
more than one line shaft, spacing shall be equal.
7. Smoke dampers shall be UL555S approved, Leakage Class I, 250°F.
8. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized sheet metal with flanges for duct-
mounting.
9. Damper blades shall not exceed 6" in width. Blades shall be suitable for duct
velocity performance.
10. Damper bearings shall be nylon. Bushings that turn in bearings shall be oil-
impregnated, sintered metal.
11. Assembled multiple damper sections shall incorporate mullion supports to prevent
failure of sectional assembly.
12. Provide replaceable butyl rubber seals, along top, bottom and sides of frame and
along each blade edge. Seals shall provide tight closing and low leakage. 48" x
48" damper section shall have leakage less than 8 cfm/sf at 4" WG differential
pressure. Submit leakage and flow characteristic charts for approval. Dampers
shall be Honeywell, Inc. #D643 Series, Johnson Controls, Inc., #D-1330 Series,
Ruskin SD-50 or Vent Products 5900.
L. Smoke Detection and Dampers:
1. Install duct smoke detectors furnished under Division 16 where shown on
Drawings. Wire to fan shutdown. Wiring to fire alarm system shall be part of work
of Division 16.
2. Provide normally-closed smoke dampers in return and supply air ducts where
shown to close automatically upon fan shutdown due to fire or smoke detection or
upon manual shutdown.
3. Smoke dampers shall be controlled so that fans shall not start until dampers are
open and fans shall stop before smoke dampers are fully closed. End switches,
damper switches, and other components required shall be by the BCS Contractor.
M. Freezestat:
1. Provide low temperature thermostats as shown on drawings. Thermostat shall
register alarm condition and shut down fan when temperature along any one foot
of element length falls below setpoint. Do not provide averaging element. Provide
one foot of element for every square foot of AHU coil face area. Wire to shut
down fan as specified in control sequences.
N. Flow Instruments:
1. All flow sensors shall conform to the following minimum standards.
a. Sensor shall be accurate to a total of 3% over operating range. (1% of
reading)

b. Sensor shall be sized for 110% of maximum flow and shall not exceed
manufacturer's flow rating.
c. Sensors, associated circuitry, and readout shall have a minimum
rangeability of 10:1 over assigned flow range.
d. Sensor and transmitter shall operate over a temperature range of 32 F to
210 F.
e. Maximum pressure drop across sensor shall be equivalent to 10 feet
same size pipe (inlet or outlet pipe size).
f. Sensor shall be factory calibrated for the specific application according to
the range, fluid density, and specific gravity.
O. Filter Differential Pressure Indicators:
1. Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, adjustable flag, vent valves,
black figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
2. Manometer-Type Filter Gauge: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale,
logarithmic-curve tube gauge with integral level gauge, graduated to read from 0 to
3 inches wg (750 Pa), accurate within 3% of full-scale range.
3. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gauge connections, and mounting
bracket.
4. Integral indicator/transmitters shall conform to the requirements of this paragraph
and paragraph 2.1 of this section.
P. Wiring and Conduit
1. All wire shall be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed
below:
Wire Class Minimum Wire Size Insulation Class
Power Wiring 12 Gauge 600 Volt
Digital I/O Wiring 14 Gauge 600 Volt
Analog Input Wiring 18 Gauge 300 Volt
Analog Output Wiring 18 Gauge 300 Volt

2. Power and Digital I/O wiring may be run in the same conduit. Analog Input and
Analog Output wiring may be run in the same conduit provided they are shielded.
3. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain
clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.
4. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, conduit shall be as specified in
Division 16.
5. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be as specified in Division 16.
6. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and
transitions from rigid to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be
galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and
damp location J-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and
gasketed covers.
7. Exposed wiring shall not be allowed.
8. Install in accordance with requirements of National Electrical Code.

Q. Enclosures:
1. All controllers and field interface panels shall be mounted in enclosures suitable
for the ambient environment.
2. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating.
3. The tubing and wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring
within controllers shall be wrapped and secured.
4. All tubing shall be connected to enclosures through conduit. Use bulkhead fittings
where appropriate.
5. Control and interface panel assemblies shall be constructed by a UL approved
industrial control panel shop and bear a UL approval label on the exterior of each
panel.
R. Sequences of Operation:
1. Refer to control drawings for required sequences other than those listed below.
2.17 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, wired and connected under Division 16. HVAC
contractor shall furnish the necessary duct openings and installation of the duct smoke
detectors. Smoke detectors will be self-contained and shall shut down respective fan and
provide local alarm upon smoke detection.
B. All air supply systems of 2000 CFM or greater capacity require smoke detectors located
down stream of filters and ahead of any branch connection.
C. Coordinate with the Tenant Criteria for specific Landlords requirements and local code
requirements.
2.18 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
A. HVAC Contractor shall provide supplemental supporting steel framing as required for
hanging HVAC components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate HVAC work with all work of other trades and with all related and
adjacent work. In cases of conflict, piping requiring slope has right-of-way.
Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching.
2. All work at roof shall be coordinated with roofing contractor to protect/maintain any
warrantees in place.
3. Minimize cutting and patching. Cooperation with Utilities and Landlord is
mandatory.
B. Hangers:
1. Attach hangers directly to building structure. Provide all miscellaneous metal
framing as needed to by-pass obstructions such as duct work and equipment.
Space hangers not over 6 feet on center.
2. Coordinate exact location of equipment with existing conditions and structural
components. Provide all additional steel support, angle iron, welding, etc.
necessary for a stable and substantial installation.

3. Where materials and equipment are to be hung from the overhead structure such
mounting shall be approved in writing by the structural engineer.
4. All hanger rods shall be hung from inserts in concrete or from I-beam clamps on
steel beams. Clamps shall have retaining clips and locknut. If inserts have not
been provided, hangers shall be through bolted or cinch or slug-in expansion bolts
may be used with the permission of the Landlord. Where support points are
required between available inserts or to avoid the work of existing ductwork piping
and equipment, provide a system of spanning channels and angles. No part of
any equipment or any part of the building shall be stressed.
5. Hangers and supporting steel shall be hung from the top chord of joist system.
C. Drawings are often diagrammatic. Locate work to accommodate field conditions and
where approved by Owner before installation.
D. Provide all hardware, connections, and anchors needed. Attach wall mounted work with
not less than 3/8-inch diameter expansion bolts. Attach floor and overhead mounted work
with minimum ½-inch diameter expansion bolts. Do not use wooden plugs.
E. Provide temporary caps and seals for piping and ductwork and cover equipment to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and obstructions. Protect all work from damage.
F. Cutting and Patching: Provide all cutting and patching required for work. No structural
members may be cut without prior approval.
3.2 INSULATION
A. Thermal Insulation for ductwork:
1. Supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated on outside with 1-1/2 inch thick
fiberglass insulation with vapor barriers. First 15'- 0" of supply and return air
ductwork shall be lined with 1-1/2 inch fiberglass insulation. Increase duct size 1-
inch all around where lined.
2. Insulation shall be adhered to duct. Adhesive shall be applied in 6-inch wide strips
12 inches on center. Butt all edges of all insulation and seal all joints of vapor seal
insulation with tape of same material as vapor seal applied with adhesive specified
to provide a continuous vapor seal. On the bottom of ducts 24 inches and wider,
stick clips shall be installed 10 to 14 inches on centers. Seal all holes for stick
clips with tape and adhesive as specified to provide a continuous vapor seal.
B. Sound Insulation for ductwork:
1. Lining in ducts shall be one inch thick. Insulation shall be adhered to all interior
surfaces of duct with approved adhesive.
2. In addition, top and bottom sections and sides shall have pin type Stic-Klips
located not more than 16 inch on center in the duct length and not more than 6
inches on center in the duct width and height. Pins shall be sheared off close to
washer after assembly.
3. Seal all joints, seams and edges with glass tape and adhesive.
3.3 TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Fully test HVAC work in presence of authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner. Comply
with requirements of local building Inspectors.
B. Engage an independent, certified air balancing contractor.
1. Perform the air balancing, including testing and adjustment of each diffuser and
register. Submit complete balancing report for approval.

2. Report test results in format acceptable to Owner and certify that tests have been
made and is approved by local authorities. All air quantities shall be balanced to
within ±5% of design values.
3. Correct all deficiencies resulting from testing and balancing at no additional cost to
Owner.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean out all duct systems. Thoroughly clean and polish all equipment and visible HVAC
work.
3.5 BCS PROCEDURES
A. Provide qualified personnel, equipment, apparatus and services for start-up, testing and
balancing of mechanical systems, to performance data shown in schedules, as specified,
and as required by codes, standards, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction
including City, Town or County Inspectors, Owners and Architect. Note that some BCS
start-up procedures require the cooperation of the balancing contractor, the equipment
manufacturer's representative and the BCS contractor. Ensure that all contractors are
present on site during the entire time that these procedures take place. Note that some
procedures listed below have a distinct order of precedence, e.g., the testing of the
temperature control system shall not occur until major pieces of mechanical equipment
have been started up and testing is complete. Ensure that any listed orders of precedence
for procedures are followed.
B. Startup, testing and balancing shall not diminish guarantee requirements.
C. Notify the Owner’s Representative at least two weeks before startup testing and balancing
begins.
D. Before control testing begins a meeting shall be held between the Owner’s Representative,
the balancing contractor, the BCS contractor, the mechanical and general contractor. The
mechanical contractor shall present the Owner’s Representative with the completed
checklists certifying that equipment startup and testing has been completed. The BCS
contractor shall then present his procedures for testing the BAS system to the Owner’s
Representative for review and approval. Allow one full day for this meeting.
E. When the control testing has been completed a second meeting will be held between the
parties mentioned above. At this time the BCS contractor shall present to the Owner’s
Representative the completed controls startup checklist. The balancing contractor shall
present to the Owner’s Representative certificates of calibration for balancing instruments,
proposed balancing forms and proposed balancing procedures for review and approval.
Allow one full day for this meeting.
F. It shall be the responsibility of the general contractor to set up these meetings. If, through
no fault of the Owner’s Representative, the above two meetings do not take place and the
BCS and balancing proceeds, the contractor shall be fully responsible to solve any ensuing
performance problems.
G. Do not cover or conceal work before testing and inspection has been approved by the
Owner’s Representative.
H. Instruments for testing shall have been calibrated in the installed position within one month
prior to testing. Calibration shall be traceable to NIST Standards. Provide certificate of
calibration to the Owner’s Representative at meeting demonstrating procedures mentioned
above.
I. Leaks, damage and defects discovered during or resulting from startup, testing and
balancing shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials.
Tests shall be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs.

J. Report on reporting forms, submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval in
advance.
K. Submit six copies of testing reports to the Owner’s Representative for approval.
L. Install equipment and instruments required for testing, thermo-wells and gauge
connections at no additional cost to the Owner.
M. Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present at all tests.
N. Startup and testing procedures outlined below are the minimum effort required for the
project. Contractor shall use any additional procedures he feels will be necessary to
properly startup and test the job.
3.6 EQUIPMENT STARTUP
A. Start up the following pieces of equipment in strict accordance with manufacturers
instructions and with manufacturers representative present:
1. Air handlers
2. Fans
B. Complete the following checklist to certify to the Owner’s Representative that startup of the
above pieces of equipment has successfully been accomplished. Copy multiple checklists
as required.
EQUIPMENT STARTUP CHECKLIST
EQUIPMENT DATE MANUFACTURERS GENERAL CONTRACTOR

REPRESENTATIVE
LIST CONFIRMED REPRESENTATIVE NAME
NAME AND SIGNATURE
AND SIGNATURE
FANS
(LIST NOS. BELOW)
ROOFTOP UNITS
(LIST NOS. BELOW)
3.7 BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEM

A. Control System Testing General Requirements:
1. Test Control System after all major pieces of equipment have been started up and
after all tests have been completed. Note portions of BCS test procedures below,
which require cooperation of balancing contractor. Ensure that balancing
contractor is present during entire time when these test procedures take place.
2. Where it is said below to confirm or ensure the operation of a particular piece of
control equipment, this means to confirm that operation is as called for in the
Control Sequence of Operation which are shown on the drawings or listed in the
specifications. If operation is not as called for by sequences, make any necessary

corrective actions so that controls perform as required on Contract Documents.
On completion of testing, fill out, sign and return to the Owner’s Representative,
the checklist included in this Specification.
3. Perform any additional checkout test required by manufacturer for proper system
operation whether or not listed below. If any checkout test below conflicts with a
particular manufacturer's recommendation bring matter to the attention of the
Owner’s Representative immediately.
4. Where it is stated below to verify pneumatic output to a valve, verification shall be
done by meters or gauges at the transducer controlling valve and by visual
confirmation that the valve travels in the proper direction. Where it is said to
visually confirm damper position it means go to location in the field, open access
door and note position of damper blades. If access door does not exist, notify the
Owner’s Representative and General Contractor immediately. EXCEPTION: Do
not open air handler casing when fans are on. Note position of AHU dampers,
located within AHU casing, by observing operator position. Readings of output at
workstations, laptop computer or position verification by means of feedback
potentiometer may be made in addition to but not instead of above measures.
5. Where reference is made below to confirming or ensuring operation of a particular
item, it shall mean all items of that type, not a representative sample.
6. Where it is said below to simulate the operation of a particular cycle for the BCS,
actual control signal inputs at the time of the test shall be temporarily overridden
and test values substituted. For example to simulate an economizer switchover
temperature of 70 F outside temperature with the actual outdoor air input is 45 F,
temporarily substitute 70 F for 45 F, perform the test then switch back to the actual
input when the simulation is complete.
B. Control Start Up Tests
1. With the air handlers supply fan turned off and locked out/tagged out at the
disconnect, perform the following tests: (Contractor shall ENSURE that electric
power to air handler is OFF).
a. Visually inspect all fans interlocked with the supply fan to ensure that they
are off.
b. Visually inspect all control dampers and ensure that they are in positions
that the control sequences call for them to be when the fan is off.
Particularly ensure that the outdoor air damper is fully closed.
c. Note outputs to all control valves, and ensure that the valves are in
position that the control sequence require them to be when the fan is off.
2. Ensure that all personnel and tools are out of air handler casing, ensure that
casing is closed and locked; put any disconnect other than that locked out to the
on position. Then have fan started at the locked out disconnect and perform the
following procedures:
a. For units which are not supposed to start until smoke or outdoor air
dampers are proven fully open via limit switches visually observe the
damper operators and limit switches when the signal is given to start the
fan and ensure that the fan does not start until contact with the limit switch
is made.
b. Ensure that fans interlocked to air handler supply fan run after AHU fan
starts. Visually observe each fan.
c. Adjust freezestat setpoint upwards until freezestat trips confirm stat has
tripped with continuity tester. Ensure that fan stops and dampers and

valves go to positions outlined in control sequences. Particularly ensure
that outdoor air damper is fully closed (and heating coil valve is fully open).
After test, set freezestat setpoint to design, press manual reset button
and confirm that fan restarts.
d. With balancing contractor present, test static pressure low and high limit
switches as follows: Connect pneumatic tubing to high or low port of limit
switch (depending on whether switch is to trip on low or high pressure)
connect via a tee, the same pneumatic line to manometer. For a high
pressure switch connect tubing to manometer port used for measuring
positive static pressure. For a low pressure switch connect tubing to port
used for measuring negative static pressure. Slowly pressurize tubing and
observe manometer. Ensure that switch trips and fan shuts down at
pressure called for by control sequence. Confirm that switch has tripped
with continuity tester. After test remove test tubing and press manual
reset button ensure that fan restarts. (For DDC systems ensure that
correct alarm message registers at workstations and line printer when
switch trips).
e. To test units with dry bulb economizer cycles do the following: Simulate
outdoor temperature greater than economizer switchover temperature.
Ensure that outdoor air damper is in minimum position (or variable outdoor
air damper is fully closed if minimum damper is called for in the control
sequences). Change discharge air setpoint downwards confirm cooling
coil valve modulates open. Change discharge setpoint upwards confirm
cooling coil valve modulates closed. Simulate outdoor air temperature
below economizer switchover setpoint-above discharge air setpoint.
Ensure that outdoor air damper (or variable outdoor air damper) fully
opens. Change discharge setpoints and ensure cooling coil valve
modulates properly. Simulate at least three outdoor air temperature below
discharge air setpoint. Ensure that cooling coil valve is closed and that as
simulated outdoor temperature is reduced the outdoor air damper and
relief damper modulate closed, while the return damper modulates open.
(1) For VAV units have balancing contractor measure static pressure
at differential pressure transmitter location with manometer.
Ensure duct static pressure reading at controller, agrees with
manometer reading. Change setpoint of transmitter minimum of
four times and ensure that reading at controller agrees with
manometer reading over range of reading. Ensure that when
transmitter setpoint is raised VFD of fans increase speed and
when transmitter setpoint is lowered VFD decrease speed.
Recalibrate transmitter as required. If multiple transmitters are
used repeat above procedures for all transmitters. Ensure by
measuring inputs and outputs that VFD position is controlled by
lowest reading transmitter.
f. Confirm that toilet and other exhaust fans start and stop properly via time
clock.
g. Verify that differential pressure switches across pumps give correct pump
status when pumps are on or off.
h. Confirm alarm setpoints of all alarms listed in sequence of operation.
Confirm that adequate differentials exist for all alarms to prevent nuisance
tripping. Confirm that all field sensors are properly in place and wired.
i. For VAV systems with volumetric controls confirm that velocity pressure
transducers are piped correctly to flow measuring stations in both supply
and return ductwork. Balancer shall measure supply and return air flows

with manometer (take velocity pressure reading convert to velocity then
multiply by duct area to get cfm). BCS contractor shall adjust output to
return fan to maintain cfm differential with supply. BCS contractor shall
simulate changed input from duct mounted static pressure transducer and
shall note that supply and return fan VFD modulate appropriately.
Balancer shall repeat measurements at flow measuring stations, BCS
contractor shall adjust output to return fan VFD. Above procedure shall be
repeated as often as necessary to maintain constant cfm differential
between supply and return fans between 30% and 100% of maximum
flow.
j. Initiate warmup cycle; ensure ALL control components operate as called
for in control sequence of operation.
k. Initiate occupied cycle; ensure ALL control components operate as called
for in control sequence of operation.
l. Initiate unoccupied cycle; ensure ALL control components operate as
called for in control sequence of operation.
m. Test and debug ALL procedures whether or not listed above.
n. Perform any other tests necessary to verify proper system operation in
addition to those listed above.
C. Controls Testing Checklist
1. Fill out the following controls testing checklist for each system on the job.
Checklist shall be signed by both representative of controls vendor and of the
general contractor. If a cycle listed below does not apply to a particular system
write N.A. (not applicable) under the heading "Date Confirmed". Make as many
copies of checklist, and add systems to it as required to list testing of all systems.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all materials, equipment, tools and labor and install electrical work as indicated in
the Drawings and specified herein. Connect all equipment to be installed for a completely
coordinated and integrated electrical system. It is the intent and purpose of these
Drawings and Specifications that upon completion of the project, the electrical installation
including all systems shall be complete and operable in all respects. Completely connect
all systems, equipment, luminaries, outlets, devices, etc., shown noted, or required from
source of power to final connections and leave ready for satisfactory operation. Provide
any minor items omitted from design but obviously necessary to accomplish the above
intent.
B. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Wiring for temporary construction power and lighting.
2. 600 Volt and below service and distribution system.
3. Branch circuit wiring systems.
4. Lighting systems.
5. Convenience and power outlets.
6. Telephone/Computer raceways system.
7. Wiring for building mechanical and refrigeration equipment and systems.
8. Trenching and backfilling.
9. Exterior site lighting and power.
10. Standby electric power system. (Generator)
11. Fire alarm system.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all requirements as specified in the General Requirements, Division 1, and a
contract documents which pertain to the entire project and all special conditions for the
electrical work included herein.
B. Electrical Work shall include all Electrical Drawings plus electrical work referred to on the
Refrigeration and Mechanical Drawings.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Definitions:
1. The term “Contractor” used hereinafter shall designate the Electrical Contractor.
2. “Provide…” shall mean that the Contractor shall furnish and install items,
equipment, wiring, etc., complete with all details. NEC is National Electrical Code;
NESC is National Electrical Safety Code; OSHA is Occupational Safety and Health
Act.
3. “Industrial Areas”: All areas that there could be forklift trucks, pallet jacks, hand
jacks or other equipment for transporting product where damage could happen to
wall panels, otherwise all spaces other than offices.

B. Drawings and Specifications:
1. Drawings and Specifications are complimentary to each other and what is called
for by one shall be as called for by both.
a. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general design, layout,
and arrangement of equipment and various systems. However, being
diagrammatic, the Drawings do not necessarily show all details such as
junction boxes, pullboxes, conduit runs or sizes, wiring, etc., necessary for
a complete and operable system.
b. Do not scale the Drawings for dimensions. Take all dimensions and
measurements from the Architectural Drawings and actual equipment to
be furnished. All dimensions and measurements must be verified in the
field since actual locations, distances, and elevation will be governed by
actual field conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for all
measurements taken in the field.
c. Study and review all contract documents. Should conflicts arise which
require changes in the contract documents, immediately notify the
Engineer. Secure written approval and agreement on necessary
adjustments before the installation is started.
d. Discrepancies shown on different Drawings, or between Drawings and
Specifications, or between Drawings and actual field conditions, or errors
shown on either the Drawings or Specifications shall be promptly brought
to the attention of the Engineer for a decision before the specific
installation is started.
1.4 WORK AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Motor controls, control and safety devices and other electrical items that are furnished by
other contractors and/or the Owner shall be installed and wired in the Electrical Work, as
shown on the Drawings.
B. Packaged equipment with prefabricated and prewired components will be furnished in
other contracts. The Electrical Work shall include complete connections of power into
these panels and coordinate for any additional work indicated on the Drawings.
1.5 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Where referred to publish standard specifications of technical societies, trade associations
and governmental agencies codes and regulations of Underwriters and protective
organizations; Federal, State and Municipal regulations and codes; and publications of a
similar nature shall be the edition current as of the date of this Specification.
B. The applicable requirements of the publications of the following organizations shall apply to
the work under this Division as if fully written herein:
1. VCC: Virginia Construction Code 2009.
2. NEC: National Electrical Code 2008.
3. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code.
4. VFPC: Virginia Fire Prevention Code 2009.
5. NETA: International Electrical Testing Association.
6. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc.
7. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
8. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

9. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
10. IPCEA: Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association.
11. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
12. ASTM: American Society for Testing Materials.
13. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
14. FM: Factory Mutual.
15. NBFU: National Board of Fire Underwriters.
16. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act.
17. L&SBC: Local and State Building Codes and all other Authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.6 PERMITS AND FEES
A. This Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, licenses or certificates of approval. He
shall pay all fees required by and conform to all local, state and federal laws and
regulations governing his work and at the conclusion of his work, he shall furnish the
Owner with certificates of inspection from all authorities having jurisdiction before final
acceptance.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Shop Drawing: Furnish product data and Submittals for review by the
Engineer prior to installation. Refer to related requirements in Division 1. Furnish detailed
and dimensioned product data, and shop drawings where required by subdivision of this
Specification. Contractor shall review these submittals prior to submission for review.
Submit samples of equipment when so requested. Product data and shop drawings shall
be submitted as specified in all other sections and for the following:
B. All shop drawings and product specifications cut sheets shall be submitted electronically in
pdf format (from original pdf copy, do not submit scanned pdf’s). Paper submittals will not
be accepted.
1. Conduits and conductors with locations to be used.
2. Electrical Room(s) and spaces with Electrical Equipment Lay-Outs(s). If different
than the drawings show.
3. List of Nameplates, Labels, and Sign Descriptions
4. Miscellaneous Material and sketches Requested Throughout the Drawings
5. Wiring Devices and Cover Plates
6. Wet Location Devices and Covers
7. Engine Generator Set
8. Panelboards
9. Transformers
10. Safety Switches
11. Distribution Center (Switchboards)
12. Fuses and Spare Fuses Cabinet (if used)
13. Grounding Materials and Methods to be Used

14. Motor Starting Switches
15. Luminaires, Ballast, LED Driver, Lamps, Photometric
16. Lighting Energy Incentive Applications
17. Occupancy Sensors for Lighting Systems
18. Fire Alarm System
C. Operation and Acceptance Tests.
D. Certificates.
1. Certificates of proper operation by manufacturers or their representatives shall be
submitted for the following systems:
a. Engine Generator Set
b. Fire Alarm System
2. Submit Certificates of Acceptance from local inspection authority.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Compile Product Data and Shop Drawings,
Operating and Acceptance Test, Warranties, Certificates, manufacturer’s installation
instructions, manufacturer’s maintenance instructions, names and addresses of local
maintenance companies, Contractor and sub-contractors. Provide separate electronic
versions in Adobe Acrobat format (PDF) for the following sections as a minimum:
1. Certificates and Tests
2. Basic Materials
3. Panelboard Directories and Schedules
4. Distribution Equipment
5. Standby Electric Power System (Generator)
6. Lighting & Photometrics
7. Fire Alarm System w/Shop Drawing
F. Submit one (1) copy of all of the Operation and Maintenance manuals in electronic version
to the Engineer for review. After review approval and upon project completion, submit all
the electronic copies to the Engineer.
G. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, materials and meters as
required preparing As-Built Drawings for the entire facility. The work to be performed is as
follows:
1. Record drawings shall be prepared by the Electrical Contractor in Autocad format
and identified with a revision triangle and cloud.
2. During the progress of the work, keep a set of Drawings marked up to record all
deviations and changes from the Contract Drawings due to field conditions,
change orders, amendments, revisions, addenda and other reasons to represent
an accurate record of all work as actually installed including the dimensional
location of all underground conduits.
3. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be approved by the Engineer
before installation.
4. The record drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and corrected
as deemed necessary by the Electrical Contractor.

5. After approval, the record drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
H. Shop Drawings prepared and submitted by Electrical Contractor and/or Product
Manufacturer(s) shall also be kept up to record on the shop drawings submitted and for the
following systems.
1. Site Plan Conduit Lay-out with Dimensions.
2. Fire Alarm System.
I. Final Acceptance and Work Close-out: All certificated including acceptance of local
inspection authority must be presented at this time.
1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Make provisions for the delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment. Make
arrangements for the introduction into the building. Arrange to have materials delivered to
the job at such stages of the work as will expedite the work as a whole. Mark materials
and store in such a manner as to be easily checked or inspected. Store all materials and
equipment out of the weather and mechanically protected from damage, theft, and
vandalism. Where materials are indicated to be furnished by others, for installation under
this Division, make a complete and careful check of all materials delivered and furnish a
receipt acknowledging acceptance of the delivery and condition of the materials delivered.
After such acceptance, assume full responsibility for the safe-keeping of same until such
time as the completed installation has been accepted.
1.9 EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE
A. Prior to bidding, examine the site carefully and be fully informed of all utility, State, and
local requirements and regulations that will affect the electrical work. No allowance shall
subsequently made in his behalf for any extra expense to which he may be subject, due to
failure or neglect on his part to make such examination.
B. Permits, Fees, Inspection Services, Taxes and Royalties.
C. Utility Coordination: Confirm, at project start the specific requirements of the local power
and telephone utilities regarding work provided by this Division for their services to the
project. It shall be the Electrical Contractor’s responsibility to avoid any delays for utility
services to the project.
1.10 JOB SAFETY SITE
A. Contractor shall be responsible for means and methods of construction and installation of
the work under this Division and shall be responsible for all job safety related to this work.
1. Engineer or Owner shall not assume any responsibility, either voluntarily or
involuntarily, for job site safety or means and methods of construction or for
supervision of either of these items.
1.11 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. Complete the entire electrical installation in accordance with schedules as determined for
the general completion of the entire building. Schedule the progress of work so as to
conform to the schedule of the work of other trades. Cooperate with all other trades so
that the installation of all electrical equipment may be properly coordinated and located.
Carefully check the location of the electrical equipment after the installation of materials
and equipment by other trades.
B. Provide the entire electrical installation as designed and in accordance with Contract
Drawings and Specifications. Any work installed contrary to the Contract Drawings shall
be subject to change as directed by the Engineer at any time of the project status, and no
extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. Minor deviations
necessitated by field conditions or equipment being supplied may be made upon approval

of Engineer. Changes in design and installation shall be done in manner as provided for in
Division 1.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Furnish to the Owner a formal warranty covering the entire electrical system installed,
except lamps for luminaries, to be free from defective materials an workmanship for a
period of one year after date of acceptance of installation by the Owner. During this period
provide all labor and new materials where required to repair or replace all defects to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
B. Warranty shall cover replacement of lamps for 90 days after date of acceptance of
installation by the Owner for all luminaires and for luminaires used during construction.
C. Electrical Contractor shall have written approval from the Owner in order to use new
luminaires during construction. If approval has been granted the Electrical Contractor shall
be responsible to clean all the luminaires including lamps and furnish and install new
lamps if they are used over six (6) months prior to the Owner’s project acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide all material, equipment, and devices which are new first quality, of an approved
type as listed by the Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., which bear their label of approval,
and which are accepted by the Engineer, for installation in this project. Replace, in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer and pay for all equipment or materials damaged in the
course of installation or test. Basic bid shall include manufacturers and catalog numbers
as shown in these Specifications or on the Drawings with “NO EQUALS”.
B. Where several manufacturers are indicated for material, equipment, or devices, Contractor
shall have choice of manufacturers listed. Equipment of other manufacturers may be
proposed as an alternate. The Engineer’s decision regarding substitutions shall be final. It
shall be the contractor’s responsibility to notify all related trades of the accepted
substations and to assume full responsibility for all costs caused as a result of the
substitution.
2.2 TEMPORARY WIRING
A. Where required for construction power and lighting, necessary for installation of all work in
connection with this contract, temporary wiring and connections shall be provided which is
safe and in accordance with requirements of OSHA, standard accepted practices, National
Electrical Code, and State and local Building Codes. The Contactor shall be responsible
for any injury to personnel or damage to materials or equipment caused by temporary
wiring which is not properly protected or installed.
B. Provide temporary power such that any trade can work with a construction power cable
100’ or less in length.
C. Provide temporary power to office trailers and/or indoor office spaces; coordinate with
Construction Manager/General Contractor.
D. Provide temporary light at level of 0.25 watts per square foot throughout the construction
area of the buildings. The above watts per square foot are based on H.I.D. lighting source,
with Metal Halide 400W lamps 0.25W/S.F. is about five (5) Foot Candles (Fc).
E. All temporary wiring shall be provided under this Division. Arrangement for temporary
power will be made by this Contractor. Power will be paid for by the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Good workmanship and appearance shall be considered of equal importance with
electrical operation. Carefully lay out all work in advance and install in a neat and
workmanlike manner and in accordance with recognized good practices and standards.
B. Provide competent workmen who are skilled in their craft and competent nonworking
foreman and superintendent where necessary, who will be on the job at all times.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. It is the intent that this Contractor shall provide sleeves built into the building construction
as work proceeds. In the event they are not built-in, this Contractor shall provide cutting
and setting of the sleeves and shall sub-contract to the supplier of the areas cut to perform
the patching to match the work.
1. Specifically only the mason shall patch masonry, concrete sub patch concrete, tile
and brick sub, patch tile and brick, Thermal Contractor patch wall panels, etc.
B. Provide all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, etc., and necessary for electrical
work. Locate holes to be drilled, outlets, etc., coordinate work with all other trades on the
job, and make arrangements for necessary opening and chases. Seal all holes cut for
wiring runs. No cutting, channeling, core drilling, etc., shall be done without prior approval
of the Engineer. Make repairs to finished building where patching or refinishing is
necessary due to electrical work. Actual work involved in these repairs shall be done by
skilled craftsmen in the trades involved.
C. Structural integrity shall not be impaired. Structural steel and joists shall not be drilled or
cut. Secure hangers to these materials with mechanical clips.
3.3 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. In general, except where specified herein, finish field painting of conduits, boxes, poles,
and equipment shall be done by other trades under another Division of these
Specifications. Protect electrical apparatus, cabinets, boxes, and all other equipment
normally furnished on the job with factory applied finishes, either painted or galvanized,
during storage, and field painting installation. Clean all electrical equipment, such as
luminaries, lamps, transformers, etc., of construction dirt, dust, paint smears, etc., before
completion of work. Clean or touch-up and repaint all scars, blemishes, rust spots, etc., to
original state of finish.
B. On a daily basis during the electrical work, the Electrical Contractor shall remove from the
site all packing cartons, scrap materials and other rubbish and leave the premises in a
clean condition acceptable to the Owner. Provide dumpster service or make
arrangements with the Construction Manager/General Contractor for use of his dumpster.
3.4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
A. Within The Building.
1. Underslab conduit within the building is not permitted unless noted on the
Drawings.
B. Outside The Building.
1. All excavation and backfill outside the building as detailed on the site plan is by the
Construction Manager/General Contractor with the coordination of this Contractor
and the Engineer.
2. This Contractor shall install the underground raceway, raceway spacers and tracer
tape.
3. The Construction Manager/General Contractor shall encase underground
electrical when detailed.

4. Refer to Basic Materials and Methods Section.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. Refer to all sections of Division 16 for other specific labeling and identification
requirements.
B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8” high where specified or as
noted above. In general, use white core laminated plastic; red for emergency power and
fire alarm system; and black for normal power. Attach with screws. Embossed plastic
adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved
in the device plate.
C. Provide warning signs on all equipment or devices operating at 300 volts, or more, reading
“DANGER – 480 VOLTS – KEEP OUT” and over 600 volts “DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE
– KEEP OUT”, etc. with white letters on red background. Signs may be decals, stencils, or
nameplates. Signs shall be sized no more than 8” x 5” and no smaller than 5“x 3”.
D. Emergency Systems: Provide nameplates and paint red all emergency system boxes,
enclosures, or covers (including junction and pullbox, switches, transformers, and
panelboards). Nameplates shall read “EMERGENCY SYSTEM”.
E. Working Clearance: Provide caution signs on all electrical equipment locations including in
electrical rooms and panelboards, transformer, and motor control centers located in open
areas reading:
CAUTION
AREA IN FRONT OF THIS
ELECTRICAL PANEL MUST BE
KEPT CLEAR FOR 42”
OSHA-NEC REGULATIONS
1. Sign shall be yellow with black letters and no smaller than 7” x 10”. Signs may be
decals, stencils, or nameplates.
F. Arc Flash Protection: Provide arc flash label on each electrical enclosure in compliance
with National Electrical Code to read:
- WARNING -
- POTENTIAL ARC FLASH HAZARD -
APPROPRIATE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
AND TOOLS REQUIRED WHEN WORKING
ON THIS EQUIPMENT
G. Identify all boxes and enclosures with decals, stencils, or nameplates for the following
systems.
1. Fire alarm system with red letters and white background to read “FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM”.
2. Telephone raceway system with black letters and white background to read
“TELEPHONE” or “TELEPHONE/COMPUTER” when combined.
H. Submit a list of all the nameplates, identifications, and sign descriptions with materials,
colors, and sizes to be used.
I. The acceptable manufacturer for the labels and signs is W.H. Brady Co. or approved
equal.
3.6 OPERATING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. At such a time as the Engineer may direct and in the presence of the Owner or his

representative, conduct an operating and acceptance test on all electrical systems, both
new and existing, where modified. Prepare a written report of values of all test readings
and procedures together with all additional pertinent information and submit these to the
Engineer for acceptance. Furnish all equipment, instruments, and personnel required for
these tests. Operating and acceptance tests shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
1. Insulation resistance test on each cable with respect to ground and adjacent
cables.
2. Grounding tests.
3. Emergency lighting test.
4. Motors for rotation.
5. Engine generator test.
6. Fire alarm systems.
B. All inspections and test shall be made in accordance with provisions of his Contract.
Rejected materials shall be removed from the site and new materials furnished, retested
and installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer without additional cost to the Owner.
C. Supply personnel to train Owners personnel in the presence of the Engineer in operation
and maintenance of the following systems. Training time shall not exceed a total of
sixteen (16) hours during normal working hours.
1. Lighting Control Systems.
2. Occupancy Sensors.
3. Power Distribution Systems.
4. Engine Generator Systems.
5. Emergency Lighting Systems.
6. Fire Alarm Systems.
3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND WORK CLOSE OUT
A. Before final acceptance of the work under this Division, all damaged or imperfect materials
shall be refinished or replaced, all debris, scaffolding and tools shall be removed and
premises shall be “Broom Clean”, all to the satisfaction of the Owner.
B. Contractor shall inspect the entire electrical installation to assure that all work is completed
and all systems are completely operational before calling for a Final Acceptance Work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section describes those materials and methods common to the work in general for
Division 16.
B. Wiring methods and materials: The installation of all power, lighting and control wiring shall
be in conduit unless noted otherwise.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 16010 Cutting and Patching
B. Section 16010 Identification and Signs
C. Section 16010 Submittals
A. Provide equipment and material constructed to UL and NFPA Standards and provide UL
labels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data and shop drawings submitted in accordance with Division 1.
B. Submit product data and shop drawings for the following:
1. Conduit and conductor types with locations to be used
2. Wiring devices and coverplates
3. Occupancy Sensors
4. Special outlets and covers
5. Outlet boxes, pullboxes, and junction boxes
6. Photoelectric controls
7. Lighting contactors
1.5 WIRING METHODS AND PRODUCTS NOT ACCEPTABLE
A. The following wiring methods and material are not acceptable for this project.
1. Conduit set screw or crimp type fittings are not acceptable.
2. Intermediate metal conduit is not acceptable to be installed outdoor.
3. Conduit installation and support directly on the roof deck indoor and outdoor is not
acceptable.
4. The use of schedule 40 PVC elbows or conduit stub-ups shall not be permitted.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit elbows shall be installed at all conduit stub-ups.
5. Type THHN/TWWN 90º insulation will not be acceptable for feeders, freezer and
outdoor wiring. Type XHHW 90°C conductor’s insulation shall be provided for all
feeders, freezer and outdoor wiring.
6. Armored (Type AC) and metal clad (Type MC) cables are not acceptable unless
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 13 16050 – Basic Materials and Methods
they are part of a modular wiring type system and is acceptable to be used in this
project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
A. General: All raceway shall be of sufficient weight and toughness to withstand cracking and
peeling during bending. Each piece shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects;
cut square and taper reamed and shall be furnished in 10’ lengths. Each length shall bear
the Underwriter’s Label.
B. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick wall, zinc-coated on the
outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on
the inside.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Zinc-coated or cadmium on the outside and either zinc-
coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the inside.
D. Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield and Liquid-tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
E. PVC Conduit: Heavy wall, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 where noted, 90°C. (EPC), rigid,
UL listed, meeting NEMA Standard TC-2.
F. Size: Minimum size shall be ½” in the office area only and ¾” elsewhere. Where size is
not given, the latest issue of the National Electrical Code shall be followed.
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Where required in conduit runs for turns, entrances, and weatherproof boxes. Etc., provide
cast aluminum alloy conduit fittings of type and size to suit conduit run installed. Fittings
shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of NEC for conductors enclosed and
used. Provide covers and gaskets for all fittings installed.
B. Galvanized Rigid Steel:
1. Conduit fittings shall be made of rust resisting alloy of iron and shall be of the cast
type. Cast fittings shall be provided with heavy threaded hubs to fit the conduit
used. Iron fittings shall be cast malleable iron thoroughly coated with metallic zinc
or cadmium inside and outside after all machine work is completed. Conduit
fittings shall be equipped with screw-on type covers, gasketed and attached with
stainless steel screws.
2. Conduit couplings shall be the threaded one-piece type made of rust resisting alloy
of iron. Couplings shall be coated with metallic zinc or cadmium inside and
outside after all machine work is completed.
3. Bushings shall be the threaded type, made of a rust resisting alloy of iron and
cadmium plated. Bushing throats shall be insulated top reduce friction and
abrasion during wire pulling yet maintain equipment ground continuity. Solderless
lugs shall be provided as an integral part of the bushing when required for the
connection of a grounding conductor.
4. Supports shall be made of rust resisting cast alloy of iron and hot dipped
galvanized. Stamped steel straps are not approved.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings:
1. EMT couplings and connectors shall be the gland compression type. Set screw or
crimp type shall not be used. Couplings shall be coated with metallic zinc or
cadmium inside and outside after all machine work is completed. Bushings in
connectors shall have an insulated throat to minimize friction and abrasion during
wire pulling yet maintain equipment ground continuity.
2. Supports shall be made of rust resisting alloy of iron and hot dipped galvanized.
Stamped steel straps are not approved.
D. Liquid-Tight, Flexible Steel Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, steel, nylon or
equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable iron
only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without “O”
ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the
flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected.
E. Bushings: Furnish and install on all conduit ends, insulated type bushings, designed to
prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system.
Insulated throat fittings shall be used on smaller conduits.
F. Expansion Fittings: Hot dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing
and a grounded ring.
G. Expansion Joint: PVC expansion joint type D by Carlon.
H. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium-coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel
conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain
type.
I. Acceptable Manufacturers: O.Z., Tomic, Raco, Appleton, Steel City or Thomas and Betts.
PVC coated shall be Perma-Cote or Robroy.
2.3 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS)
A. Type: Conform to the applicable UL and ICEA standards for the use intended. All
conductors shall be copper. The use of aluminum will not be permitted unless noted on
the Drawings. Stranded conductors shall be used on all sizes No. 8 AWG and larger.
Solid conductors shall be used for No. 10 AWG and smaller unless the use of stranded
conductors is permitted by local codes.
B. Insulation: Conductors shall have 600 volt insulation. Type THHN/THWN thermoplastic
insulation 90°C minimum for conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller unless otherwise
specified or noted on the Drawings, Cross-linked synthetic polymer insulation type XHHW
for all conductors to be installed outdoor for conductors larger than No. 6 AWG and
elsewhere as required by NEC, 90°C minimum. Provide type XHHW 90°C insulation for
branch circuits and feeders in spaces below 0°F (freezers).
C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings.
Current carrying and grounding conductors or strap not less than NEC requirements for
the system to be installed. If the equipment to be installed requires larger conductors and
conduit sizes than indicated on the Drawings, the required changes shall be made
according to Division 1.
D. When home run is indicated to be served with No. 10 AWG or larger wire, the wire size
indicated shall be run the entire length of the circuit(s) to the last device served by that
home run unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
E. Acceptable manufacturers: American Insulated Wire Corp., a Leviton Company; General
Cable Corporation; Senator Wire & Cable Company; Southwire Company; Okonite; Rome;
Belden and Houston Wire & Cable.
F. Type SOW or SOOW Multiconductor Cable: Conductors shall be stranded uncoated
annealed copper not less than 98% conductivity. Insulation shall be rubber with an overall
neoprene jacket; rated 600 volt, 60 degree C oil resistant with reduced jacket walls.
Ampacity rating shall be based on a maximum continuous conductor temperature of 60
degrees C.
2.4 WIRES AND CABLES FOR COLOR CODING
A. The outer jacket of all branch wiring, feeders and cable systems irrespective of any Local
or National Code that now allows decoding shall be color coded to denote polarity as
follows:
208/120V System 480/277V System
Phase A – Black Phase A – Brown
Phase B – Red Phase B – Orange
Phase C – Blue Phase C – Yellow
Neutral – White Neutral – Grey or White
Equip. Grounds – Green Equip. Grounds – Green or Bare
B. All wires and cables not properly color coded shall be removed and replaced at the
Electrical Contractors’ expense.
C. Color coding tape may be used where colored insulation is not available. Color coding
tape shall be wrapped a minimum of five turns around conductors at all locations where
conductors might become visible; such as outlets, junction and pullboxes, panelboards,
MCCs, etc.
2.5 CONNECTORS AND LUGS
A. Conductors No. 2 AWG and larger: Provide insulated pressure connectors or “Crimp-on”
sleeves with overall nylon insulator for splices. Connectors shall be 3M “Scotchlok,”
Buchanan Splice Caps with insulated wraps, or Ideal “Crimp-sleeves” with Wrap Cap
Insulators.
B. Conductors No. 8 AWG to No. 2 AWG: Provide split bolt connectors or pressure type
compression connectors, properly taped and insulated or with approved heat shrink
insulating cover. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with
plastic caps.
C. Motor connections (over 50HP.) shall be made with motor connection kits consisting of
bolted compression lugs and heat shrink tubing, 3M co. or equal.
2.6 INSULATING COVER
A. Plastic Tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms insulation resistance, oil
resistant vinyl backing, oil-resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion
per ASTM D 568 Test Method B.
B. Provide heat shrink motor connection kits or heat shrink insulating cover tape for all motor
connections and all outdoor splices. No other method will be accepted. Heat shrink cover
shall be Raychem or approved equal.
2.7 OUTLET BOXES
A. Each outlet and/or fixture in the wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet
box to suit the conditions encountered.
1. Surface mounted boxes shall be of the cast-metal type having threaded hubs;
concealed boxes shall be of the cadmium-plated or zinc-coated sheet metal type.
2. Each outlet box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of
conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of the National
Electric Code.
3. Boxes shall not be less than 1 ½” deep unless shallower boxes are required by
structural conditions.
4. Grounding Terminal: Grounding terminal; shall be green-colored, washer-in-head,
screw or grounding bushing.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Outlet boxes for surface mounted and outdoor locations shall be of the cast metal
”FS” or ”FD” type manufactured by Bell, Gray, Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Thomas
and Betts, Red Dot, Russell and Stoll, Stonco, Robroy, or Perma-Cote.
2. Outlet boxes for general use concealed and/or flush mounted in concrete walls
and metal or wood stud walls shall be manufactured by Steel City, Thomas and
Betts, Appleton, RACO, or Bowers.
2.8 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and/or as required by Code and as
required to facilitate pulling of wires and cables without damaging the insulation and
stretching at conductors.
1. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet
metal, of not less than the minimum size required by National Electric Code and
shall be furnished with screw fastened covers, boxes exceeding 48” in any
direction shall be properly reinforced with angle iron stiffeners.
2. Pull and junction boxes installed outdoors or in wet location areas shall be the
watertight (NEMA 4) type boxes and NEMA 4X watertight, corrosion resistant
boxes as noted on the drawing.
3. All pull and junction boxes of standard manufacturer’s trade size shall be
manufactured by Keystone, Hoffman, Crouse-Hinds, or similar locally acceptable
supplier.
2.9 WIRING DEVICES
A. Receptacles: Provide receptacles of types, ampacity, poles and configuration as indicated
on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide receptacles rated 20 amperes minimum,
and/or ampere rating as required by National Electric Code for load supplied. Receptacles
(unless otherwise noted on Drawings) shall be industrial extra heavy duty specification
grade, back and side wire and shall equal those numbers shown below. Ivory color shall
be provided (when manufactured) regardless of vendor (unless otherwise noted by
Architect or Interior Designer. Electrical Contractor shall check with the General
Contractor prior to submitting devices) with the exception of the computer receptacles
which shall be orange.
Single Hubbell HBL5361I, 20 Amp.
Duplex Bryant BRY5362I, 20 Amp.
Cooper 5362V, 20 Amp.
Hubbell HBL5362I, 20 Amp.
P&S PS5362I, 20 Amp.
Isolated Ground (IG) Hubbell IG-5362 (orange), 20 Amp.
Ground Fault Circuit Hubbell GFR5362ITR, 20 Amp.
Interrupter (GFI)
B. Wall occupancy sensors: Provide passive infrared wall switch sensor to turn the lighting
“ON” and “OFF” based on occupancy and ambient light level. Occupancy sensor switch
shall be rated 120/277V AC, 60hz, 0-800W at 120V AC ballast or tungsten, and 0-1200W
at 277V AC ballast only. Coverage of 900-1200 square feet with 180° field view with
adjustable sensitivity from 20% to 100%, adjustable light level setting of 10 to 200
footcandles, adjustable time delay from 30 seconds up to 30 minutes, operating
temperature 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C), UL listed and have a five (5) year warranty.
Hubbell WS1277I
Leviton ODS10-IDI
P&S WSP200I
WattStopper WS-250-I
Other types of sensors, e.g., dual technology, ultrasonic, ceiling, luminaire integral sensor
shall be as specified on the drawing(s).
C. Switches: Provide industrial extra heavy duty specification grade, back and side wire
switches rated 20 ampere minimum 120/277 Volts AC, quiet operating and ivory color.
1. Single pole (below), double pole, three way, four way or momentary contact:
Bryant 1121I, 20 Amp.
Cooper 2221V, 20 Amp.
Hubbell HBL1221I, 20 Amp.
P&S PS20AC1I, 20 Amp.
2.10 COVERPLATES
A. Flush mounted covers: Provide specification grade coverplates of non-combustible
thermoplastic or nylon, minimum 0.1” thick for all flush mounted outlets. Color shall be
Ivory (unless otherwise noted by the Architect or the Interior Designer, Electrical Contractor
shall check with the General Contractor prior to submitting coverplates). Install plate
gaskets on all flush mounted receptacles, switch or other electrical boxes in exterior and
interior walls.
B. Surface mounted covers: Provide stamped aluminum ridge top covers with stainless steel
screws and gasket for all surface mounted outlets and junction boxes.
C. Weatherproof location covers:
Duplex Receptacle Vertical HUBBELL WP8M
Duplex Receptacle GFCI Vertical HUBBELL WP26M
2.11 AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Photoelectric Controls: Provide photoelectric control with on/off adjustment by moving a
light level selector to range from 2 footcandles to 50 footcandles and delay of up to two
minutes to prevent false switching due to light from vehicles. Photoelectric control shall be
Tork specification grade 2100 series; for 120 volt #2101 and for 208-277 volt #2104.
B. Lighting Contactors: Provide electrically held lighting contactor. Lighting contactors shall
be Square D class 8903 type L or type S.
2.12 FIRE STOPS AND PENETRATION SEALS
A. All penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall be sealed with Dow Corning RTV
Silicone Fire Resistant Foam Sealant or CHASE-FOAM, CTC PR-855 Fire Resistant Foam
Sealant, to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration
before, during nor after a fire. The fire rating of the penetration seal shall be at least that of
the floor or wall into which it is installed, so that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is
maintained.
2.13 FREEZER/COOLER AND OUTDOOR PENETRATIONS
A. Freezer/Cooler wall and outdoor roof penetrations shall not be sleeved. The Electrical
Contractor shall drill his access hole as near as possible to the outside diameter of the
conduit through the cold storage insulated panels to ensure the snuggest possible fit. An
acceptable fitting or junction box shall be installed on both sides of this panel, and the
conduit through the panel wall shall be PVC Schedule 80. PVC conduit is to extend 4” to
the warm side and 4” to the cold side. The PVC conduit shall be filled with a UL approved
putty, so that it is removable, following a successful system test for all air units, sub-floor
heating systems, freezer lighting systems, RTD system conduits, etc. Provide putty “Duct
Seal Compound” by Rector Seal (www.rectorseal.com or 800-231-3345) or equal. Do not
use foam or silicone as filler. Butt joints or cracks shall then be sealed by caulking with a
compatible non-hardening sealant.
2.14 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ON CSI PANELS
A. Provide metal framing channels from floor slab or from roof structure and plywood
backboard for all panelboards, control panels, disconnect switches and cabinets mounted
on Cold Storage Insulated (CSI) wall or ceiling panels. (Do not provide plywood behind dry
type transformer). Provide square tubing for wet location areas and as indicated on
Drawings, furnish additional square tubing and omit plywood backboard. Secure metal
framing channel and/or to CSI panels with “Fab-lok” fasteners. (Fab-lok shall be by Fabco
Fastening Systems, Townsend Div., Textron, Inc., 1304 Korr Drive, Decorah, IA 52101,
Phone: 800-435-7213 or 815-961-5000; Fax: 815-397-8986).
2.15 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the
minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the Drawings or specified. The
equipment ground (green conductors) consists of metallic connections to ground of non-
current-carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the system.
The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to provide greater safety by limiting the
electrical potential between non-current-carrying parts of the system, and to provide a low
impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.
B. All conduits installed metallic or non-metallic shall have an equipment grounding conductor
throughout.
C. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point for interconnection of the
equipment grounding system and the service grounding electrode conductor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUITS
A. Conduit routing:
1. Conceal all conduit runs except at surface equipment, cabinets, in mechanical
equipment rooms, in compressor room, in the warehouse area, or where
specifically indicated or authorized by the engineer. Overhead runs shall be
utilized. Underslab conduit is not permitted unless noted on the Drawings.
2. Route conduits either parallel or perpendicular to structural members, walls, floors,
or ceiling except where buried in the floor slab or underground where conduits may
be run directly from outlet to outlet. Keep conduits at least 6” away from sources
of heat such as hot water lines, etc. Locate all conduits so as not to endanger the
strength of any building structural members; consult Engineer to verify actual
location of all conduit runs pertinent to building structural system.
3. Actual conduit runs are not generally indicated on Drawings; install in most
feasible manner compatible with the construction of the building and the work of
other crafts. Where conduit runs for feeders are shown on the Drawings, follow
routing indicated.
4. Conduit bends: In any conduit run, the number of quarter bends or equivalent
between terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four bends for
conduits up to 1 ¼”, three bends for 1 ½” to 2 ½” conduits, and two bends for 3” to
4” conduits.
Make all bends symmetrical using a standard hickey, conduit bender, or bending
machine. Cut all conduits square and ream ends to remove burrs. Exercise all
necessary precautions to prevent accumulation of dirt, water, concrete, and all
foreign materials during construction. Clear and dry all raceways thoroughly
before conductors are pulled in.
5. Coordinate location of raceways, outlets, and blockouts necessary for conduit runs
in preformed concrete wall, floors, and ceilings prior to forming.
6. There shall not be any conduits installed below the ceiling level on the wall in the
wet location areas. All equipment enclosures and devices shall be fed with vertical
conduit drops from the ceiling level or structural steel level.
B. Install the following types of conduits in accordance with the specific application or location
indicated.
1. Galvanized Rigid Steel, (GRS): Where exposed to the weather; on the roof; where
required for mechanical protection including all conduits stubbed-ups with a
minimum of 4” above the finished floor; where specifically indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing, (EMT): Above grade and floor slabs, walls, ceilings, and
where exposed in dry areas; do not install in floor slab or wet locations rated
areas.
3. Flexible Metal Conduit, (FMC): Final connections to recessed fixtures only.
Provide steel or aluminum conduit with approved connectors at terminations. FMC
shall not be over 6’ long.
4. Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit (LTFSC): For final connections to all motors,
equipment, equipment control panel not attached to the building walls, and other
similar equipment in all locations including dry locations, damp locations, wet
locations, and where exposed to the weather or to moisture. Provide approved
type connectors at terminations. LTFSC shall not be over 3’ long unless approved
by the Engineer.
5. PVC Conduits:
a. Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall only be installed below ground floor slabs
where specifically indicated on drawings and for outside below grade runs.
The use of schedule 40 PVC elbows or conduit stub-ups shall not be
permitted. Galvanized rigid steel conduit elbows shall be installed at all
conduit stub-ups with a minimum cover of 24” below finished grade or
paving.
b. Provide expansion joint when PVC conduit is installed outdoors or in
rooms where temperature changes. Provide grounding conductor
throughout entire length of PVC conduit runs.
C. Conduit Installation:
1. Supports:
a. Provide supports for horizontal steel conduit not more than 6’ apart with
one support near each elbow or bend.
b. Secure conduit raceways, outlets, and equipment to building structure in a
rigid and secure manner using acceptable type fasteners. Where runs are
concealed over removable grid ceiling do not support conduit runs from
ceiling grid framing system. Install conduits at a height over all ceiling
panels to allow for easy installation and removal of ceiling panels.
c. All mounting hardware, conduit supports, screws, hooks, etc. in the “wet
location” or “clean room” areas shall be stainless steel only.
d. Conduit support on the roof deck indoor or on the roof outdoor will not be
allowed.
2. Straps: Install one-hole pipe straps on conduits 1 ½” or smaller. Install individual
pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1 ½”. Spring steel fasteners with hanger
rods may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps.
3. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more horizontal
conduits run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit to the
horizontal hanger member by a U-bolt, one-hole strap or other specially designed
and approved fastener.
4. Hanger Rods: Install ¼” diameter or larger, all-thread steel rods for trapezes,
spring steel fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be
used for the support of any conduit.
D. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits terminating in the bottoms of boxes
or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors.
E. Seal-Off Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits enter or leave areas
of dissimilar conditions such as temperature, humidity, etc., and where otherwise
indicated.
F. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit
sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduits passing
through walls. Sleeves that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yarn.
1. Conduit sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at all points where
conduits pass through concrete or masonry constructions.
2. Conduit sleeves shall be furnished and set by the Contractor and he shall be
responsible for their proper and permanent location.
3. Pipe sleeves shall be galvanized steel or plastic and shall be of sufficient diameter
to provide approximately ¼” clearance around the conduit.
4. Sleeves shall extend beyond wall, floor, roof, etc., a minimum of 2” beyond
concrete.
5. Install Fire Stop or Penetration Seal in the void between conduit and sleeve and in
all unused sleeves.
G. Conduit Stub-Ups: All conduit stub-ups shall be installed plumb and flush to mounting
surface if installed against a wall or column. None of the conduit bend can be exposed.
All conduit stub-ups not properly installed shall be corrected at the Electrical Contractors
expense including any additional concrete work. All conduits shall be stubbed-up a
minimum of 4” above the finished floor, and shall be galvanized rigid steel raceway at the
sweep and slab line.
H. Roof Installation:
1. Coordinate all electrical roof work supports and penetrations with the Roof
Contractor and Construction Manager. Obtain an approved installation detail prior
to any electrical work on the roof.
2. Provide standard roof jacks, or pitch pockets where allowed by local code, for
conduits which penetrate the roof; ensure that penetration is completely
waterproof.
3. Provide stand-off brackets and supports for conduits on roof; set supports in pitch
pockets mounted on roof, maintain minimum 12” clearance from roof to conduits.
I. Stand-off Spacers: Provide stand-off spacers or conduit clamps to maintain minimum ½”
clearance between conduit and wall, ceiling, or other surface on all exposed conduit
installations.
J. Couplings Flush in Floor: All conduits passing through floors shall have a threaded, zinc or
cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type coupling installed. Top of coupling shall be
level with the top of finished floor. Unused conduit openings shall be closed with threaded
plug.
K. Identification: Identify feeder conduits with name of load served (Example: “From MDC-A
to Panel HA”) at 20’ intervals in all accessible locations such as (but not limited to)
machine rooms, electrical closets, utility tunnels, switchgear rooms, warehouse area, truck
dock area, freezer, etc. Identification may be decals, stencils, or nameplates with black
letters on a white background.
L. The Contractor shall not reduce the size or number of conduit runs indicated on the
drawings without the written approval of the Engineer.
3.2 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Splices (480 volts and under): Conductor lengths larger than No. 6 AWG shall be
continuous from termination to termination without splices unless approved by the
Engineer.
B. Pull wires: In each empty conduit, except underground conduits, install a No. 14
galvanized steel pull wire or a plastic line having a tensile strength of not less than 200
pounds. In each empty underground conduit, install a No. 10 AWG bare hard-drawn
copper or copper clad wire or plastic line having a tensile strength of not less than 200
pounds.
C. Cable Bends: Radius of bends not less than 5 times the outer diameter of the cable.
D. Conductor Pull: Conductors shall not be pulled into conduits until after all concrete work is
completed and all conduits have been swabbed out.
E. Conductor Identification: Tag each conductor in each enclosure with wrap-around circuit
designation labels.
F. Crimp Connectors and Lugs: Install with manufacturer’s recommended tools and with the
type and quantity of deformations recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Insulation Tests (600 volts): Measure the insulating resistance of all conductors.
Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and ground.
Resistance shall be 50,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by Megger without
circuit loads, if measured under 50,000,000 ohms then it shall be further investigated by
visual inspection. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer and shall
be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA & NETA Standards for the wires and cables to
be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and
conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer when requested. Prepare a written report of
values of all test readings for all feeders and submit a letter stating that all branch circuit
conductors have been tested.
3.3 BOXES
A. Installation: Mount boxes with the long axis of devices vertical for switches and
receptacles, horizontal for duplex wet location receptacles, unless otherwise specified.
B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box shall be construed to
mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal central line of the coverplate.
C. Location of the outlets shown on the drawings are approximate, the Electrical Contractor
shall study the building plans in relation to the spaces and equipment surrounding each
outlet so that receptacles, switches and lighting fixtures are symmetrically located and
mounted in and/or on the walls, ceiling and floor.
D. The locations of all wall switch boxes shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings
before installation of same. All switch boxes unless specifically noted otherwise on the
Drawings shall be opposite the hinged side of the door for all single doors.
E. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall be not less than 4” octagonal. Flush or recessed
fixtures shall be provided with separate junction boxes where required by the fixture
terminal temperature requirements.
F. Switch and receptacle boxes installed in concealed locations shall be provided with the
proper type extension rings or plaster covers where required to set flush with the finished
surfaces of the walls, ceilings and floors.
G. All boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall be supported by bar
hangers in frame constructions or shall be fastened directly with wood screws on wood,
bolts with expansion shields in concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and
machine screws or welded threaded studs on metal.
H. Plaster rings shall be provided for square boxes where required.
I. All switch outlets, junction or pullboxes hall be rigidly secured, set, plumb and straight.
Provide any special fittings necessary for proper conduit connections.
J. All empty boxes shall be provided with a flat blank cover.
K. Pullboxes: Provide additional pullboxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for
maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under
Conduit and Fittings.
3.4 WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide appropriate outlets in locations shown on Drawings for purpose intended in
accordance with code requirements. Mount wall outlets in accessible locations and at
heights specified for type of outlet, but clear of baseboard radiation, built-in cabinets, etc.
B. Switches and wall occupancy sensors: Install within 6” of latch side of doors 46” above
finished floor in all areas and in gang boxes when shown immediately adjacent to each
other. Install wall outlets in uniform vertical and horizontal lines and coordinate
thermostats, other temperature controls, etc., into same lines.
C. Occupancy sensors (wall and luminaire mounted):
1. The occupancy sensor must be properly grounded in order to operate, the integral
blinders may be used to restrict the field of view to prevent unwanted detection of
hallway traffic or other areas. It should be positioned at least four (4) feet away from
HVAC registers. Whenever the occupancy sensor is powered up, it could take
approximately one minute to begin normal operation.
2. Enhanced adjustment: Supply personnel to train Owner’s representative in the
presence of the Construction Manager and provide adjustments on each sensor
installed to the satisfaction of the Owner and Construction Manager for the following
adjustments.
a. Time: The delayed “OFF” time is preset from most manufacturers at 10 or 15
minutes. Electrical Contractor or the occupancy sensor manufacturer shall
adjust each sensor to 2.5 or 15 minutes, as noted on drawings for LED
lighting and 20 minutes for all fluorescent luminaires unless noted otherwise
on the drawings. Do not use any other time delay settings without the
Engineer’s approval because it will affect the lamp life and the lamp warranty.
b. Field of view: Adjust field of view at each sensor to prevent unwanted
detection. The factory preset is at 180° field of view.
c. Sensitivity/Range: Reduce the sensitivity or coverage range to allow the
sensor to ignore motion at the far end of its range and avoid unnecessary
switching lights “ON”. The factory preset is at 100% sensitivity or full range
coverage.
d. Natural sunlight level: The factory preset for the daylight level sensor is in the
“OFF” position (not activated by sunlight). Activate the sunlight level sensor
(where applicable) and set as directed by the Owner.
3. Provide the installation instructions, operation manual and adjustment settings with
each occupancy sensor. Locate documentation attached to coverplate or hand deliver
to the Owner or Owners representative.
D. Receptacle outlets: Install up nominal 18” above finished floor in all general office
locations; install at switch height where shown to be in combination; install up 46” in
industrial areas indoor and outdoors, warehouse area, all mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, toilet rooms; install up 4” to center-line above counter tops or
backsplashes (wherever is higher), built-in or permanent desk tops where marked above
counter or as noted on the Drawings. Refer to the Architectural and Mechanical Drawings
for locations. Rough-in outlets for electric water coolers so as to be concealed behind unit,
accessible and in accordance with recommendations of equipment suppliers. Other
mounting heights to be as indicated on the Drawings.
E. Identification: Identify all dedicated receptacles with panel name and circuit number to
read (Example: “DEDICATED LA-14”).
3.5 FIRE STOPS AND PENETRATION SEALS
A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage
of conduits or other forms of raceway, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such
openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner to maintain fire rating of structure and
approved by the Engineer.
3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON ROOF
A. Roof penetrations for mechanical equipment will not be permitted unless specifically noted
on the Drawings or shop drawings. All conduit installation shall be located through the roof
opening for the mechanical equipment. Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor for the
exact conduit location after equipment installation.
B. Roof exhaust fan connection: Provide conduit through the roof opening for the fan and use
the conduit hose furnished with the fan. Drill through the damper tray where required.
3.7 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connections to a metallic
housing of electrical equipment by means of locknut and bushings, provide ground bushing
connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment.
Metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be bonded to the ground wire at both
conduit entrance and exit. Bond the conductor at both ends to the equipment grounding
system. An identified grounding conductor shall be installed in all metallic conduits and
flexible metallic conduit or any non-metallic raceway for the entire length of the system.
B. Grounding Conductors: The conductors shall be continuous without joint or splice, and
shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the conductor at each end.
Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal-sheathed holes.
C. Grounding Connections: Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or
clamps. If surface is coated, the coating must be removed down to a bare metal. After the
coating has been removed, apply a non-corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface
and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal, it shall be painted or
touched up with “Galvanox”. All connections shall be available for inspection and
maintenance.
D. Grounding at Devices: Connect ground wire to ground terminal of all devices. Provide
grounding jumper from grounding terminal of 3 wire receptacles to outlet box where ground
wire is not pulled.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16175 STANDBY ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Provide outdoor engine-generator standby electric power system designed to deliver a
minimum KW as indicated on the Drawings with corresponding KVA at 80% power factor,
at the altitude where the system is to be installed and at all the ambient temperatures at
which the unit is to be operated. Engine shall be diesel fueled. System shall be connected
for 277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hertz, wye service and designed for remote
automatic operation. Engine shall be liquid cooled with engine mounted radiator. The
system shall be a complete package of new and current equipment and accessories as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. In addition to furnishing and installing the standby generator, the Electrical Contractor shall
be required to acquire and pay for all permits necessary to install and operate the
generator. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Obtain County “Authority to Construct Permit” and County “Permit to Operate”.
2. It is recommended that the Electrical Contractor not to purchase the generator
until an “Authority to Construct Permit” has been issued by the County. The intent
of this requirement is to ensure that the generator will satisfy all of the County’s
emission and other standards prior to being purchased.
3. All permits shall be applied for in the name of the facility. However, the listed
Responsible official shall be a Representative of the Electrical Contractor.
4. The Representative of the Electrical Contractor shall remain listed as the
responsible official up to the 1st renewal of the Permit to Operate (1 year after
generator initially placed into service). At that time, the Electrical Contractor shall
file a “Change of Responsible Official” to an individual identified, at that time, by
the facility’s Owner. The facility will accept responsibility for the fee associated with
this change.
C. Package: Package shall consist of, but not limited to the following:
1. Diesel oil fueled engine driven generating set with sub-base fuel tank and sized for
24 hours minimum at full load.
2. Outdoor protective housing, color white unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
3. Provide thermostatically controlled electrically heated pads on rack to keep battery
warm at temperatures down to –30ºF.
4. Provide branch circuits (four minimum) to the nearest 120/208V, 3Ø, 4W
panelboard for battery heater pads, battery charger, engine block heater and two
GFI weatherproof receptacles (one inside the enclosure and one outside the
enclosure).
5. An engine-alternator control console mounted on generator set to include
complete engine start-stop control, automatic exercising of engine, and solid state
monitoring systems.
6. A load transfer control panel to provide automatic starting and stopping of the
engine and automatic transfer of load from normal power to standby emergency
power and then back to normal power.
7. Mounted accessories, alarms, and other equipment as specified and as normally
furnished with this type of power system.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 10 16175 – Standby Electric Power System
8. The Generator output main circuit breaker(s) construction shall be suitable for use
as service equipment to comply with NEC. If the generator’s main breaker(s) can’t
be service rated, this Electrical Contractor shall furnish an outdoor NEMA 3R
breaker(s) switch rated for service equipment main.
9. Remote alarm annunciator located at the Dock Office or as directed by the Owner.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 Cast-In Place Concrete
B. Section 16010 Trenching and Backfill
C. Section 16010 Identification and Signs
D. Section 16010 Submittals
E. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
A. Construct equipment to applicable UL standards, provide UL label. Conform to National
Electrical Code and local inspection authority.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product data of the automatic transfer switch(s) shall be submitted to
the Power Company for their review and approval.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Provide shop drawings and product data in accordance
with Division 1 for the following:
1. Diesel engine generator set.
2. Submit the following data sheets:
a. Exhaust Emission performance data sheet.
b. EPA Exhaust Emission Compliance statement.
c. Sound data.
d. Cooling system data.
e. Prototype test support data.
f. Alternator data sheet.
3. Generator Set Controller.
4. Generator output main circuit breaker.
5. Battery charger and batteries.
6. Detail drawing of the exhaust system.
7. Outdoor protective housing.
8. Sub-base fuel tank drawings.
9. Recommended concrete pad.
10. Remote alarm annunciator.
11. Automatic transfer switch(s).
12. Automatic transfer switch withstand ratings with all specific manufacturers circuit
breakers.
13. Warranty.
C. Shop drawings shall consist of:
1. Complete structural drawings showing:
a. Arrangement
b. Dimensional plan and elevation, front view, back view, and other pertinent
elevation views
c. Conduit entrance locations and dimensions
d. Incoming and outgoing conductor terminator positions
e. Wiring terminal block locations and all other terminal block locations
f. Weight of equipment
2. Base Plan – Show dimensions of base with anchoring recommendations.
1.5 ENGINE
Engine shall be diesel fueled, 4 cycle, minimum (6) cylinder, direct injection cylinders turbo-
charged, intercooled and liquid-cooled. Engine shall develop sufficient brake horsepower to
continuously carry indicated KW load at an operating speed of 1,800 rpm at the altitude where
installed and under ambient temperatures encountered. Provide electric heating in block,
thermostatically controlled, to assure starting in cold temperatures as low as –30°F.
A. Cooling System: cooling system shall be liquid-cooled by means of engine mounted
radiator with overflow tank, self-sealing water pump, belt-driven fan, and with thermostat
temperature control. Provide high coolant temperature shutdown and alarm. Cooling
system shall be designed to maintain full load continuous operation of engine-generator
and emergency power system at 100 degree F ambient temperature at engine location on
site, using ethylene glycol type coolant. Engine coolant temperature, when operating
under these conditions, shall remain within a maximum temperature rise of 50°C. Furnish
corrosion resistant coolant filters. Protect coolant from freezing at temperatures down to –
30°F.
B. Fuel System: Furnish Cummins PT injection system. Provide dry element air cleaners,
fuel transfer pump, fuel filters, and an automatic fuel shutoff.
C. Fuel: Fuel shall be diesel, type and number as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Governor: Furnish a Barber Colman electronic governor with electric actuator. Speed
droop shall be externally adjustable from isochronous to 5%.
E. Lubrication System: Full pressure lubrication shall be provided by means of a positive
displacement, gear design, lube oil pump. Provide full-flow oil filters, oil level indicator, oil
pressure gauge, low oil pressure shutdown, and lube oil cooler.
F. Starting System: Provide remote 12 or 24 volt, 2 wire, negative ground, starting system
with positive shift electric starter with cranking limiter.
G. Valves: Engine shall be furnished with dual overhead intake and exhaust valves of heat
and corrosion resistant alloy steel valve facing and valve seat inserts.
H. Battery Charging: Provide belt-driven, 12 or 24 volt, amp, D.C. alternator with
transistorized voltage regulator and negative ground. Refer to battery on paragraph 1.6
following.
1.6 ALTERNATOR
A. Alternator shall be 4-pole, revolving field, brushless, and designed for minimum reactance,
low waveform distortion, and maximum efficiency. Rotor shall be dynamically balanced
and driven through a flexible disc coupling to ensure permanent alignment. Stator shall
include a 12 lead, bus for load connection system.
B. Exciter: Provide 3 phase, full-wave rectified exciter with silicone diodes, mounted on
common rotor shaft, and sized for maximum motor starting.
C. Voltage Regulator: Provide a temperature compensated solid state voltage regulator with
silicon controlled sensing circuit. Regulator shall provide automatic voltage reduction if
load demand exceeds engine capacity.
D. Voltage Waveform: Voltage waveform deviation factor shall be less than .06 line to line
and less than .06 line to neutral per NEMA MGI-22.42. Total harmonic content of AC
waveform shall be less than 6%; telephone influence factor shall be less than 50 per
NEMA MGI-22.43.
E. Bearings: Provide heavy duty sealed pre-lubricated ball bearings.
F. Cooling: Cooling shall be by means of direct drive centrifugal blower.
G. Temperature Rise: Temperature rise at rated load and power factor shall be within limits
for Class F insulation as defined by NEMA MGI-22.40.
H. Insulation System: Insulation shall be Class H on low and medium voltage, Class F on
high voltage as defined by NEMA MGI-1.65. Rotor shall be impregnated with 100% solid
epoxy resin. Stator and remaining insulation system shall be impregnated twice with
varnish conforming to MIL-1-24092, Type M, and Class 155.
1.7 UNIT PERFORMANCE
A. Frequency Regulation: Shall be isochronous from no load to rated load.
B. Voltage Regulation: Shall be +2% from no load to full load with isochronous governing.
Furnish rheostat to provide +5% voltage adjustments.
C. Steady State Operation: Frequency variation shall not exceed +0.5% (+0.3 Hertz) and
voltage variation shall not exceed +1% of their mean value for constant loads from no load
to full load.
D. Electromagnetic Interference Level: Attenuation shall exceed requirements for most
standard AM Radio, Television, and Marine Radio-Telephone equipment.
1.8 CONTROLS
A. Provide a control console unit, mounted on vibration isolators, with a panel light and the
following DC and AC controls:
B. DC Engine Controls: Includes run-stop-remote switch; remote start-stop terminals; oil
pressure gauge; coolant temperature gauge; charge rate ammeter; and solid state engine
monitoring system.
C. Solid State Engine Monitoring System: This system shall be of modular design with
individual status indicating lamps and signal circuits for a connection to a remote
annunciator. Provide the following on the Control Console:
1. Front mounted status lamps shall indicate: Low coolant temperature; pre-
shutdown and shutdown for high coolant temperature and low oil pressure;
shutdown for over voltage (AC output); over crank; and over speed.
2. Provide manual reset and lamp test switches on front of console.
3. Internal signal circuits for connection to remote annunciator shall include:
a. Low coolant temperature; pre-shutdown and shutdown for over voltage
(AC output), over crank, and over speed; high and low battery voltage;
cycle-cranking; crank and run; magnetic sensor; time delay with start,
stop, and stop counter; generating; and a common alarm terminal.
D. AC Output Controls: The following meters and controls shall be mounted on the front of
the console:
1. AC voltmeter and AC ammeter with a meter switch and voltmeter-ammeter phase
selector switch with an “OFF” position.
2. Voltage adjusting rheostat.
3. Frequency meter and running time meter.
4. Exciter circuit breaker with manual reset.
1.9 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. The following equipment and accessories shall be furnished as a part of the total package:
B. Automatic Transfer Switch: Refer to detailed requirements included in this section of the
Specifications.
C. Exhaust System: Provide a residential/critical silencing type muffler and flexible
connection to exhaust system. Silencer shall be sized to assure proper operation without
excessive back pressure when installed. Stainless steel flexible bellows connectors and Y-
type adapter, if required, sized to match the engine and exhaust silencer, and shall be
provided for installation between the engine and silencer. A suitable rain cap shall be
provided at the stack outlet. Provide mounting hardware to mount silencer on top of
weatherproof enclosure for engine-generator unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
D. Fuel Supply:
1. Provide dual wall sub-base tank mounted directly to generator to set skid.
2. Provide fuel capacity to provide 24 hours minimum of operation at 60Hz full load
standby rating.
E. Mounting Base: Provide a welded structural steel mounting base equipped with vibration
isolators to provide a suitable mounting to any level surface. Verify location of engine-
generator and mounting base.
F. Battery: Provide two 12 or 24 volt lead acid starting batteries in sealed plastic cases. Total
battery shall be of sufficient size and ampere-hour capacity to assure full starting capacity
for engine furnished over the full specified period for cranking and at an outdoor finish
floor; provide thermostatically controlled electrically heated pads on rack to keep battery
warm at temperatures down to –30°F. Provide completely automatic two-step solid state
trickle charger connected to emergency circuit. Provide all necessary battery cables.
G. Other Equipment:
1. Generator output at main circuit breaker. Provide short circuit interrupting
capacity.
2. Oil drain valve with hose extension.
3. Battery charging alternator.
4. Engine coolant electric block heater with thermostatic control.
5. Radiator air discharge duct adapter.
H. Operational Manual: Upon completion of installation of entire standby electric power
system, provide the Engineer in PDF format the operational maintenance instructions and
manuals for review. Upon review and approval provide the Owner one hardcopy and PDF
version of the final submittal and copy the Engineer the PDF version only. The operational
maintenance instructions and manuals should contain parts lists, detailed drawings of the
engine-generator set and wiring diagrams for all alarm and control circuits and the
certification that the entire system has been completely installed, has been tested in
accordance with these Specifications, and is ready for “on-line” operation.
1.10 REMOTE ALARM ANNUNCIATORS
A. Provide a network remote alarm annunciator where indicated on the Drawings, or where
directed by Owner. Provide all necessary wiring in conduit, devices, and equipment,
powered by electric battery, to give the following alarms and indications for the standby
electric power system. Provide both audible and visual alarms; provide silencing switch on
audible alarm. Provide alarms and indications for the following:
B. Pre-shutdown and shutdown for high coolant temperature.
C. Pre-shutdown and shutdown for low oil pressure.
D. Shutdown for over voltage (AC output), over crank, and over speed.
E. Low coolant temperature, below 70°F in the water jacket.
F. High and low battery voltage.
G. Low level fuel supply in underground tank.
H. Visual signal to indicate standby plant is in operation.
I. Visual signal to indicate generator is carrying the load.
1.11 AUTOMATIC LOAD TRANSFER CONTROL PANELS

A. Provide a complete automatic load transfer control panel designed and built for separate
mounting or bussed in a line-up with the switchboard, and to be integrated and coordinated
with entire operation of emergency power system. Transfer control panel shall include all
necessary relays and component parts, together with UL listed electrically and
mechanically interlocked transfer switch to provide the functions as specified herein. The
requirements are as follows:
B. General: The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the
emergency AC power generator so as to maintain system compatibility and local service
responsibility for the complete power and emergency system. A manufacturer’s
representative shall conduct a complete system operation test for the Architect, Engineer,
Owner, and operating personnel. It shall be listed UL (Standard 1008). The manufacturer
shall furnish schematic and wiring diagrams for the particular automatic transfer switch and
a typical interconnection wiring diagram for the entire standby system.
C. Ratings and Performance: The automatic transfer switch shall be rated for a minimum of
150% of the rated full load ampere output of the generator at the design voltage and at
continuous operation in ambient temperatures of -25°F (-32°C) to +125°F (+51.5°C). The
transfer switch shall be rated for all classes of load, both inductive and non-inductive, at
600 volts, and tungsten lamp load of 250 volts. The automatic transfer switch shall be
designed, built, and tested to close on an inrush current up to and including 20 times the
continuous rating of the switch without welding or excessive burning of the contacts. The
transfer switch shall be capable of switching load up to and including its interrupting current
capacity and capable of enduring 6000 cycles of operation, at rated current, at a rate of 6
cycles per minute, without failure. One cycle shall consist of one complete opening and
closing of both sets of contacts on an inrush current of 10 times the continuous rating of
the switch. When protected by Bussmann current limiting fuses, automatic transfer switch
shall be capable of withstanding minimum 100,000 amps RMS symmetrical short circuit
current.
D. Construction: The automatic transfer switch shall be open transition type (break before
make), with terminal lugs for either copper or aluminum wire and/or bussed in a line-up
with the switchboard, shall have individual, heat resistant chambers enclosing solid silver
cadmium oxide, double-break contacts. The transfer switch, with mechanical and
electrical interlocks to prevent simultaneously energizing on both normal and emergency
service, shall be mechanically held on line side, factory installed in a non-ventilated NEMA
1 enclosure unless shown for outdoor installation on the drawings which should be NEMA
3R.
E. Functions and Controls:
1. Shall monitor each ungrounded line with calibrated dial, adjustable voltage, solid
state UNDER VOLTAGE SENSORS to sense a decrease of voltage below a set
point, or a loss of voltage on any phase of the normal power source. Voltage
sensors shall be temperature compensated for 2% maximum deviation over the
temperature range -25°F (-32°C) to +175°F (+79°C).
2. Shall sensing voltage imbalance, phase rotation, and loss of single phase
detection.
3. Shall signal the engine-generator set to start in the event of a power interruption.
A solid state TIME DELAY START (adjustable from 0.5 to 10 seconds) shall delay
this signal to avoid nuisance startups on momentary voltage dips or power
outages.
4. Shall transfer the load to the engine-generator after it reaches proper voltage and
frequency. A solid state TIME DELAY TRANSFER (adjustable from 0.5 to 10
seconds) shall delay this transfer to allow the engine-generator to stabilize.
5. Shall re-transfer the load to the line after normal power restoration. A TIME
DELAY RE-TRANSFER (adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes) shall delay this transfer
to avoid short-term normal power restoration.
6. Shall provide an automatic RE-TRANSFER TIME DELAY BY-PASS to re-transfer
the load from generating set to normal source if generating set output interrupts
after normal source restores voltage.
7. Shall signal the engine-generator to stop after load re-transfer to normal source. A
solid state TIME DELAY STOP (adjustable from 0.5 to 5 minutes) shall permit
engine to run unloaded to cool down before shutdown.
8. Shall provide a 12 amp, SCR voltage regulated current limited BATTERY FLOAT
CHARGER to maintain fully charged cranking batteries.
9. Shall provide NORMAL-TEST SWITCH to select “Normal” automatic operation or
“Test” to start and run generating set for test purposes. Works in conjunction with
“With Load-Without” load switch.
10. Shall provide an EXERCISER CLOCK with eight events/schedules to automatically
start the generating set with or without load at regular intervals and allow it to run
for a preset time period, such as 30 minutes per week.
11. Shall provide a WITH LOAD-WITHOUT LOAD SELECTOR SWITCH to select test
or exercise as follows:
a. “Without Load,” the automatic transfer switch runs unloaded.
b. “With Load”, the automatic transfer switch transfers load to generating set,
after time delay, the same as it would for a normal source interruption.
12. Shall provide a CONTROL DISCONNECT PLUG to electrically disconnect the
control section from the transfer switch for maintenance service during normal
operation.
13. Shall provide a BATTERY VOLTAGE SENSOR with indicating lamps and isolated
alarm contacts to signal a battery charger malfunction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Standby and emergency electric power shall be provided by an electric generating set with
an Automatic Transfer Switch and Remote 20 Alarm Annunciator as noted on the drawings
or an equal as approved by the Owner, furnished with all accessories, controls, and
equipment as specified herein and recommended by the Generator Manufacturer.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT
A. Diesel Generator set: Cummins Model DSFAB, Tier 3 with PCC2100 PowerCommand
controls.
B. Automatic Transfer Switches: Cummins Model OTPC with Level 2 control (C024).
C. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Cummins Model 0300-5929-02.
2.3 ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor’s basic bid shall include a complete emergency electric power plant and
distribution system as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified. Alternate bids or
alternate equipment will be considered if submitted per requirements of “Supplementary
General Conditions” or Division 1. Contractor shall be held responsible that the alternate
bid submitted is for a complete installation of equipment to produce the same rated KW in
continuous operation and under the same conditions. Contractor shall be further held
responsible for any changes in costs for construction in other trades and crafts in order to
install the alternate equipment and place it in proper operation.
B. Other Manufacturers: Items of equal function, performance, material, and construction,
may be acceptable upon the Engineer’s review from the following manufacturers:
1. Caterpillar
2. Generac Power Systems
3. Kohler Power Systems
2.4 WARRANTY
A. This standby emergency electric power system shall be guaranteed for a period of five (5)
years or 1500 hours from date of acceptance of installation by Owner. Warranty shall
cover both labor and parts for repairs due to faulty operation or mechanical or electrical
failure of system or parts of system including the Automatic Transfer Switch(s).
2.5 RESPONSIBILITY
A. This system shall be built, tested, and shipped by the manufacturer of the alternator, who
has been regularly engaged in the production of the engine-alternator sets and associated
controls for a minimum of ten years, so there is one source of supply and responsibility.
To be classified as a manufacturer, the builder of the generating set must manufacture at
least the engine or the alternator. The manufacturer shall have printed literature and
brochures describing the standard series specified (not a one of a kind fabrication). The
manufacturer shall furnish schematic and wiring diagrams for the engine-alternator set,
automatic transfer switch, remote alarm annunciators, and an interconnecting diagram
showing connections to individual components which constitute the standby power system.
2.6 PERFORMANCE
A. The performance of the entire engine-generator set shall be certified by an independent
testing laboratory as to the set’s full power output rating, electrical stability, and voltage and
frequency regulation.
B. Tests: The performance tests of the generating set series shall be in accordance with
procedures certified by an independent testing laboratory. The manufacturer shall have
successfully tested a prototype of the generating set series offered which shall include:
1. Maximum power level.
2. Maximum motor starting capacity.
3. Structural soundness.
4. Torsigraph analysis per MLD-STD-705B, method 504.2.
5. Fuel consumption.
6. Engine-alternator cooling air flow.
7. Transient response and steady state governing.
8. Alternator temperature rise per NEMA MGI-22.40.
9. Single step load pickup per NFPA 76A-822.
10. Harmonic analysis and voltage waveform deviation per MIL-STD-705B, method
601.4.
11. Three-phase short circuit test for mechanical and electrical strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Entire standby emergency electric power plant and system shall be installed, wired, and
connected in accordance with instructions and directions from manufacturer. Power plant
shall be put into service and made completely operational by manufacturer of power plant
or their authorized representative. A letter of certification to this effect shall be submitted
by manufacturer or his authorized representative to the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and
Engineer. Engine-generator shall be ready for operational service upon completion of
installation.
3.2 TESTS
A. Engine generator shall be run on load test at the site as follows:
1. Generator manufacturer with the Electrical Contractor shall provide load bank, test
equipment, necessary instruments, fuel, and personnel to run the load test.
2. Operate generator set for two (2) hours at 75% of the rated load.
3. Follow above and run immediately with four (4) hours operation at 100% of rated
load.
4. After the first half-hour stabilization period at full load, the following shall be
recorded at fifteen minute intervals:
a. Voltage, amperage and frequency.
b. Fuel pressure, oil pressure and water temperature.
c. Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet.
d. Ambient temperature.
5. Follow above and run immediately with two (2) hours of operation at the Facility’s
actual building load. The Facility’s actual building load would have to be scheduled
with the Owner and tested at a different date and/or time. Make sure to include
after normal business hours i.e. premium time (Sunday) for the actual building load
test. The Generator Manufacturer Technician would have to be present for the
actual building load test.
6. At completion of tests, the main fuel tank shall be filled before final acceptance by
the Owner.
B. Resistance Test: Test the completed grounding system with a meager at the generator
ground bar. Use three point or fall-of-potential method. The generator shall not be
energized if the test shows greater than 15 ohms unless approved by the Engineer.
C. Supply personnel to train Owners personnel in operation and maintenance of the generator
system installed. Training time shall not exceed a total of two (2) hours during normal
working hours.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16200 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide a complete system of electrical service and distributions indicated on the Drawings
and as specified herein. In addition, provide all other basic materials, equipment, and
devices in accordance with other sections of this Specification which are applicable to this
installation. Coordinate all work with the Local Utility Company to provide metering
installation and service in conformance with their requirements and recommendations. It
shall be the Electrical Contractor’s responsibility to comply with the Local Utility Company’s
specifications and requirements. Include in bid and pay to Local Utility Company their
charges to Owner for the installation of their portion of underground secondary service.
B. Underground electric service, distribution center, grounding, transformers, panelboards,
safety switches and fuses.
C. The electrical distribution equipment manufacturer shall provide electrical power system
studies for the following:
1. Short-Circuit Analysis
2. Protective Device Time-Current Coordination Analysis
3. Electrical Contractor shall submit all the feeders data that the manufacturer needs
to perform the studies prior to any of the submittals. Feeder data shall be
submitted to the Engineer prior to the distribution submittal.
4. The electrical distribution equipment manufacturer use the “Estimated Short
Circuit Current Available” at the transformer secondary shown on Food Tech’s
electrical distribution one line diagram, drawing E5.1.
B. Section 16010 Trenching and Backfill
C. Section 16010 Identification and Signs
D. Section 16010 Submittals
E. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
A. Construct equipment to applicable UL standards, provide UL label. Conform to National
Electric Code and local inspection authority.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Provide shop drawings and product data in accordance
with Division 1 for the following:
1. Distribution centers (switchboards)
2. Dry type transformers
3. Panelboards
4. Safety switches
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 11 16200 – Service and Distribution
5. Fuses and spare fuses cabinet (if used)
B. Shop drawings shall consist of:
1. Complete Structural drawings showing:
a. Arrangement
b. Dimensional plan and elevation, front view, back view, and other pertinent
elevation views
c. Conduit entrance locations and dimensions
d. Incoming and outgoing conductor terminator positions
e. Wiring terminal block locations and all other terminal lock locations
f. Neutral ground bus connections
g. Weight of equipment
h. Detail list of nameplate description
2. Base Plan – Show dimensions of base with anchoring recommendations.
3. List all performance data.
C. Completed electrical power system studies shall be bound and submitted to the Engineer
with the distribution equipment submittals.
D. A sketch of the Electrical Room(s) or electrical space(s) laid out with the approved
equipment at ¼” = 1’-0” scale, if layout is different than what is shown on the Drawings.
E. Tests: Submit grounding system resistance test, service conductor and feeder insulation
tests, and connected load tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Distribution Centers: Square D QED-2 Power Style.
B. Dry Type Transformers: Square D Type EE Energy Efficient.
C. Panelboards: Square D, 240V. AC, NQOD type, 480Y/277V. AC, NF bolt-on type or as
noted on Panelboard schedule.
D. Distribution Panelboards: Square D I-Line plug-on type, GE Spectra Series plug-in type,
Siemens Type P4 & P5.
E. Safety switches: Square D heavy duty type. Safety switches for wet location areas shall
be Appleton, Grouse-Hinds, and Mennekes or approved equal.
F. Fuses: Bussmann, motor load; FRN-R/FRS-R or LPN-R/LPS-R, Lighting load; KTN-
R/KTS-R.
2.2 OTHER MANUFACTURERS
A. Items of equal function, performance, material, and construction may be acceptable upon
Engineer’s review from the following manufacturers:
1. Siemens
2. General Electric
3. Eaton
2.3 UNDERGROUND SECONDARY SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Provide the following types of conduit systems:
1. Schedule 40, PVC Conduit, direct burial, for the underground portion of the
service.
2. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit for the sweeps underground and further
extensions above grade.
B. Conductors: See Section of Basic Materials & Methods. Wire and cable shall be new,
shall have size, type of insulation, voltage rating, manufacturer’s identification permanently
marked on the outer covering at regular intervals, and color coded.
C. Duct Spacers: Fabricated plastic, UL approved.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION CENTERS
A. Label by Underwriters Laboratories. Main distribution center shall be “Suitable for use as
Service Equipment.”
B. The Switchboard shall be free-standing, dead front with only front accessibility required.
The framework is to be of code gauge steel, rigidly welded and bolted together to support
all coverplates and component devices during shipment and installation. Vertical section
shall bolt together to form one rigid switchboard.
C. Closure plates shall be furnished with sealing provisions to prevent access to the utility
metering portion of the switchboard by unauthorized personnel.
D. When the switchboard is specified on the drawing to be outdoors type NEMA 3R, provide
rodent barriers. The rodent barrier kit shall consist of a front barrier, two rear barriers,
mounting brackets and covers, two side barriers and mounting hardware.
E. The main lugs shall accept copper and aluminum conductors of size #3/0 to 750 KCMIL.
F. Provide surge protection device (SPD), Square D Model No. TVS4XGA240A, 240KA per
phase, or approved equal for each main distribution center. SPD unit shall be installed and
completely wired by the switchboard manufacturer in the switchboard.
G. Provide phase failure relay and connect to the main breaker. Phase failure relay shall
protect the system from phase loss, phase unbalance, phase reversal and under voltage.
H. Provide compact solid state demand metering unit for the main distribution center as
indicated on one-line diagram. The metering unit shall provide the functions of an
ammeter, voltmeter, ammeter and voltmeter switch, wattmeter, var meter, power factor
meter, frequency meter and watt hour meter in one compact solid state unit. The metering
unit shall be Square D “power monitor model PM –850” or approved equal.
I. Bussing:
1. The switchboard bussing shall be plated copper and of sufficient cross-sectional
area to meet UL Standard 891 on temperature rise. Short circuit current rating
shall be 100,000 Amps minimum or as indicated on the Drawings. All sections
shall be bussed for the full height. The horizontal bus shall be extended on the last
section for future connection to new distribution section.
2. Provide an uninsulated service grounding bus bar, separate from any insulated
neutral bar, for grounding and enclosure, for connecting the grounding electrode
conductor, and other equipment ground conductors. The ground bar shall be an
integrally mounted and braced bus bar. Provide solderless pressure connectors for
all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on all
grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors.
In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all spares and
spaces.
3. The switchboard shall have the same depth throughout all Sections and shall be
approved by the Engineer. The full height of each distribution section shall be
utilized with future spaces.
J. The main disconnecting means shall be digital solid state breaker, true RMS sensing and
rated for 100% load as indicated on the Drawing’s one line diagram.
K. The breaker distribution sections shall comply with the following:
1. All branch/feeder breakers installed in the switchboards shall be UL tested and
certified for series connected ratings of 100,000 RMS SYM Amps minimum or as
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide Current-Limiting Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers for all the
branch/feeder breakers that feed loads other than panelboards or are not part of a
series rating system.
3. Provide handle padlock “HPL” attachment (Locks “ON” or “OFF”) for each
branch/feeder breaker installed in the switchboards.
4. Where spaces for future breakers are shown provide all necessary space and
mounting hardware needed to mount the breaker. The hardware shall be installed
at the factory and require no additional material to add future breaker.
2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. Short Circuit Analysis
1. Calculation of the maximum rms symmetrical three-phase short-circuit current at
each significant location in the electrical system shall be made using a digital
computer and performed by the distribution equipment manufacturer.
2. Appropriate motor short-circuit contribution shall be included at the appropriate
locations in the system so that the computer calculated values represent the
highest short-circuit current the equipment will be subjected to under fault
conditions.
3. A tabular computer printout shall be included which lists the calculated short-circuit
currents, X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interrupting or withstand current
ratings, and notes regarding the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment.
4. The study shall include a computer printout of input circuit data including conductor
lengths, number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation
types, transformer impedances and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other
circuit information as related to the short-circuit calculations.
5. Include a computer printout identifying the maximum available short-circuit current
in rms symmetrical amperes and the X/R ratio of the fault current for each
bus/branch calculation.
6. The system one-line diagram shall be computer generated and will clearly identify
individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable
and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit
current at each bus location and the other information pertinent to the computer
analysis.
7. A comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the
equipment must be provided and include recommendations as appropriate for
improvements to the system.
8. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying pertinent electrical system
conductor, circuit breaker, generator, and other component and system
information in a timely manner to allow the short-circuit analysis to be completed
prior to final installation.
9. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the engineer and
recommendations made for improvements as soon as they are identified.
B. Protective Device Time-Current Coordination Analysis
1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with the aid of computer
software intended for this purpose and shall be performed by the distribution
equipment manufacturer, and will include the determination of settings, ratings, or
types for the overcurrent protective devices supplied.
2. A sufficient number of computer generated log-log plots shall be provided to
indicate the degree of system protection and coordination by displaying the time-
current characteristics of series connected overcurrent devices and other pertinent
system parameters.
3. Computer printouts shall accompany the log-log plots and will contain descriptions
for each of the devices shown, settings of the adjustable devices, the short-circuit
current availability at the device location when known, and device identification
numbers to aid in locating the devices on the log-log plots and the system one-line
diagram.
4. The study shall include a separate, tabular computer printout containing the
suggested device settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective devices, the
equipment where the device is located, and the device number corresponding to
the device on the system one-line diagram.
5. A computer generated system one-line diagram shall be provided which clearly
identifies individual equipment buses, bus numbers, device identification numbers
and the maximum available short-circuit current at each bus when known.
6. A discussion section which evaluates the degree of system protection and service
continuity with overcurrent devices, along with recommendations as required for
addressing system protection or device coordination deficiencies.
7. Significant deficiencies in protection and/or coordination shall be called to the
attention of the Engineer and recommendations made for improvements as soon
as they are identified.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying pertinent electrical system
conductor, circuit breaker, generator, and other component and system
information in a timely manner to allow the time-current analysis to be completed
prior to final installation.
2.6 GROUNDING
A. A. Provide grounding grids consisting of ¾" by 10' cooper clad steel driven rods with
#4/0 bare stranded cooper interconnecting cable.
2.7 TRANSFORMERS
A. All dry type transformers shall be NEMA standard TP1 for energy efficiency unless noted
otherwise. Transformers shall have Class H insulation 150°C. rise above 40°C. ambient
and 220°C. UL listed insulation system, to meet NEMA specifications and requirements or
intended application. Provide conventional type metal housings for indoor service.
Provide encapsulated transformers or rain-tight enclosures for outdoor service. Provide all
necessary supports such as Unistrut hangers, rods, etc., to properly and securely support
transformer in location indicated. Transformers to be of ratings indicated on the Drawings,
with four (4) 2 ½% taps below and two (2) 2 ½% taps above. Transformers shall have 480
Volt, 3 phase, 3 Wire, primary and 120/208 Volts, 3 phase, 4 Wire, 60 Hertz-Wye
connected secondary unless otherwise noted.
B. Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar, for
grounding the enclosure and for connecting the grounding electrode conductor. The
ground bar shall be a separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the
enclosure. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations.
2.8 PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosures
1. Flush or surface mounted complete with panel trim hinged to box with full height
piano style hinge and door.
2. Front Arrangement: Provide piano hinged trim for door on all panelboard and
locking door with flush catch.
3. Tub: Galvanized
4. Keys: Provide two keys for each panel. Make keys interchangeable for panels of
same voltage.
B. 120/208, 277/480, or 480 Volt Panelboards
1. Panelboards: Three phase, 4 wire, solid neutral or 3 wires design with sequence
style bussing and full capacity neutral and ground bus all current carrying parts
shall be copper, composed of an assembly of bolt-in-place type molded case
automatic air circuit breakers with thermal and magnetic trip and trip free position
separate from either ON or OFF positions. Provide interrupting rating as shown on
the Drawings.
2. Where spaces for future breakers are shown provide all necessary space and
mounting hardware needed to mount the breaker. The hardware shall be installed
at the factory and require no additional material to add future breaker.
3. All panelboards 277/480, or 480 Volt short circuit current rating shall be 65,000
Amps minimum or as indicated on the Drawings.
4. All lighting panelboards circuit breakers connected to High Intensity Discharge
(HID) load shall be rated for HID lighting load and shall have UL label.
2.9 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Disconnect switches: Quick-make, quick-break, heavy duty, class R fuse clips where
indicated to be fusible; handle interlock.
B. Three Phase Motor disconnect Switches: Quick-make, quick-break, heavy duty, class R
fuse clips, handle interlock.
C. Enclosure: Provide NEMA 3R where exposed to weather or as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Enclosed, Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle. Provide
normally open mimic contact interlocked with handle position.
E. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position. Provide normally open mimic contact interlocked with handle
position.
2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Distribution Centers: Provide nameplates identifying distribution center together with
voltage, nameplates for each section and nameplates on all main and branch devices with
descriptions indicated on the Drawings.
B. Fusible switchboards: Provide a red plastic laminated plate with white letters at the top of
each section with engraved inscription “CAUTION – REPLACE ONLY WITH IDENTICAL
CURRENT LIMITING FUSE AND SIZE.”
1. Switchboard feeder main breakers, panelboards, and motor control centers:
Provide a red plastic laminated plate with white letters by the feeder main
breakers, panelboards and motor control centers with engraved inscription
“CAUTION – SERIES RATED SYSTEM – IDENTICAL COMPONENT
REPLACEMENT IS REQUIRED.”
C. Transformers: Provide nameplates with descriptions indicated on the Drawings together
with voltage and location of primary feeder, over current device and secondary load
served.
D. Panelboards: Provide nameplates with description indicated on the Drawings together with
location of the feeder, over current protection for panelboard and voltage.
E. Safety Switches: Provide nameplate with description indicated on the Drawings of load
served, motor, transformer, mechanical equipment, etc.
F. Typical Nameplates for Transformers, Safety Switches and Panelboards, examples as
follows.
1. Switchboard(s)
a. MAIN DISTRIBUTION CENTER MDC-A
480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W, 3,000A MB
100,000 A.I.C. RATED
2. Switchboard’s Branch Feeder Devices
a. LIGHTING PANEL HA
ELECTRICAL ROOM
b. SCREW COMPRESSOR
CMS2 250HP
COMPRESSOR ROOM
3. Transformers
a. TRANSFORMER T1 75 KVA
480V PR. 208Y/120V SEC.
FED FROM PANEL HB W/125A CB
FEEDING PANEL LA W/300A MB
b. TRANSFORMER T5 112.5 KVA
480V PR. 208Y/120V SEC.
FED FROM HDD W/175A CB
FEEDING LDC W/400A MB
4. Safety Switches
a. MAIN EMERGENCY SWITCH
FED FROM MDC
b. WATER HEATER
FED FROM PANEL HC
c. EVAP. CONDENSER EC-1A 7½ HP FAN.
FED FROM MCC-B
d. EVAP. CONDENSER EC-1A 5 HP FAN.
FED FROM MCC-B
e. HOT WATER PUMP P-1 7½ HP.
FED FROM MCC-E
f. STANDBY PUMP P-2 7½ HP.
FED FROM MCC-E
5. Panelboards
a. PANEL LA
120/208V 3 Phase 4W 300A MB
FED FROM TRANSFORMER T1
b. PANEL LB
120/208V 3 Phase 4W 225A
FED THROUGH PANEL LA W/200A CB
c. PANEL LD
120/208V 3 Phase 4W 225A
FED FROM LDC W/200A CB
d. DISTRIBUTION PANEL LDC
120/208V 3 Phase 4W 400A MB
FED FROM TRANSFORMER T5
e. LIGHTING PANEL HA
277/480V 3 Phase 4W 225A
FED FROM MDC
6. Distribution Panelboard Feeder Breakers
a. LIGHTING PANEL HA
ELECTRICAL ROOM
b. POWER PANEL HD
BATTERY CHARGING ROOM
c. DISTRIBUTION PANEL HDC
RECEIVING DOCK OFFICES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE

A. Provide underground raceway and conductors from terminal pole or from pad mounted
transformer to metering transformers and meter if separately mounted on wall and then to
main distribution center of directly to metering transformers where mounted in main
distribution center. Bury raceways minimum 30” below finished grade. Tie down conduit
prior to concrete pour. Provide 6” wide yellow plastic band imprinted with “Electric Below”
and place 12” above entire length of underground raceway. Extend service conductors up
to and (make) leave slack for connections to secondary terminals of transformers by Local
Utility Company. Verify location of terminal pole or pad mounted transformer before
installation of raceways. Provide sleeves where conduits pass through foundation walls.
Make all secondary service connections, including metering transformers, main distribution
switchgear and terminations in pad mounted transformer. Provide necessary lugs, bus
extensions, etc., as required to make connections to transformer.
B. Slope service to drainage point.
C. Terminate service conduit in main panel with grounding bushing. Make ground connection
from bushing to service disconnect ground bus.
D. All service conduits shall be sealed inside with removable putty at both ends, at the
transformer and at the switchboard to prevent rodents or insect pests from entering the
plant through the conduits.
E. Terminate service conduit at pad mount transformer with grounding bushings. Make
ground connection from bushing to transformer housing or ground bus.
F. Insulation Tests: Refer to 16050: Basic Materials and Methods for procedures for
conducting insulation tests.
3.2 DISTRIBUTION CENTERS
A. Install level and plumb on a housekeeping pad.
B. All bus and terminal bolted connections shall be made using a bolt, two flat washers, a nut
and a lock washer. Final tightening torque shall be applied in the field. It is recommended
that the full torque pressure be applied on the nut at the factory and checked in the field.
C. All bus joints shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with manufacturer’s standard
procedure. An oxide inhibiting joint compound as recommended by the manufacturer shall
be applied before installing or tightening of bolts.
D. Low Voltage Service and Distribution Tests
1. With all lighting and equipment turned on (as much as is practicable), take load
measurements at the main service and for all feeders leaving the main distribution
switchboards or panelboards. Take readings phase by phase.
2. Make an insulation resistance test on all phase bussing within the Main
Distribution Center with all fuses in the place and switches or circuit breakers
open.
3. Carefully inspect Distribution Centers to insure that bus structure cable
connections (both factory and field) are electrically and mechanically tight and
secure and that all non-current-carrying metal parts such as housing, frames,
conduit raceways, etc., are securely grounded.
E. Affix nameplates to top of each vertical section and on each main or branch device.
3.3 SERVICE GROUNDING
A. Main Electrical Room Grounding Grid: Use compression fittings for cable connections and
connections to ground rods.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: From ground grid, building steel, and water service pipe,
provide one bare ground conductor in conduit to ground bus within switchboard, to neutral
of switchboard, and to non-current carrying parts. Install the conductor to permit the
shortest and most direct path.
C. Bonding Jumpers: Provide green insulation or markings, attach to grounding bushings on
conduit, to lugs on boxes, and other enclosures. Connect to neutral only at service neutral
bar, make separate lug.
D. Resistance Test: Test the completed grounding system with a meager at the service
ground bar. Use three point or fall of potential method. The service shall not be energized
if the test shows greater than 15 ohms unless approved by the Engineer.
3.4 TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry type transformers shall be installed and connected for low sound level. Provide 12”
long liquid-tight flexible conduit connections from conduit to transformer except where
external case is isolated by factory installed internal isolators. Mount transformer so that
sound transmission between transformer and wall or mounting brackets, or floor is
reduced to a minimum; provide VMC-Korfund “Elasti-rib,” or equal for this purpose. Any
transformer causing objectionable sound will be required to be replaced. (VMC-Korfund
113 Main St., P.O. Box 270, Bloomingdale, NJ 07403, (973) 838-1780 FAX (973) 492-
8430).
B. Transformers shall be floor mounted unless otherwise indicated. Ceiling, wall or column
mounted transformers shall be suspended with a minimum of two strut or channel iron
trapeze supports and four ½” all thread steel rods (one at each corner). Provide additional
supports as required. Rods shall extend and be secured to structural building system
above. The method of securing to structure shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
installation. Provide lateral bracing to adjacent wall or structure.
C. Grounding: Provide electrode conductor ground wire to the nearest building structural
steel column with ground rod and to a cold water pipe. Submit resistance tests for each
dry type transformer installed. The transformer shall not be energized if the test shows
greater than 15 ohms unless approved by the Engineer.
D. Provide 12” minimum clearance from walls and objects to all sides of a dry type
transformer to assure free and substantial air flow through the case.
E. Affix nameplates to outside, top, front of transformer enclosures.
3.5 PANELBOARDS
A. Installation
1. Provide mounting brackets, busbar drillings, and filler pieces for unused spaces.
2. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating
breaker size and loads controlled description by each circuit. Odd circuit numbers
shall be on the left column and even circuit numbers shall be on the right side
column. Submit six copies of typewritten directories for Engineers review prior to
installation. When directories are final they shall be submitted with the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
3. Provide nameplates for power and distribution panels (Type I-Line) without doors.
Attach nameplate with screws. Also provide the panelboard schedule in plastic
cover and attach to the side of panelboard enclosure.
4. Mount panelboards 6’-6” above finished floor to top breaker handle, or as shown
on the Drawings.
5. Provide two (2) spare ¾” conduits to each flush or surface mounted panelboard
stub up into ceiling space or at bar joists level in open ceilings. Turn 90° and cap.
Label conduits “spare” near the panelboard.
6. Additional circuits on panelboards to those shown on the Drawings shall not be
field connected, thus protecting in evenly balanced loads on each phase.
7. Affix nameplate at outside top of door trim.
8. Measure the line currents on all panelboards and distribution equipment. If the
phase currents differ by more than 10%, the Contractor shall balance the load by
transferring the excess load from the heavy leg to the light leg.
3.6 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Install motor and circuit disconnect as recommended by manufacturer and as required by
Code.
B. Affix nameplate to front of cover.
3.7 FUSES
A. Install fuses with labels facing door for easy identification. Affix labels, furnished by
manufacturer, to outside of doors of all fusible switches and fused safety switches
indicating correct type and ampacity of fuse to be used for replacement.
B. Provide a metal cabinet 30”H x 24”W x 12”D to store spare fuses in each main electrical
switchboard room. Furnish minimum three (3) spares of each type and size installed.
Spare fuse cabinet shall be Bussmann Cat. #SFC. No substitutions will be allowed.
3.8 LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Locate pullboxes, panelboards, control push buttons, terminal cabinets, safety switches,
and such other apparatus as may require periodic maintenance, operation, or inspection,
so that they are easily accessible. If such items are shown on the plans in locations which
are found to be inaccessible, the Engineer must be advised of the situation before work is
advanced to the point where extra costs will be involved.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16250 GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in conjunction
with a grounding system as indicated on the Drawing and specified herein.
A. Section 16010 General Requirements.
B. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods.
C. Section 16200 Service and Distribution.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s specifications for products and
methods to be used.
1.4 TESTS
A. Measure ground grid resistance with earth test megger and install additional ground rods
and conductors as required on other sections of these specifications until resistance to
ground complies with these specifications and with the NEC requirements as maximum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and testing of: ground rods,
ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchors, supports, Exothermic Weld
(CADWELD) materials and equipment, and other materials as required for a complete
installation.
B. Provide copper bonded ground rod 10 feet long, ¾” inches diameter and 13 mil of copper
as a minimum or as indicated on the drawings. Ground rod shall be of carbon steel core
with an electrolytic coating of copper deposited over a layer of nickel.
C. Provide ground cables composed of stranded bare copper of 98% conductivity encased in
nonmetallic conduit above grade. Cable to be buried below frost level, but not less than
12” below grade. Install as required to provide sufficient mechanical protection.
D. All copper to copper and copper to steel connections of #6 AWG and larger shall be made
with the CADWELD Process except as noted in Item D, below.
E. Provide Burndy Corp., Type NE, Thomas & Betts Co., Inc. Catalog No. 3951 or approved
equal ground fittings for bonding ground cable to encasing metal conduit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250, local codes as specified
herein, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Install ground cables continuous between connections. Splices will not be allowed except
where indicated on the Drawings. Connections made by the CADWELD Process are not
considered splices. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, building walls, etc.,
and are not in metallic enclosures, provide the sleeves of approved nonmetallic material.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 16250 – Grounding

3.2 SPECIAL SYSTEMS GROUNDING
A. Fire Alarm and Detection Control Panel.
1. Provide one No. 4 AWG THW in ½” conduit and bolt to nearest column.
B. Telephone.
1. Provide one No. 4 AWG THW from each telephone equipment room and bolt to
the main distribution center service entrance ground or as noted on the Drawings.
Leave 4” pigtail at telephone board.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work under this Section with the work under other divisions of these
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 16250 – Grounding

SECTION 16300 REFRIGERATION/MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND
CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide complete power wiring as indicated on the electrical, mechanical and refrigeration
Drawings to all mechanical and refrigeration equipment. Review the mechanical and
refrigeration drawings and make sure you have provided the necessary starters,
disconnects and power to all of their equipment. Request mechanical and refrigeration
product shop drawings from the Construction Manager prior to any work.
B. Provide a completely new combination breaker/magnetic starter unit of sizes, types and
ampacities as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 16010 Identification and Signs
B. Section 16010 Submittals
C. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct equipment to applicable UL and NEMA standards,
provide UL label. Conform to National Electric Code and local inspection authority.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Product Data: Provide product data in accordance with Division 1 for the following:
1. Motor starting switches
1.5 REFRIGERATION/MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refrigeration/Mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by others, including
motors, integral wiring, etc., except as noted in Equipment Schedule or on the Drawings.
Electrical Contractor provides all branch circuits, equipment terminal connections and
other items of equipment, materials and labor as indicated by the Equipment Schedule.
Install motor disconnecting means of proper size where required by code.
B. Consult the Division 15 Drawings and Specifications for their requirements.
C. Miscellaneous Equipment: Where outlets are indicated for miscellaneous equipment
requiring electric power or control provide wire, conduit etc. and make all connections to
same, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Division 15 Drawings and Specifications.
Provide all power circuits, wiring, conduit, outlets, etc. and provide final electrical
connection to all equipment. Provide means for interlock between mechanical equipment
and Fire Alarm System.
1.6 CONTROLS
A. In general, pneumatic-electric switches, float switches, control panels, motorized valves,
solenoids, etc., will be furnished and installed in place, wired and connected by other
divisions unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 16300 – Refrigeration/Mechanical Equip. and Connections
A. Manufacturer and Type for combination Motor Starters: NEMA rated type manufactured by
Square D.
1. Allen-Bradley
2. Siemens
3. General Electric
4. Cutler Hammer
2.3 MOTOR STARTING SWITCH
A. Motor starting switch with thermal overload relay shall be Square D Class 2510 Type “F” or
approved equal.
B. Motor starting switch without thermal overload protection shall be Square D Class 2510
Type “K” or approved equal.
2.4 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates with descriptions indicated on the Drawings together with indication of
location of motor, overcurrent device and loads served by branch devices.
B. Typical Nameplates for Safety Switches and Enclosure(s), example as follows.
1. EXHAUST FAN EF-3 2HP
ENGINE ROOM ROOF
FED FROM PANEL HD
2. EXHAUST FAN EF-1 1.5HP
FORKLIFT CHARGING ROOM
FED FROM PANEL HB
2.5 MOTORS
A. All motors furnished under Division 15 shall be single phase, 277 or 120 volt when less
than ½ HP and shall be 208 or 480 volt, three phase for ½ HP and larger, unless
specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Single phase motor starters shall be of the manual switch type with thermal overload.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Affix nameplate to top of each safety switch or starter unit as indicated on the drawings or
equipment schedules.
3.2 MOTORS
A. Complete a list of all mechanical equipment indicating load, voltage, phases, etc., at
beginning of job prior to installation of electrical services. Advise Engineer of changes and
adjust to meet requirements.
B. Install conduit, wire manual motor protection switches or magnetic motor protection
switches and make power or control connection to mechanical equipment.
C. Heaters for overloads in all starters shall be furnished and installed to suit individual motor
nameplate ratings.
3.3 TESTING, START-UP AND INSPECTION
A. During the course of this work, test all circuits for grounds and shorts and eliminate any
found.
B. Provide any tests required by inspection authorities having jurisdiction.
C. This Contractor only shall energize any electrical work when placed on line for the first
time, and until proven satisfactory and correct, shall continue to do so.
D. When an Electrical Contractor is involved with a motor start-up, the
Refrigeration/Mechanical Contractor, the Owner’s representative and/or Engineer shall
observe the start-up and shall have in attendance other representatives he deems
necessary. Proper rotation of the motor shall be checked at that time.
E. This Contractor shall replace defective work at no cost to the Owner.
F. Should a motor or motor-driven device furnished by the Owner or in another Contract be
damaged by this Contractor’s faulty installation or lack of protective devices during testing,
the Contractor shall replace the damaged motors or motor-driven devices, including
installation, at no cost to the Owner or other Contractor.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16345 FREEZER FLOOR WARMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes a UL Listed and CSA Certified freezer frost heave prevention heat
tracing system consisting of self-regulating heating cable, connection kits and electronic
controller.
A. Section 03300 – Cast-In Place Concrete
B. Section 16050 – Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 16200 – Service and Distribution
D. Section 16250 – Grounding
A. System for preventing frost heave in freezers with temperature control, monitoring, and
integrated ground-fault circuit protection.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Heating cable data sheet
2. UL, CSA approval certificates for freezer frost heave prevention
3. Freezer Frost Heave Prevention design guide
4. System Installation and Operation manual
5. System installation details
6. Connection kits and accessories data sheet
7. Controller/Power Panel data sheet
8. Controller/Power Panel wiring diagram
A. Manufacturers Qualifications
1. Manufacturer to show minimum of ten (10) years of experience in manufacturing
electric self-regulating heating cables.
2. Manufacturer is ISO-9001 registered.
3. Manufacturer to provide products comply with UL 515, CSA 22.2 No 130-03 and
IEEE 515.1 requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications
1. System installer shall have a complete understanding of product and product
literature from manufacturer or authorized representative prior to installation.
Electrical connections shall be performed by a licensed electrician.
C. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 16345 – Freezer Floor Warming
1. The system (heating cable, connection kits, and controller) shall be UL Listed and
CSA Certified for freezer frost heave prevention.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in Article
100 of NFPA 70 National Electrical Code by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
(NRTL), and marked for intended use.
A. General Requirements: Deliver, store and handle products to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminates or other causes.
B. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver products to site in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers’ labels identifying the
following:
1. Product and Manufacturer
2. Length/Quantity
3. Lot Number
4. Installation and Operation Manual
5. MSDS (if applicable)
C. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Store the heating cable in a clean, dry location with a temperature range 0°F (-
18°C) to 140°F (60°C).
2. Protect the heating cable from mechanical damage.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Warranty
1. Manufacturer shall make available a ten (10) year limited warranty for heating
cables and components. Manufacturer shall also provide one (1) year warranty for
all heat trace controllers.
2. Contractor shall submit to owner the results of all installation tests required by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Contract Documents are based on manufacturer and products named below to establish a
standard of quality.
B. Basis of Design
1. Basis of Design Product Selections
a. Manufacturer
(1) Manufacturer shall have more than ten (10) years of experience
with manufacture & installation self-regulating heating cables.
(2) Manufacturer shall provide UL and CSA approval certificates for
freezer frost heave prevention.
b. Freezer Frost Heave Prevention System
(1) Self-regulating heating cable
(2) Connection kits and accessories
(3) Digital controller
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish heat tracing system for freezer frost heave
prevention from a single manufacturer.
B. The system (heating cable, connection kits, and controller) shall be UL Listed and CSA
Certified for freezer frost heave prevention. No parts of the system may be substituted or
exchanged.
C. The freezer frost heave prevention system shall have a design, installation and operating
manual.
2.3 PRODUCTS
A. Self-Regulating Heating Cable
1. Heating cable shall be self-regulating heating cable manufactured by Pentair,
Thermon, Chromalox Heat Trace Products, or approved equal.
a. Model Numbers (respective)
(1) Raychem RaySol-2 (208 – 277 V)
(2) Thermon FLX 8-2 (208 – 277 V)
(3) Chromalox CWM-12-2C (208 - 277 V)
(4) Heat Trace Products 2700 Series (208 – 277 V)
2. The heating cable shall consist of a continuous core of conductive polymer that is
radiation crosslinked, extruded between two nickel-plated copper bus wires that
varies its power output in response to temperature changes.
3. The heating cable shall have a modified polyolefin inner jacket and a tinned-
copper braid to provide a ground path and enhance the cables ruggedness.
4. The heating cable shall have a fluoropolymer outer jacket for enhanced
mechanical and chemical protection.
5. The heating cable shall operate on line voltages of 277 volts without the use of
transformers.
6. The outer jacket of the heating cable shall have the following markings:
a. Heating cable model number
b. Agency listings
c. Meter mark
d. Lot/Batch ID
B. Heating Cable Connection Kits
1. Manufacturer shall provide power connection and end seal kits compatible with
selected heating cable.
C. Control Methodology
1. Single Circuit Local Digital Controller
a. Heating cable manufacturer shall provide a local digital controller with
built-in ground fault protection device compatible with selected heating
cable.
b. Digital controller shall be capable of supporting up to two (2) RTD
temperature sensors per control point. Leads can be extended using 18
AWG, 3-wire, shielded cable.
c. Enclosure type shall be Type 4X fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP).
d. Digital control system can be configured for line-sensing and ambient
sensing.
e. Digital controller shall be capable of operating with supply voltages from
100 V to 277 V.
f. Digital controller will have a built-in self-test feature to verify proper
functionality of heating cable system.
g. The following variables will be monitored by the digital controller:
(1) Temperature
(2) Ground-fault
(3) Current draw
(4) Power consumption
(5) Associated alarms
h. Digital controller shall have c-CSA-us approvals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, installer shall be familiar
with installing heat-trace cable and equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations in accordance with Installation and
Operation manual.
B. Install electric heating cable according to the drawings and the manufacturer’s instructions.
The installer shall be responsible for providing a complete functional system, installed in
accordance with applicable national and local requirements.
C. Install the cable in minimum ¾” conduit.
D. Connection of all electrical wiring shall be according to Section 16050 "Basic Materials and
Methods."
E. Grounding of controller shall be performed according to Section 16250 "Grounding.”
A. Field Testing and Inspections
1. The system shall be commissioned in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Installation and Operation manual.
2. The heating cable circuit integrity shall be tested using a 2500-Vdc megohmmeter
at the following intervals. Minimum acceptable insulation resistance shall be 1000
megohms.
a. Before installing the heating cable
b. After installing connection kits
c. Prior to initial start-up (commissioning)
d. As part of the regular system maintenance
3. The technician shall verify that the controller control parameters are set to the
application requirements.
4. All commissioning results will be recorded and presented to the owner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16500 LIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all luminaires and lamps complete with all
necessary supports, fittings, hangers, etc. All luminaires shall be installed in a neat and
workmanlike manner.
B. The Contractor shall complete and submit the “Lighting Application” for new construction to
local energy incentive programs. The complete application(s) shall be submitted to Food
Tech, Inc., for review and approval prior to submitting to being submitted to the Power
Company or City. Make sure to visit their website for the latest application that is applicable
for the project. Review and apply for other local energy incentive programs that may apply
for this project.
B. Section 16010 General Requirements
C. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
D. Section 16525 Occupancy Sensors
A. Provide complete systems for interior and exterior lighting including all luminaires and
lamps as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product data in accordance with Division 1 for the following:
1. Luminaires
2. Ballast / Driver: complete manufacturer’s technical data for LED and fluorescent
lamps. Attached with each luminaire and specific ballast / driver highlighted.
3. Lamp/LED: complete manufacturer’s technical data for all lamps. Attached with
each luminaire and specific lamp highlighted.
4. Luminaire cut sheets shall include photometric data.
5. Submit mounting hardware and accessories details for each luminaire.
6. Submit electronic IES photometric file(s) for the luminaires noted on the luminaire
schedule.
7. The complete specifications for the integral occupancy sensors that are furnished
with the luminaires.
8. Lighting Energy Incentive Applications.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for the following
photometric data by all acceptable manufacturers specified including the ones listed on the
luminaire schedule.
1. Outdoor Lighting: Submit manufacturer’s computer printout photometric data on
maintained footcandles using point to point method on the site plan. Scale shall
not be less than 1” = 30’-0”. Point to point footcandle levels shall be printed on
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 6 16500 – Lighting System

one drawing.
2. Indoor lighting: Submit manufacturer’s computer printout photometric data on
maintained footcandles using point to point method. Scale shall not be less than
1/16” = 1’-0”. Provide horizontal and vertical surface footcandle printout studies for
the following areas:
a. 45ºF Dock
b. 34ºF Cooler
Contact Engineer with any questions regarding room characteristics prior to
performing calculations.
C. The above information shall be submitted as one package with all luminaire drawings and
data as described above by this Contractor. If the package is not complete, it will be
rejected and returned to the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish all luminaires of type, kind and with number of lamps as indicated in the Luminaire
Schedule, on the Drawings, and specified herein.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (LUMINAIRES)
A. Acceptable manufacturers of individual luminaires shall be as indicated on Luminaire
Schedule on the Drawings. Manufacturers listed on the luminaire schedule would have to
submit the complete photometric data listed in the specification submittals herein.
A. Luminaires of equal function, performance, energy efficiency, lamp type, material grade
and construction to the specified luminaire in the Luminaire Schedule may be acceptable
upon Engineer’s review.
B. If an alternate lighting package is proposed, it shall be submitted in addition to the one
specified. This Contractor shall review the other manufacturer’s luminaires and submit as
an equal product alternate. If considered equal products are not approved, this Contractor
shall be responsible to find equal luminaire or provide specific luminaire at no cost to the
Owner. The delivery delay, if any, for submitting not equal products shall be this
Contractor’s responsibility.
C. Other Lighting Manufacturers:
1. Cooper Lighting; Lumark, Invue, Metalux, Sure-Lites
2. Holophane; Indoor, Outdoor and emergency lighting
3. Hubbell Lighting; Hubbell Industrial, Spaulding / Kim Lighting, Columbia, Dual-Lite
4. Philips; Day-Brite, Gardco, McPhilben
5. Simkar: Visionaire, H.E. Williams, Emergi-Lite
6. WideLite: Lightolier
2.4 LAMPS
A. Provide incandescent, LED and fluorescent lamps of type, size, and color as indicated in
the Specifications, on the Drawings, and in the Luminaire Schedule for all luminaires.
Verify that the lamp specified will fit and properly operate with the indicated luminaires.
Verify with manufacturer of the luminaire that lamp specified will produce photometrics

intended from the fixture.
1. Unless otherwise noted, all incandescent and tungsten-halogen lamps shall be
furnished at a rating of 130 volts.
2. Incandescent and tungsten-halogen lamps shall not be operated, other than for
initial testing, prior to final inspection.
3. T8 lamps shall have an average rated life of 30,000 hours, minimum 3,100 lumens
and 82 CRI unless otherwise noted.
4. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be single, double or triple tube as described in
the luminaire schedule. Lamps shall have four (4) pin bases for operation on
electronic ballasts, a minimum color temperature of 3,500K and a color rendering
index of 82 CRI.
B. Lamps shall comply with applicable ANSI standards.
C. Lamp color coordinates shall follow the proposed IEC/ANSI color standards regardless of
country of manufacturer.
D. Lamps shall contain cathodes designed for specific operation on United States ballast
operating systems (instant and rapid start) regardless of country of manufacturer.
E. Lamp Warranty:
1. The Contractor’s warranty shall cover replacement of lamps for 90 days after the
date of acceptance of installation by the Owner including the luminaires used
during construction.
2. The lamp manufacturer warranty shall cover the lamps for two (2) year minimum
against defects and failure.
3. Electrical Contractor shall have written approval from the owner in order to use
new luminaires during construction. If approval has been granted, the Electrical
Contractor shall be responsible to clean the luminaires and lamps and furnish and
install new lamps if they are used over six (6) months prior to the owner project
acceptance.
2.5 BALLASTS
A. All luminaires shall be furnished with ballasts which are compatible with the luminaire and
with ballasts which comply with the requirements of this Specification for the environment
in which the luminaire will be installed.
1. Warranty: All ballasts shall be covered by a three (3) year warranty minimum
against defects and failure by the manufacturer. Warranty shall include payment
for normal labor costs for replacement of in-warranty ballasts.
2. The Contractor and his supplying luminaire manufacturer shall be responsible for
the proper selection of ballasts for operation in their environments.
B. Fluorescent Ballasts
1. Performance Requirements
a. Flicker: Ballast shall operate lamps at a frequency above 20 kHz and
lamps shall have no detectable flicker.
b. Power Factor: Ballast shall have input power factor above 97%.
c. Harmonic Distortion: Ballast shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
of 20% unless specifically noted otherwise.

d. Current Crest Factor: Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.7 or less.
e. Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF): BEF, relative light output per watt
consumed, shall be at least 10% greater than a CBM certified
electromagnetic ballast for the same application or as specified on the
luminaire schedule.
f. Lamp Life: Ballast shall provide lamp starting conditions and parameters
consistent with lamp manufacturer’s recommendations and shall provide
full rated lamp life under normal conditions.
g. Starting Temperatures: The electronic ballast shall provide for a minimum
lamp starting temperature of 50°F to –20°F depending on ballast model
and installation conditions.
h. Ballast Output: Ballast output shall be protected against lamp rectification
or shorted output leads.
i. Case Temperature: Ballast shall have a maximum case temperature
rating of 70°C.
2. Regulatory Requirements
a. UL & CSA Listing: The electronic ballast shall be Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) listed, Class p, Type 1. CSA certified (where
applicable).
b. EMI/RFI: Ballast shall meet FCC standard for EMI/RFI (FCC 47CFR Part
18 Non-consumer), ensuring suitably for both commercial and industrial
installations.
c. Efficiency Standards: Ballast shall comply with all applicable state and
federal efficiency standards.
d. Transient Protection and Harmonic Distortion: Ballast shall comply with
applicable ANSI and IEEE standards for harmonic distortion and line
voltage transient protection.
e. Sound Rating: Ballast shall have audible noise rating of Class A.
3. Electronic Ballasts that operate T8 fluorescent lamps:
a. Ballast Factor: Ballast factors at nominal voltage shall be as specified in
the luminaire schedule, if not specified use the following options:
1. Normal Light Output ballasts, (N Series): 0.90 ballast factor.
b. Ballast starting method & circuitry shall be as indicated on the luminaire
schedule or as follows:
(1) Programmed Rapid Start: Ballast shall operate lamps in series.
Ballast shall digitally control lamp starting to maintain
manufacturers rated lamp life under any lamp starting cycles.
Ballast shall have end-of-lamp-life protection.
4. Other Manufacture’s Warranty:
a. Warranty: The lamp and ballast shall be covered by a combination
lamp/ballast warranty. Covered ballasts shall carry a five-year warranty
and include a nominal replacement labor allowance. Covered lamps shall
carry a 2-½ year, (10,000-hour) warranty or 3 years, (12,000 hour for
24,000-hour T8 lamps) and shall be manufactured by the same company
as the ballast.

b. Group Re-lamp Warranty: If facility group re-lamps at end of lamp
warranty period, the new lamps shall be covered under a new a 2-½ year,
(10,000-hour) warranty or 3 years, (12,000 hour for 24,000-hour T8
lamps).
2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (LAMPS AND BALLASTS)
A. Lamps: Provide lamps manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, General Electric or Philips.
B. Fluorescent Ballasts: Provide electronic and energy saving ballasts in all fluorescent
luminaires as specified in Luminaire Schedule. Osram/Sylvania, Advance, Magnetek
Universal, Jefferson, or Valmont.
2.7 LUMINAIRE ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All luminaires shall be free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other irregularities. Lenses
shall be free of cracks, chips, and discolorations.
B. All metal surfaces of luminaires shall be bonderized or galvanized after fabrication and
treated to provide rust inhibiting and finish coat adherence properties.
C. All luminaires installed, where exposed to weather and/or cold temperature shall be
weatherproof, of the low temperature type, and suitable for efficient operation at the
temperatures and conditions encountered. Provide low temperature ballasts for
fluorescent and LED luminaires where mounted in ambient temperatures below 50°F.
D. Do not operate luminaires with low temperature ballasts until the temperature of the space
has reached designed levels. Failure to comply with this will result in this contractor
replacing all lamps and sleeves at no cost to the Owner.
E. Recessed luminaires: Only IC labeled recessed lights allowing direct contact with
insulating materials may be used in areas separating conditioned and unconditioned
spaces.
F. Fluorescent ballasts shall be Class P designed to operate continuously in all locations
where installed.
G. Occupancy Sensors
1. Provide the latest manufacturers sensor model that will serve best for its
application and location of this project. The manufacturers shall have the
complete responsibility of providing the proper sensors for each application
specified and study the location of each sensor.
2. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer, or his authorized representative,
shall be well trained and qualified for the layout and location of components
inspection and troubleshooting.
3. Time: The delayed “OFF” time is preset from most manufacturers at 10 or 15
minutes. Electrical Contractor or the occupancy sensor manufacturer shall adjust
each sensor to the minutes specified in the luminaire schedule for LED lighting
and 20 minutes for all fluorescent luminaires unless noted otherwise on the
drawings. Do not use any other time delay settings without the Engineer’s
approval because it will affect the lamp life and the lamp warranty.
4. Provide a low temperature sensor in the Freezer and other refrigerated areas as
recommended by the manufacturer. The low temperature sensor shall operate in
the range of -40 to 0°C.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS

A. General Lighting: Installation of general luminaires shall conform to the following:
1. Completely connect and securely mount all luminaires. Provide all additional
supports and hangers as may be necessary to securely fasten and support all
luminaires to ceiling or structure.
2. All luminaires mounted on pressed steel boxes shall be supported by means of
luminaire studs.
3. Clean luminaires and lamps, remove construction dirt, dust, paint, etc., and leave
luminaires and lamps in first-class condition upon completion of work.
4. Occupancy sensor Time: The delayed “OFF” time is preset from most
manufacturers at 10 or 15 minutes. Electrical Contractor or the occupancy sensor
manufacturer shall adjust each sensor to the minutes specified in the luminaire
schedule for LED lighting and 20 minutes for all fluorescent luminaires unless
noted otherwise on the drawings. Do not use any other time delay settings without
the Engineer’s approval because it will affect the lamp life and the lamp warranty.
5. All luminaires shall be delivered to the job site in cardboard boxes designed to
prevent injury to luminaires in transit.
6. Where two or more 48” fluorescent luminaires are indicated in continuous row, a
96” chassis may be used; lamps shall remain 48”.
7. Conduit installation and support on the roof deck indoor and outdoor is not
acceptable.
8. Contractor shall certify to Owner that the fluorescent luminaires provided on the
project will operate satisfactorily and continuously with Class P ballasts when
installed under the conditions indicated on the Design Drawings and the ambient
temperatures encountered therein. Ballasts and luminaires, where installed, shall
produce a minimum possible sound level.
B. Recessed Luminaires: Installation of recessed luminaires shall conform to the following:
1. Provide separate junction box above ceiling near luminaire and wire to luminaire in
flexible conduit not longer than 6’.
2. Provide plaster frames for recessed luminaires installed in a plaster ceiling.
3. Openings cut in ceiling for recessed luminaires shall be completely concealed
when luminaire trim is installed. There shall be no light leaks between luminaire
trim and ceiling after luminaire is installed.
4. Review ceiling construction as designed and provide all additional supports and
hanging devices necessary to properly install luminaires in type of ceiling installed.
C. Outdoor Luminaires: When outdoor luminaires are adjustable, they shall be field adjusted
at night for best lighting distribution to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer.
D. Immediately prior to occupancy, clean all lamps, lens and fixtures, to the Engineer’s and
Owner’s satisfaction.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Fire Alarm and Detection System
B. Provide all labor, materials, parts, equipment, and services to complete Fire Alarm System
as shown on, and/or reasonably implied by the Drawings.
A. Section 16010 General Requirements
B. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 15700 Sprinkler Systems
D. Section 15640 Automatic Controls
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Installation subject to NFPA 72, Factory Mutual (FM), Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA) and to approval, inspection, and test of applicable regulatory agency.
2. State Laws
3. Local Ordinances
4. Provide equipment and material constructed to UL, Factory Mutual (FM), NFPA
Standards and compatible with the integrated fire alarm system. Provide UL
labels.
B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The manufacturer or his authorized representative shall
confirm that the supplier is within reasonable distance of the project site and stocks a full
compliment of parts and offers service during normal working hours on all equipment to be
furnished, and that the agency will supply parts without delay and at a reasonable cost.
C. Installer’s Qualifications: The installer shall be the manufacturer’s authorized local
distributor for the equipment furnished. All work shall be performed by competent
workmen, factory trained in the work involved.
A. Furnish and install fire alarm system. Supervised, addressable non-coded annunciated,
closed circuit, 24 volt D.C. and stand by battery.
B. The act of operating any manual alarm station, automatic detector, or the activation of the
sprinkler system main alarm check valve or water flow device shall cause:
1. Supervised fire alarm horns to sound continuously, and flash strobes.
2. Indicate the zone or device in alarm at the fire alarm panel and remote
annunciator.
3. Signal will be transmitted to Fire Department by digital automatic dialer and
communicator via communication lines.
OR
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 6 16721 – Fire Alarm System
4. Signal will be transmitted to Fire Department by the fire alarm box and a new fire
department cable line and connection.
C. Operating power failure, low battery voltage, or opens on the station circuits, the horn
circuits, or wires connecting the panel to the Fire Station shall cause the audible trouble
signal to sound and the trouble lamps to glow until the circuits are restored to normal.
Restoring the circuits to normal after the silencing switch has been operated shall cause
the lamp to extinguish and the audible signal to resound until the switch is restored to
normal.
D. Closure of the tamper switch on the main sprinkler shutoff valve shall result in “Trouble
Indication.”
E. In the event of a commercial power interruption the entire system shall automatically
transfer to the emergency standby battery source.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. Shop drawings and
product data shall consist of:
1. Indicate system components, location, and provide complete floor plan wiring
system showing conductor routings and quantities, and connection details. This
information shall be submitted on 1” = 30’-0” scale building floor plans. No other
systems shall be included on these plans and shall be prepared by the
manufacturer’s engineers or licensed installer.
2. Submit a complete one-line riser diagram showing all the devices, signal circuits,
initiating loops(s) or zones, etc.
3. Submit manufacturer’s wiring diagrams for each device connected to the fire alarm
system including zone and signal module, flow and tamper switch, pull station,
smoke, thermal and duct detector etc. Generic or typical wiring diagrams will not
be accepted. The above diagrams shall be submitted and be part of the floor plan
shop drawing set.
4. Submit fire alarm control panel cabinet interior layout showing all modules, main
boards, batteries, etc.
5. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions including outlet box or back box
requirements for each piece of equipment.
6. Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, and
maintenance and repair data.
7. Submit verification of system operation.
8. Submit battery size calculations.
9. Submit signal circuit load calculations with one line riser diagram.
10. Submit graphic annunciator shop Drawings and Specifications.
11. Electronic file of the floor plan(s) is available upon request.
12. Linear heat detection system.
B. Furnish complete “as-built drawings” of the system as finally installed. Shop drawings and
the contract document drawings shall be kept up to record during the progress of the work.
C. Furnish complete Operations and Maintenance Manuals according to Division 1
describing, in detail including part numbers, the operation and maintenance of the system.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written guarantee for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance for
first beneficial use whichever is first, against defective materials, design workmanship, and
improper adjustment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. The catalog numbers for the following products are manufactured by Gamewell/FCI unless
otherwise noted. All devices shall be red:
1. Fire alarm control panel (FACP), E3 series with 250 addressable points minimum,
capable of network interface with 5 remote fire alarm panels in the future and
expandable to 500 addressable points surface or semi-flush mounted enclosure
with 30% cabinet space.
2. Standby batteries for 60 hours minimum. The batteries shall be sized for the
maximum capacity of the fire alarm control panel.
3. Remote power supply panels as required for the notification appliances’ circuits
and locate as shown on drawings.
4. Digital dialer and communicator.
5. Remote digital annunciator panel with 80-character, backlit LCD display that
annunciates panel status and connected to duplicate many of the control panel
operator switches. Panel shall be rated for outdoor location semi-flush mounted
enclosure.
6. Manual pull station double action type, non-coded, addressable with surface box
for surface mounted stations. Part No. MS7A and BG50W for wet location. Manual
pull stations located in the freezers shall be rated for -30°F or remotely mount the
addressable modules.
7. Smoke Detectors; ASD-PL2F series. Analogue addressable photoelectronic plug-
in smoke sensor.
8. Thermal Sensors (Heat Detectors); ATD-L2F addressable plug-in thermal sensor
with integral communication.
9. Smoke Duct Detectors – Velocity ADPRF series. Analogue addressable.
Sampling tube part no. ST5. Remote status-test station part no. RTS451KEY with
alarm LED and test switch.
10. Provide weatherproof, protective shield with gasket and spacer for surface
mounted pull station, strobe and horn/strobe in all the wet location areas as shown
on the Drawings. Safety Technology International, Inc., STI Stopper II Series Part
No. STI-3150 for pull station and STI-121OD for horn/strobe.
B. The following audible and visual signal devices model or catalog numbers are
manufactured by Cooper Wheelock Inc. Other acceptable manufacturers shall be System
Sensor or equal. All surface mounted devices shall be furnished with red backboxes.
1. Remote Power Supply Panel(s) (RPSP) consisting of eight (8) ampere power to
expand the supervised power capacity of the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). Supervised NAC circuits shall be 4 class “B”
with a maximum 2 amperes per circuit and 2 class “A” with 4 amperes each.
Power Path series PS-12/24-8.
2. Wall mount horn strobe unit for indoor use rated 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) with
field selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd and three (3) selectable dBA
settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones (continuous horn or temporal “Code 3”).
Model number AS-24MCW-FR.
3. Ceiling mount horn strobe unit for indoor use rated 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
with high intensity field selectable candela settings of 115/177cd and three (3)
selectable dBA settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones (continuous horn or
temporal “Code 3”). Model number AS-24MCCH-FR.
4. Wall mount strobe unit for indoor use rated 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) with field
selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd. Model number RSS-24MCW-FR.
5. Ceiling mount strobe unit for indoor use rated 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) with
high intensity field selectable candela settings of 115/177cd. Model number RSS-
24MCCH-FR.
6. Wall mount horn strobe weatherproof unit for outdoor use rated -31°F to 150°F (-
35°C to 66°C) with candela ratings from 75cd to 180cd and three (3) selectable
dBA settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones (continuous horn or temporal
“Code 3”). Model number ASWP-2475W-FR with weatherproof surface mount
backbox model number WPBB.
7. Ceiling mount horn strobe weatherproof unit for outdoor use rated -31°F to
150°F (-35°C to 66°C) with candela ratings from 75cd to 180cd and three (3)
selectable dBA settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones (continuous horn or
temporal “Code 3”). Model number ASWP-2475C-FR with weatherproof surface
mount backbox model number WPBB.
8. Wall mount strobe weatherproof unit for outdoor use rated -31°F to 150°F (-35°C
to 66°C) with candela ratings from 75cd to 180cd. Model number RSSWP-2475W-
FR with weatherproof surface mount backbox model number WPSBB.
9. Ceiling mount strobe weatherproof unit for outdoor use rated -31°F to 150°F (-
35°C to 66°C) with candela ratings from 75cd to 180cd. Model number RSSWP-
2475C-FR with weatherproof surface mount backbox model number WPSBB.
1. Tyco Simplex Grinnell
2. Cooper Wheelock
3. Edwards
4. Gamewell/FCI
5. Honeywell
6. Notifier
7. System Sensor.
2.3 LINEAR HEAT DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Linear heat detectors shall be UL listed, fixed temperature sensing elements comprising two
current-carrying wires held separated by heat sensitive insulation for detection and release
service. Shall be suitable for use in moisture-laden and refrigerated areas.
B. Freezer/cooler wall penetrations shall not be sleeved. Drill access hole, as near as possible,
to the outside diameter of the conduit to ensure the tightest fit possible. A seal off fitting shall
be installed to the warm side of this panel and the conduit through the panel wall shall be
PVC. PVC conduit is to extend 12” to the warm side and 12” to the cold side. All seal-offs
shall be filled with UL approved putty type compound.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all fire alarm wiring in conduit. Provide Class B wiring for the conventional system
and Class A wiring for the addressable system in compliance with the applicable codes
and manufacturer’s recommendations. Verify class of wiring conforms to local ordinances.
No wiring other than that directly associated with the fire alarm system shall be permitted in
fire alarm conduits.
1. Splices shall be avoided but if necessary use crimp connectors, wire nuts are not
allowed. Label all conductors on each end. Use only dry talcum for pulling
compound. Wire color coding shall be used throughout system.
B. Minimum wire size solid #14 AWG copper for alarm initiating and annunciator circuits. No.
12 AWG copper for audio/visual circuits.
C. Install ceiling smoke detectors directly above all locations of the remote power supply
panels (RPSP) even if they do not show on the drawings.
D. Fire alarm conductor terminations in control panel, remote power supply panels and
annunciator panels to be made on terminal strips with separate point for each conductor.
All such strips to be number identified as shown in wiring diagram attached to inside of
door of control panel. Connect wiring neatly to terminal strips. Connect clip with nylon
cable straps or lace with jute cord.
1. Set up termination of cabling so that sections of the system may be isolated or
shorted out for servicing.
E. Provide ¾” conduit from fire alarm control panel to motor control centers.
F. From fire alarm control panel provide one ¾” conduit to nearest telephone backboard or
panel location.
G. Mount audio/visual devices at 90” above finished floor (strobe light center), unless
otherwise noted on Drawings. Mount manual pull stations at 44” above finished floor
(handle center).
H. Connect to each flow switch, tamper switch and other devices and panel(s) in sprinkler
system as per the sprinkler contractor’s drawings.
I. Final connections between equipment and the wiring system shall be made under direct
supervision of a representative of a manufacturer.
J. Coordinate equipment for connections with local Fire Department requirements.
K. Install audio/visual devices semi-flush in all the new concrete masonry and dry walls.
L. Indicate all surface mounted and semi-flush mounted devices on the shop drawing.
M. Place “FIRE ALARM SYSTEM” labels on pullboxes, junction boxes, enclosures and paint
all boxes and covers red.
3.2 CIRCUITING REQUIREMENTS
A. Addressable initiating device in a loop shall not exceed 50% of the circuit point’s capacity.
Loop quantity shall be as shown on the fire alarm loop schedule.
B. Audio and visual devices shall not exceed 60% of the signal circuit ampacity. Submit
calculations shown each circuit Amps, and voltage drop analysis of each device and
circuit.
C. Remote power supply panels shall not exceed 60% of their signal circuit ampacity. The
batteries shall be sized for the maximum capacity of the power supply panels.
D. Audio and visual devices shall be on separate circuits or have a control feature such that
strobe units will continue to function after the circuit silence button is activated.
E. All of the notification appliances shall be synchronized via built-in controls in the power
supply panel and/or by synchronized modules.
3.3 SYSTEM VERIFICATION
A. Have fire alarm equipment supplier make a thorough inspection of the complete installed
fire alarm systems including testing all components such as manual stations, duct
detectors, thermal detectors, products-of-combustion detectors, sprinkler flow valves,
controls to ensure the following:
1. Complete and functional system.
2. Underwriters Laboratories requirements
3. Installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Regulations covering supervision of components are adhered to.
5. Make changes necessary to conform to items 1, 2, 3, and 4 with technical
assistance from the manufacturer.
6. During the period of this inspection by the manufacturer, supply to the
manufacturer one electrician and one apprentice.
7. Provide the complete programming of the system including all devices with
complete description.
When the above inspection and testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both the
Electrical Contractor and the representative of the manufacturer, a letter co-signed by each
attesting to the satisfactory completion of said testing, shall be forwarded to the Engineer
and the Owner.
B. Supply personnel to train Owners personnel and Fire Department personnel in operation
and maintenance of the system installed. Training time shall not exceed a total of four (4)
hours during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16751 SPECIAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, parts, equipment, and services to complete the
Telephone/Computer, Card Reader and other Special Systems. Work as shown on and/or
reasonably implied by the Drawings and Specifications.
A. Section 16010 General Requirements
B. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
A. Provide an empty raceway system for installation of instruments and wiring by the
telephone, computer, card readers and other special systems supplier as shown on the
Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conduit: Refer to Section 16050.
B. Provide 6’ H x 4’ W x ¾” D Plywood telephone backboard. Verify exact location and
coordinate with construction manager and owner or install where shown on the Drawings.
Backboard shall be painted flat black. Fur out from the wall 1½”.
C. Outlet Boxes: Refer to Section 16050.
D. Pull and Junction Boxes: Refer to Section 16050.
E. Wireway: Refer to Section 16050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. For underground service entrance refer to Section 16010.
B. Provide pullboxes in telephone conduit runs spaced not greater than 100 ft. apart, and on
backboard side of runs with more than two right angle bends. Coordinate with local
telephone company.
C. Place “TELEPHONE” or “TELEPHONE/COMPUTER” labels on pullboxes, junction boxes,
and enclosures.
D. Provide pullwire in each telephone, computer and other special systems conduit run. This
Electrical Contractor shall be responsible after the cable are pulled through, to seal the
conduits at both ends (outside and inside the building) with removable putty to prevent
rodents or insect pests from entering the plant through the conduits.
E. Provide plywood backboards and double duplex receptacles in the telephone equipment
room and/or other special systems spaces. Confirm location on job site with Owner’s
vendor prior to installation.
F. All interior raceways shall terminate with bushings.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 16751 – Special Systems Raceway
G. Telephone/Computer Outlets: Install up nominal 18” above finished floor in all general
locations; install up 54” when marked as a wall phone; install up 4” to center-line above
counter tops or backsplashes (whichever is higher), built-in or permanent desk tops where
marked above counter or as noted on the Drawings. Refer to the Architectural Drawings
for locations. Other mounting heights to be as indicated on the Drawings.
H. Provide flush mounted 2” deep single gang box at 46”AFF with 3/4” conduit concealed in
wall to above the suspended ceiling space, bend 90°, terminate with conduit bushing and
provide pullwire.
I. Provide surface mounted 2" deep single gang weatherproof box (diecast aluminum with
blank cover) indoor and outdoor at 46"aff with 3/4" conduit surface mounted and extend to
above bar joist level, bend 90°, terminate with conduit bushing and provide pullwire. When
the box is located outdoor, penetrate the wall (see refrigerated areas penetration detail)
behind the box, use LB fitting on the other side of the wall and surface conduit up to the
bar joist.
J. At each special system outlet location, flush or surface mounted, provide empty 2” deep
single gang box and blank plate.
K. When the telephone/computer outlets are combined, provide a 4” square box with single
gang ring, blank plate and 1” conduit.
L. Provide a 3/4” conduit from outlet up into space above ceiling or above bar joists in the
industrial areas bend 90° and terminate with conduit bushing unless noted otherwise on
the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 16751 – Special Systems Raceway
DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION
SECTION 17010 BASIC REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Contractor is to furnish and install new refrigeration equipment and materials as described
within these specifications and accompanying Refrigeration Drawings. Contractor is
responsible to include both materials and labor required, for a complete and properly
operating installation in addition to providing all of the following tasks:
1. Coordinate and provide crane/rigging services for the lifting and placement of all
new equipment.
2. Supply equipment supports per specifications and drawings. Structural steel and
concrete pads will be by others.
3. All refrigerant piping and fittings to and from refrigeration equipment per
specifications and drawings.
4. All condensate drain piping and traps from the air units to main drains and to
splash blocks at grade. Condensate drain heat tape and insulation in areas below
36oF and all exterior drain piping. This requirement controls regardless of what is
shown on drawings.
5. All pipe insulation per specifications.
6. Labor for cutting roof/wall penetrations for all refrigerant and drain lines as detailed
and coordination with roofing contractor for flashing and sealing of the openings.
7. Piping hangers, trapeze hangers and stainless steel wall piping supports on the
outside of the insulated panels.
8. Coordination of electrical power for refrigeration system with the awarded electrical
contractor. Control wiring and the installation of control power will be the
Refrigeration Contractor’s responsibility.
A. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration,
dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract
documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment
or accessories into the system and for obtaining the performance from the system into
which these items are placed. This may include changes found necessary during the
testing, adjusting, and balancing phase of the project.
1.3 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES
A. Furnish one can of touch-up paint for each color factory finish which is to be the final
finished surface of the product.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification sections,
marking each submittal with that specification section number. Mark submittal sheets and
drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment
by name and/or number, as indicated in the contract documents. Indicate on these
equipment sheets specified equipment options noted on the equipment schedule drawings.
Submittals will be rejected if optional equipment is not indicated.
B. Before submitting electrically powered equipment, verify that the electrical power and
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 17010 – Basic Refrigeration Requirements
control requirements for the equipment are in agreement with the power available and
noted on the electrical drawings.
C. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment.
D. Ten days after the issue of the Refrigeration notice-to-proceed or contract (whichever
comes sooner), the awarded Refrigeration Contractor shall provide electronic (PDF
Format) equipment shop drawings. Prior to submitting the shop drawings, the Refrigeration
Contractor shall thoroughly review the shop drawings and submittals for accuracy. After
the shop drawings have been reviewed, a red-lined electronic version (PDF Format) will be
returned to the Refrigeration Contractor and if approved will allow the Refrigeration
Contractor to order equipment. Shop drawings are required for the following equipment:
1. Condensing Units.
2. Air Units.
3. Condensing Unit and Air Unit Wiring Diagrams with MCA (minimum circuit amps)
and MOP (maximum over-current protection) clearly identified. MCA and MOP are
to include the amperage draw of the corresponding air unit fan motors.
4. Thermostats and thermometers.
5. Refrigerant Solenoid Valves and Thermo Expansion Valves, Sporland Only.
6. Refrigeration and condensate pipe insulation, vapor barrier paint, and PVC jacket
material.
E. Three weeks after the award of the contract, the Refrigeration Contractor shall submit a
refrigerant and condensate piping drawing for each piping service in the project. The
piping system drawings will be made available to the Construction Manager for his use on
this project. Deviation from these field drawings must be pre-approved by the Construction
Manager prior to installation.
F. As built drawings will be required from the Refrigeration Contractor at the end of the
project.
1.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Assemble material in a well-organized electronic file (PDF Format), using an index and tab
format for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in the
General Requirements, include the following information:
1. Copies of all approved shop drawings.
2. Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment
3. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements
4. Completed Start Up report for each system.
5. Certificates of Inspection by regulatory agencies, if required.
6. Temperature control record drawings and control sequence of equipment.
7. Recommended spare parts lists for manufactured equipment
8. Control valve schedules; thermal expansion valves, nozzle sizes installed in each
air unit and solenoid valves.
9. Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication done during
construction
10. Warranties, Extended Compressor Warranties.
11. Temperature pull down schedule
12. Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections.
1.6 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor is required to instruct the Owner’s Maintenance Personnel in the proper
operation and maintenance of systems and equipment provided as part of this project.
Include not less than 4 hours of instruction using the Operating and Maintenance manuals
as a guide during this instruction. Demonstrate startup and shutdown procedures for all
equipment. All training to be performed during normal working hours.
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements, maintain As-Built record
drawings on originals prepared by the installing Contractor/Subcontractor. Include copies
of these record drawings with the Operating and Maintenance manuals. Provide one set of
As-Built Drawings to the Construction Manager at substantial completetion of the project.
As-Built Drawings will be required in order to receive final payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Drawings.
2.2 ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Refrigeration Equipment Schedule for the bid. Bidding Contractors are allowed to
provide alternates with their bids. Include with the bid the cost of the specified equipment
and the alternate cost.
B. If alternate equipment is submitted with the bid, equipment specifications, capacities,
weights, options, electrical requirements, etc. of the alternate equipment must also be
submitted with base bid.
2.3 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for all pipe penetrations (including sealants)
through the insulated roof. Roof penetrations for refrigerant piping shall be performed by
the Refrigeration Contractor. Openings must be cut clean and no larger than 2 inches
greater in diameter than the pipe passing through the penetration with the insulation
applied. Temporary sealing of penetrations must be performed during construction to
prevent water and weather damage to the roof insulation and building interiors.
Refrigeration Contractor to coordinate with the Electrical Contractor on the size and
number of conduits. Final roof flashing of the openings and sleeves will be by the Roofing
Contractor. Sealing of the piping and conduits to the roof shall be by the Refrigeration
Contractor and Electrical Contractor. Refer to the detail of the roof penetrations on the
drawings.
2.4 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. At pipe penetrations of non-rated interior partitions, floors and exterior walls above grade,
use urethane caulk in annular space between pipe insulation and sleeve.
2.5 ELECTRICAL FREEZER/COOLER AND OUTDOOR PENETRATIONS
A. Freezer/Cooler wall and outdoor roof penetrations shall not be sleeved. The Electrical
Contractor shall drill his access hole as near as possible to the outside diameter of the
conduit through the cold storage insulated panels to ensure the snuggest possible fit. An
acceptable fitting or junction box shall be installed on both sides of this panel, and the
conduit through the panel wall shall be PVC Schedule 80. PVC conduit is to extend 4” to
the warm side and 4” to the cold side. The PVC conduit shall be filled with a UL approved
putty, so that it is removable, following a successful system test for all air units, sub-floor
heating systems, freezer lighting systems, RTD system conduits, etc. Provide putty “Duct
Seal Compound” by Rector Seal or equal. Do not use foam or silicone as filler. Butt joints
or cracks shall then be sealed by caulking with a compatible non-hardening sealant.
2.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ON CSI PANELS
A. Provide metal framing channels from floor slab or from roof structure and plywood
backboard for all panelboards, control panels, disconnect switches and cabinets mounted
on Cold Storage Insulated (CSI) wall or ceiling panels. (Do not provide plywood behind dry
type transformer). Provide square tubing for wet location areas and as indicated on
Drawings, furnish additional square tubing and omit plywood backboard. Secure metal
framing channel and/or to CSI panels with “Fab-lok” fasteners. Fab-lok shall be by Fabco
Fastening Systems or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation should be in compliance with all local codes. Upon submittal of bid it is
requested that Standards for good workmanship practice and procedure be included.
B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way that all components requiring access are
located and installed so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated etc., by
service people with normal service tools and equipment. If any equipment or components
are shown in such a position that the Contractor cannot comply with the above, the
Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager and attempt to resolve the problem of
access.
C. Equipment, devices and materials of similar types, function or of one system shall be of the
same manufacturer.
D. All control wiring including cable types, and point to point conduit will be the responsibility
of the Refrigeration Contractor. Refer to the Drawings for Electrical
Contractor/Refrigeration Contractor responsibilities. Final connection of power wiring shall
be coordinated by the Refrigeration Contractor to assure correct connection. The
Refrigeration Contractor is ultimately responsible for correct control and power wiring of all
refrigeration equipment. Refer to the electrical drawings and specifications for all conduit,
wire type, terminations, penetrations and sealant details.
E. All roof support frames and Trex composite wood sleepers for setting the condensing units
are under this contract. Trex composite sleepers shall be fastened together by predrilling
and screwing using stainless steel decking screws. Condensing units shall be fastened to
the Trex sleepers by pre-drilling and using 3/8" galvanized lag bolts and washers. Trex
composite sleepers shall be a minimum of 2 feet longer than the overall length of the
condensing units. The Roofing Contractor will provide slip sheet roof membrane material
for the condensing unit sleepers. Slip sheets shall be a minimum of 6 inches longer and
wider than the Trex roof sleepers.
F. Time is of the essence. By submitting a bid, the contractor acknowledges that he has
reviewed and understands the project, has sufficient manpower, can meet the schedule
and completion dates, has observed the site conditions, and will diligently pursue the work.
G. The awarded Contractors and their subcontractors will conform to all applicable local,
state, OSHA, and federal safety regulations. The Contractor shall have a written safety
program in place and will submit a copy of this written safety program to the Construction
Manager for review prior to commencing work. The Contractor (or his designated foreman)
will conduct daily job safety meetings and shall conduct a formal weekly safety meeting
with all his employees. The weekly safety meeting shall be recorded, signed by all
attending employees, and submitted to the Construction Manager for record keeping. The
awarded Contractor shall provide his employees all required and necessary safety
equipment including but not limited to; work gloves, hard hats, safety glasses, fall
protection body harnesses with lanyards, etc. All of the Contractor's employees shall be
trained in the proper use of safety equipment. All employees of this contractor shall have
completed the OHSA 10 hour safety course.
H. Carefully coordinate the location of piping runs, equipment placement, and roof
penetrations with the Construction Manager and other Contractors. Air units must be
positioned to allow adequate return air into the units and located to reduce the number of
pallet spaces obstructed by the air units.
I. Refrigeration Contractor shall review structural steel drawings in relation to refrigeration
equipment supports and/or platforms. Any discrepancies or concerns by the Contractor
shall be brought to the attention of the Construction Manager before, or within a timely
manner after, receipt of contract. After agreement of equipment being used and based on
structural information, the Refrigeration Contractor accepts full responsibility for
refrigeration equipment locations.
J. The roof membrane is to be protected at all times from welding, burning, or soldering
operations through the prudent use of plywood and welding blankets. Fire extinguishers
shall be readily available at the location(s) of burning, welding, or soldering. Since the
Refrigeration Contractor will be the only Contractor burning or soldering on the roof; the
Refrigeration Construction will be responsible for repairs to the roof membrane due to any
burns in the membrane. The Refrigeration Contractor will be required by the Construction
Manager to prepare a Hot Work Permit prior to commencement of any welding, soldering,
or burning work each day. The Hot Work Permits shall be displayed at each location of
welding or soldering. Return the Hot Work Permit at the end of each day to the
Construction Manager. Renew Hot Work Permits daily.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 17060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. ANSI B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
B. ANSI B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings
– DWV
C. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service
A. Order all copper refrigeration tubing with each shipping unit marked with the purchase
order number, metal or alloy designation, size, and name of supplier with straight lengths
or coils identified with a tag indicating that the product was manufactured in accordance
with ASTM B280; and with each hard temper straight length identified throughout its length
by a blue colored marking not less than 3/16 inch in height and a legend at intervals of not
greater than three feet that includes the designation "ACR" and pipe outside diameter. All
refrigerant tubing shall be only that identified as "ACR". ACR tubing shall remain sealed
until ready to be installed in order to prevent moisture and debris from entering the tubing.
At the end of the work day all open ended tubing shall be well sealed to prevent
contamination.
B. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with
material that meets these specifications.
A. Promptly inspect shipments to insure that the material is undamaged and complies with
specifications.
B. Cover pipe to eliminate rust and corrosion while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid
condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tubing, and fitting
ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take
precautions so the caps remain in place. If end caps are not present on tube bearing the
"ACR" designation, clean and re-cap in accordance with ASTM B280. Protect fittings,
flanges, and unions by storage inside or by durable, waterproof above ground packaging.
C. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve the contractor from using proper storage
techniques.
D. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Use only new material, free of defects, moisture, rust and scale and meeting the latest
revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification.
B. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in
accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 250 psig unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
C. Where ASTM B88, type L hard temper copper tubing is specified, ASTM B88, type K hard
temper copper tubing may be substituted at Contractor's option.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 17060 – Pipe and Pipe Fittings
A. ASTM B88, type L hard temper copper tubing with ASTM B145/ANSI B16.23 cast red
bronze or ASTM B75/ANSI B16.29 wrought solder-type drainage fittings. Type M tubing is
not allowed.
2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. ASTM B88 type L hard drawn copper tube, cleaned and capped in accordance with ASTM
B280, and marked "ACR", with ANSI B16.22 wrought copper solder style fittings. All liquid
refrigerant 90 degree elbows shall be long radius. All refrigerant suction 90 degree elbows
shall be long radius, except the contractor is allowed to use standard radius elbows on the
suction riser traps in order to reduce the amount of oil collected and to reduce the distance
below the air units. All refrigerant fittings will be wrought copper suitable for silver brazing.
B. Refrigerant pipe and fittings shall be joined by silver brazed using 15% silver solder.
Refrigerant solenoids, control valves, thermal expansion valves, and hand shut off valves
shall be soldered using Harris Stay-Brite silver bearing solder so to allow removal of these
valves with less chance of heat distortion of the valve bodies.
C. Refrigerant solenoid, thermal expansion valves, and air unit refrigerant distributors are to
be manufactured by Sporlan Valve Co. only. Refrigerant solenoids are to be supplied with
manual opening jacking stems. Solenoids are to have a liquid refrigerant handling capacity
of 1.5 times the air unit capacity. Refrigerant ball valves are to be by Superior. Solenoids
are to be installed at each air unit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove all foreign material from interior and exterior of pipe and fittings. Assure that the
ACR tubing is dry and has been capped prior to installation.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Install all piping with proper pitch, parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights
which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where
interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required clearing such
interferences.
B. The drawings are intended to diagrammatic and are based on the manufacturer’s
equipment specified. Due to the small scale of the drawings it is not intended to show
every item or fitting in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the exact details of the
equipment. The contractor shall verify the actual dimensions of the proposed equipment
and piping to insure that equipment will fit into the available space. Piping is to be installed
in a manner to best avoid possible damage by fork lifts and with the intention to avoid
obstruction of pallet spaces.
C. Contractor to verify the piping runs with the structure and shall provide any offsets in piping
as needed to avoid interference. Provide anchors, swing joints and/or expansion loops so
that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or the building.
D. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded
piping, bushings are not acceptable. Refrigerant piping shall be all silver except at control
location which will be no larger than 1/4" threaded fittings.
E. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panel boards, or
switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is
serving this equipment
F. Install all valves, control valves, and piping specialties, including items furnished by others,
as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where
that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section.
3.3 COPPER PIPE JOINTS
A. Remove all slivers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reaming and filing
both pipe surfaces. Clean fittings and tubing with emery cloth or plumbers sand cloth.
Remove all traces of copper filings and residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux, and
assemble the joint.
3.4 CONDENSATE DRAINS
A. Install a copper or brass plugged clean out tee fitting at each air unit drain pan coupling.
Install a treaded union at each air unit drain pan to allow for pan removal. Extend drain
piping to wall penetration and exterior grade as shown on the drawings. Trap each air unit
condensate to drain individually to prevent vapor transmission.
3.5 REFRIGERANT
A. Refrigeration piping is to be fabricated and installed in accordance with the best practices
of the trade. Only skilled and experienced refrigeration pipe fitters are allowed to install the
refrigeration system. Firms with a minimum of 5 years proven experience with heavy
commercial or industrial refrigeration experience are allowed to bid on the project.
B. Refrigerant piping shall not be sub-contracted. All piping shall be performed by the RC.
Shop fabricated piping is allowed as long as it is fabricated by experienced pipe fitters and
meets specifications.
C. Generally pitch all refrigerant suction piping 1" in 10 ft. in the direction of flow
D. All solder joints to be ASTM Grade 4 or 5 and have a melting point of approximately 1250
degrees F. Solder impurities shall not exceed 0.15%. Tubing to be new and delivered to
the job site with the original mill end caps in place. Clean and polish all joints before
soldering or brazing. Avoid prolonged heating during soldering. Purge all refrigerant lines
with dry nitrogen during soldering and or brazing to prevent scaling of pipe and fittings.
Pipe stored on site shall be elevated above the floor and roof on wood blocking to prevent
sagging. Provide one liquid line manual shut-off valve at each condensing unit as shown
on the drawings.
E. No refrigerant is to be vented directly to the atmosphere except that which may escape
through leaks in the system during leak testing. During evacuation procedures, use
equipment designed to recover and allow recycling of the refrigerant.
F. Do not insulate pipe until it has been successfully pressure tested.
G. Leak test the system by charging the system to a pressure of 10 psig with an HFC
refrigerant with the compressor suction and discharge valves closed and with all other
system valves open. Increase pressure to 300 psig with dry nitrogen. It is recommended
that the pressure test remain in the system overnight. Under no circumstance is
compressed air to be used for pressure testing refrigerant piping. Rap all joints with a
mallet and check for leaks with an electric leak detector having a certified sensitivity of at
least one ounce per year. Record test pressures and notify the CM to witness the
pressure tests. Remove and repair any leaks that may be found and retest.
H. After completion of a successful pressure test, evacuate the system with a vacuum pump
to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1,500 microns while the system ambient
temperature is above 60°F. Shut off the vacuum pump and observe for any rise in
pressure on the micron gauge. If the pressure rises it indicates moisture is present or a
leak has developed. After a successful first evacuation, break the vacuum to 2 psig with
the refrigerant to be used in the system. Repeat the evacuation process a second time.
Secure the vacuum pump and notifying the Construction Manager to witness and record
this vacuum test of 1,500 microns. Break the vacuum after a second evacuation with
refrigerant. Install a drier of the required size in the liquid line and open the compressor
suction and discharge valves, and evacuate to an absolute pressure not exceeding 250
microns. Leave the vacuum pump running for not less than four hours without interruption.
Once the system is down to 250 microns, break the system vacuum to a pressure of 2 psig
with refrigerant and remove the vacuum pump.
I. Recycled or recovered refrigerants are not allowed. Use only virgin refrigerant from sealed
refrigerant cylinders. Charge the refrigerant directly from original drums through a 3/8"
flared combination filter-drier. Each filter drier may be used for a maximum of three
cylinders of refrigerant and then must be replaced with a fresh drier. Charge the system by
means of a charging fitting in the liquid line. Weigh each refrigerant drum before charging
so that an accurate record can be kept of the weight of refrigerant charged into the system.
If refrigerant is added to the system through the suction side of the compressor, charge in
vapor state only. Record the quantity of refrigerant charged into each system and provide
this information to the Construction Manager, as well as recording in the Start Up forms
and Maintenance Manuals. Follow the refrigerant manufactures recommendations in
regards to charging refrigerant in the liquid or gas phase. The Refrigeration Contractor is
responsible for the refrigerant charge for a period of one year unless the refrigerant loss
was caused by an accident (not in his control). The refrigerant charge shall be adequate to
operate with winter operating conditions.
3.6 CONDENSATE PIPING TESTS
A. Before installing condensate drain heat tape or drain pipe insulation, clean all debris from
the condensate drain pans. Empty one 5 gallon bucket of water into each air unit drain
pan. Observe for leaks at joints and fittings, replace or repair as required.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 17140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
B. MSS SP-59 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all supporting devices as required for the installation of mechanical equipment and
materials. All supports and installation procedures are to conform to the latest
requirements of the ANSI Code for pressure piping.
B. Do not hang any mechanical items directly from a metal deck or run piping so it rests on
the bottom chord of any truss or joist unless adequately supported to the top chord as
shown in the details of the Refrigeration Drawings.
C. Support apparatus and material under all conditions of operation, variations in installed and
operating weight of equipment and piping to prevent excess stress and allow for proper
expansion and contraction.
D. Protect pipe insulation at all hanger points; see Related Work above.
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS
Standard Practice SP-58 and SP-69 unless noted otherwise.
B. Standard pipe hangers/supports as specified in this section are required beyond the 100
pipe diameter/3 support distance.
C. Allow sufficient space between adjacent pipes for insulation, valve operation, routine
maintenance, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT MANUFACTURERS

A. B-Line, Grinnell, Fee and Mason, Kindorf, Michigan Hanger, Uni-strut, or approved equal.
Grinnell figure numbers are listed below; equivalent material by other manufacturers is
acceptable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Provide all supporting steel required for the installation of mechanical equipment and
materials, whether or not it is specifically indicated or sized, including angle iron, channels,
beams, plated threaded rod, nuts, washers, etc. to suspend equipment.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers Copper Pipe Sizes 1/2” through 2-5/8”:
1. Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis; electro-plated zinc, hot dipped galvanized or
stainless steel finish. No un-plated hangers or fasteners are allowed. Grinnell
figure 65 or 260.
2. High pressure liquid refrigerant piping will also be secured using Vibra-Mount pipe
supports with thermo plastic insert hangers or approved equal to reduce the
effects of liquid line shock. A minimum of three Vibra Mounts will be required per
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 17140 – Supports and Anchors
condensing unit. Intermediate liquid line hangers can be copper plated split ring
hangers or plated clevis hangers; contractor's option. Stainless steel F&M rings
and plates with stainless steel fasteners will be used outside of insulated panel
walls.
B. Wall Support:
1. Welded steel bracket with hanger. B-Line 3068 Series, Grinnell 194 Series.
2. Perforated electro plated zinc finish, 12 gauge steel channels securely anchored to
wall structure with interlocking, split type, bolt secured galvanized pipe/tubing
clamps. B-Line type S channel with B-2000 series clamps, Grinnell type PS200 H
with PS 1200 clamps.
C. Vertical Riser Support:
1. Carbon steel riser clamp, copper plated when used with copper pipe. Grinnell
figure 261 for steel pipe, figure CT121 for copper pipe.
D. Copper Pipe Support:
1. Electro-plated carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated or polyvinylchloride
coated.
E. Steel Hanger Rods
1. Threaded either-end, threaded one-end, or continuous threaded, electro-plated
finish. Nuts, washers, lock washers are also to be electro-plated zinc. Hot dipped
galvanized with oversize nuts and washers are also acceptable. All rod material
and fasteners must be electroplated or stainless steel, contractor's option.
2. Size rods for individual hangers and trapeze supports as indicated in the following
schedule.
3. Total weight of suspended equipment, including valves, fittings, pipe, pipe content,
and insulation, are not to exceed the limits indicated.
Maximum Load (Lbs.) Rod Diameter
(650°F Maximum Temp.) (inches)
610 3/8
1130 1/2
1810 5/8
2710 3/4
3770 7/8
4. Provide machine or threaded rods complete with adjusting and lock nuts.
5. Air unit hanger rods are to be a minimum of 1/2" diameter. Refer to hanger rod
size on the individual air units.
2.4 BEAM CLAMPS
A. MSS SP-69 Type 23 malleable plated iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to 0.62
inches thick for single threaded rods of 3/8, 1/2, and 5/8 inch diameter, for use with pipe
sizes 2-5/8 inches and less. Furnish with a hardened steel cup point set screw. Grinnell
figure 86.
B. MSS SP-69 Type 28 or Type 29 forged steel jaw type clamp with a tie rod to lock clamp in
place, suitable for rod sizes to 1-1/2 inch diameter Grinnell figure 228.
2.5 ANCHORS
A. Use welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure.
2.6 CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE COATINGS
A. Factory coated supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres will be hot-dip
galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM A123, 1.5 ounces/square foot of surface, each side.
Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 150, 2.0 mil coating. Field
cuts and damaged finishes to be field covered with zinc rich paint such as ZRC of
comparable thickness to factory coating.
B. Corrosive atmospheres include the following locations:
1. Exterior locations with salt atmosphere
2. Wet and high humidity areas
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install supports to provide for free expansion of the piping system. Support all piping from
the structure using beam clamps, ceiling plates, wall brackets, or floor stands. Fasten
ceiling plates and wall brackets securely to the structure and test to demonstrate the
adequacy of the fastening.
B. Coordinate hanger and support installation to properly group piping of all trades.
C. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use
standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where
continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use
with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that
similar types are used and all data is submitted for prior approval.
D. Perform all welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society. Clean
surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint or other foreign matter and properly align before
welding. Use wire brush on welds after welding. Welds shall show uniform section,
smoothness of weld metal and freedom from porosity and clinkers. Where necessary to
achieve smooth connections, joints shall be dressed smooth. One prime coat and one
finish coat of paint shall be required at all welds and welded attachments with the same
color paint as originally supplied.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
A. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow, valve, strainer, or similar piping
specialty item. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation,
provide multiple or trapeze style hangers.
B. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
C. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of this specification.
D. Space hangers for pipe as follows:
Pipe Material Pipe Size Max. Spacing
Thermoplastic All sizes 6'-0"
Copper 1/2" through 1-1/4" 6'-0"
Copper 1-1/2" through 2-5/8" 8'-0"
3.3 VERTICAL RISER CLAMPS
A. Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and supported by the building
structure.
3.4 ANCHORS
A. Install where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated,
install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs
between expansion loops. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required,
accommodating both expansion and contraction of piping.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 17670 CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit to the engineer the manufacturer's technical product data including
rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, submittal equipment identification
corresponding to project drawings and schedules, weights (shipping and operating),
dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, furnished
specialties, options, accessories, and installation, operation, and maintenance manuals.
The Refrigeration Contractor is to review all submittals prior to submitting. Submittals are
to indicate options provided with the condensing units as shown on the equipment
schedule matrix on the Refrigeration Drawings.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required
for final installation of condensing units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions
of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Wiring drawings are to
indicate manufacturers condensing unit MCA (Minimum Circuit Amps) and MOP
(Maximum Overcurrent Protection) with air unit fan motors. Accurate MCA and MOP are
to be imprinted on the condensing unit's name plate
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and recommended spare
parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory including "trouble shooting",
servicing, and preventative maintenance procedures and schedule. Include this data and
product data in maintenance manual.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of condensing
units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Capacity ratings for condensing units shall be in accordance with ARI Standard
360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".
2. Refrigeration system of condensing units shall be constructed in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
3. Condensing units shall be listed by UL and have UL label affixed.
A. Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage. Carefully follow
manufacturer's written instructions for rigging condensing units. Replace damaged
condensing units or components.
B. Store condensing units and components in clean dry place off the ground. Protect from
weather, water, and physical damage.
1.4 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by the contractor
agreeing to replace/repair within the warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate
or defective materials and workmanship, including leaks, breakage, improper assembly or
failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing,
protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during the warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Bids shall include the Refrigeration Contractor’s one year warranty on all
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 4 17670 – Condensing Units

parts and labor including refrigerant and oil charge. The second year to the fifth year
warranty shall include manufacturer’s refrigeration compressor/motor replacement only
extended warranty. The warranty period shall commence when all work is completed,
coolers are down to temperature, punch list items have been completed, and the
refrigeration phase of this project has been signed off by the Construction Manager.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS:

A. REQUIREMENTS
1. Manufacturers offering air-cooled condensing units which may be incorporated in
the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. MANUFACTURERS
1. Subject to compliance with requirements and available options, provide air-cooled
condensing units of one of the following manufactures:
a. Bohn
b. Larkin
c. Century
d. Chandler
e. Russell
f. Or Pre-Approved Equal
C. GENERAL
1. Factory-assembled and tested air-cooled condensing units, consisting of casing,
compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans, motors, unit operating and safety
controls, and or electric defrost time clocks and controls. Capacities and electrical
characteristics are listed on the Drawings. Required factory and field installed
supplied options per drawings and specifications.
D. COMPRESSOR
1. Copeland Discus Compressors with POE lubricant. Factory balanced and spring
mounted to reduce risk of line fatigue and vibration eliminator leaks. Internal motor
overheat protection, crankcase heater (de-energized during compressor
operation), oil level sight glass, internal driven shaft oil pump with manual reset
Sentronic oil failure switch, back-seating suction and discharge shut off valves.
2. Safety switches, factory installed using high pressure braided refrigerant hose to
prevent capillary tube leaks. Automatic reset low suction pressure cutout switch
and manual reset high pressure.
E. RECEIVER
1. The receiver is to be amply sized to allow for condenser flooding charge, with
evaporator and 100’ of liquid line piping. The receiver is to be also fitted with
pressure relief valve and charging valve. Supply with a line size Superior full port
refrigerant style ball valve in the liquid line at the condensing unit to allow for
manual pump down of the refrigerant system.
F. CONDENSER
1. Constructed with 3/8” grooved tubing for a maximum efficiency. Provide a
separate liquid sub-cooling circuit piped through receiver to insure vapor free liquid

at TXV. Adjustable head pressure system with control valves (Flooding) for low
ambient operation. Mechanically bonded die formed aluminum fin stock with full
self-spacing collars.
2. The condenser coil shall have a maximum 10 fins per inch for efficiency and ease
of maintenance. Suspended coil design to eliminate tube sheet leaks.
G. CONDENSER FANS
1. The condenser fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced direct drive with
separate motor for each fan. Fan sections are divided by full width baffles to
prevent air by-pass. Standard three phase, HP motors achieves 850 RPM and
provides maximum efficiency with low noise. Each fan is to be protected by a
heavy gauge, corrosion resistant fan guard. Pressure controlled condenser fan
pressure switches are required on multi-fan condensing units.
H. CONTROL PANEL
1. Condensing unit shall be furnished with factory-mounted, fully-enclosed and
weather-proof control panel.
2. Control panel shall have integral main circuit breaker disconnect or a separate,
factory-mounted main circuit breaker disconnect that is factory pre-wired to the
control panel. Disconnect shall include lock-out, tag-out features.
3. Control panel shall be factory furnished with compressor starters, air unit starters,
defrost contactors, defrost timers, power and control circuit terminal boards, etc.
4. Control panel shall include branch circuit breakers for air unit and defrost heaters
(if electric defrost specified).
5. Control panel shall include step-down transformer(s), as needed, for control
voltage(s).
6. Control panel and disconnect shall be UL Listed assemblies.
I. REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
1. Replaceable core liquid line filter drier. Sight glass with moisture indicator at
receiver outlet with charging valve. Replaceable core suction filter/drier assembly
and suction accumulator.
J. CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
1. Heavy gauge mill galvanized cabinet with condenser coil.
2. Hail guards for all condensing units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the dimensions of the new housekeeping pads, roof support sleepers and slip
sheets and mounting steel are completed to the proper point to allow installation of roof
mounted units. Do not set condensing units until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations as indicated and
maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install any factory furnished field-
mounted accessories.

A. Testing: Charge each refrigerant system with the condensing unit manufacturer’s
recommended R-404A refrigerant operating charge as published in the IO manual, and the
compressors with POE oil. The compressor oil operating level shall be maintained at 1/4
of the compressors sight glass. POE lubricants are very susceptible to water absorption;
therefore extra care shall be taken when adding oil to the compressors to prevent oil
contamination. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil during the first year
warranty period. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Set
superheats when coolers and freezers are down to operating temperatures. It is expected
that superheat at the compressor suction line will be adjusted by the Refrigeration
Contractor to be no lower than 10oF and no higher than 15oF.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide a skilled refrigeration service technician who is familiar with the mechanical and
electrical design of the installed refrigeration equipment to conduct start-up services and to
instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of condensing units.
B. Start-up of the condensing units is to be done in accordance with manufacturers
recommended start-up procedures. Test all operating and safety controls and
demonstrate compliance. Record condensing unit start up dates, test results and provide
written documents to Construction Manager. Check all air unit(s) and compressor
superheats by completing the Start-Up Report Form. Train the Owner’s personnel on
start-up and shut-down procedures, troubleshooting procedures, servicing, and
preventative maintenance schedules, and procedures. Review the data contained in the
manufactures Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 17750 AIR UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings including the following information: manufacturer's model numbers,
submittal equipment identification corresponding to project drawings and schedules, unit
dimensions and weights, materials of construction, capacities and ratings, fan capacities,
fan type, drive and motor information, sound power levels, information on factory installed
accessories such as Thermal Expansion Valves (TEV) and refrigerant orifice nozzles.
Indicate voltage of equipment.
1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Furnish factory fabricated ceiling hung air units complete with fans, motors, coils, TEV,
refrigerant distributors, electric defrost heaters, when applicable, insulated drain pans,
access sections, meeting the configuration shown on drawings and/or as scheduled on
Drawings. Install air units at the approximate locations shown on the drawings. Position
the air units to avoid blocking pallet positions in the adjacent pallet racks. Exact locations
of the air units must be coordinated with the Construction Manager and shall be located
relative to the location of pallet rack slots and the center of aisles. Provide adequate
distance at the entering air side of the air units to allow for sufficient air to enter the cooling
coil. Position the air units a minimum of one and one-half the fan diameter in inches from
the wall at the air entering side of the air units.
B. Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 100% of air quantity as
scheduled. The air unit TEAO motors furnished with the fans shall not operate in the
motor's service factor when operating under these conditions.
C. All air units shall be UL listed for electrical safety in compliance with UL safety standard for
heating, ventilating and cooling equipment. All units shall be in compliance with FM or IRI
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bohn
B. Larkin
C. Century
D. Chandler
E. Russell
F. Or Pre-Approved Equal
G. Air unit manufacturer shall be the same as the condensing unit manufacturer.
2.2 STANDARD FEATURES
A. Coil Design:
1. Air unit coils will be provided with copper tubes and aluminum fins. Fin spacing
shall be as per equipment schedule.
2. The Refrigeration Contractor is to provide one unused Schrader 3/8" extended
tube fitting with 1/4" SAE flare access threaded seal cap and core shall be
provided and shall be silver soldered into the suction outlet piping of each air unit
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 17750 – Air Units

in order to set accurate superheat readings. The Schrader fitting will be located
within the air unit cabinet. TXV power assembly bulbs will be firmly attached to the
horizontal suction line of each air unit using worm gear clamps or valve supplied
copper strapping. The location of the TEV bulb shall be at 4 or 8 o'clock on the
suction piping close to the coil outlet. The Refrigeration Contractor shall be
responsible for contacting the manufacture regarding the correct sizing of the
refrigerant orifice nozzles for air units.
B. Fans and Motors:
1. Fully guarded aluminum bladed propeller fans are to be direct drive driven at 850
RPM by TEAO motors with internal overload protection. Provide long throw collars
as noted on the equipment schedule on Refrigeration Drawings.
2. Provide all air units with OSHA approved fan guards.
3. Provide in the maintenance manual, the make, model, speed, and frame size of
the air unit fan motors.
4. Air units shall be furnished with a factory-mounted motor power termination box;
all fan motors shall be factory pre-wired to the termination box.
C. Housing:
1. Aluminum cabinet with standard mill finish.
2. Fans are individually compartmented by continuous tube sheets for uniform air
flow and to prevent reverse rotation in the event of fan motor failure.
3. End covers shall be removable for easy access to TEV, drain pan, distributor and
electrical connections to the defrost heater elements and fan motor terminal block.
D. Drain Pans:
1. For all applications below 40oF the air units will be provided with the optional
insulated drain.
E. Electric Defrost (at or below 36oF room temperature):
1. Service voltage shall be 480/3/60.
2. Air units shall be furnished with a factory-mounted electric defrost termination box;
defrost heaters shall be factory pre-wired to the termination box.
3. A single termination box for motors and defrost heaters is acceptable.
F. Thermostats:
1. Supply and install one accurate thermostat for each condensing unit with a range
suitable for temperatures as shown on the drawings. Thermostats shall be
demonstrated to be accurate to 1oF and shall have a maximum differential of 2oF.
Locate thermostats 8 feet above the finish floor with thermostat bulbs as close as
possible to the return air of the controlled air units.
2. Provide one wall mounted 12" diameter thermometer for each room. Locate
thermometer per Construction Manager's direction.
A. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location.
B. Electrical cabinet shall be isolated from the air stream with a removable access panel
interior to the outer service panel. There shall be provisions in this cabinet for component
mounting, wire routing and high voltage isolation. Motors, heaters, and control wiring shall

be harnessed and provided with terminal block connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all air units and accessories as indicated on drawings and/or as scheduled and
according to manufacturer's installation instructions. Adjust thermal expansion valves on
all air units to have superheat temperatures between 10oF and 15oF.
B. Install air units to allow for adequate service access. Coordinate with other trades to
assure air unit does not infringe upon access or service clearances of other equipment
pallet racking and or other trades.
C. Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operate equipment to
demonstrate capability and compliance with temperature requirements.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 17900 PAINTING AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all material, labor, tools and equipment to prepare, prime and paint all exposed
non-plated black steel surfaces as follows:
B. Metal equipment supports
C. Items not painted for this project:
1. Condenser Units
2. Air Units
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product description and list of materials.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.3 PERFORMANCE
A. If equipment is painted or coatings are to be applied they shall be applied in such a
manner to avoid cracking, chipping and peeling.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Rust-Oleum, ZRC Products
2.2 GENERAL FEATURES
A. Surface Prep: SP-3
B. Primer: Rust-Oleum X60 Bare Metal Primer
C. Top Coat: Rust-Oleum Color Enamel. Match original Manufacturer color.
D. Refrigerant and condensate pipe hangers, air unit hangers, threaded rod, nuts and
washers shall be electroplated zinc or hot dipped galvanized, contractor's option. Un-
insulated copper tubing hangers shall be copper plated.
E. Should minor scratches occur to the galvanized finish on condensing unit casings, the
damaged area shall be touched up with zinc rich paint such as ZRC supplied by the
Refrigeration Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Painted surfaces requiring touch up shall be clean and free of dust, dirt or rust.
B. Paint all bare metal surfaces with one coat of bare metal primer and touch-up prior to finish
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 17900 – Paintings and Coatings
coat.
C. Finish coat shall be applied in two coats, if required, to give full coverage after installation
is complete.
D. Protect all adjacent equipment from over-spray.
E. Remove all discarded materials from jobsite.
END OF SECTION
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 17900 – Paintings and Coatings
SECTION 17910 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Insulation of refrigeration piping, condensate drain piping will be the responsibility of the
Refrigeration Contractor (RC).
A. ASTM C 534, Type I – Tubular
B. ASTM D 1056, 2B1 MILC3133C (MIL STD 670B), Grade SBE 3
C. MILP15280J, FORM T
D. ASTM E 84·91A CAN/ULCS102 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E. NFPA 225 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
F. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
G. CGSB CAN 251.40M80
H. UL 94 5V
I. MEA 9685M
K. ASTM C1136 Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation
L. MICA National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install all insulating materials and accessories as specified or as required for a
complete installation. The following types of insulation are specified in this section:
1. Suction and Liquid Line Pipe Insulation
2. Equipment Insulation
3. Condensate Drain Piping Insulation
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed: shafts, furred spaces, space above finished ceilings, utility tunnels and crawl
spaces. All other areas, including walk-through tunnels, shall be considered as exposed.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Ten days after the award of the contract, the Refrigeration Contractor will provide to the
Construction Manager submittals of all insulating materials to be used on the project
including adhesives, fastening methods, fitting materials along with MSDS data sheets and
intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating
density, thermal characteristics, jacket types, vapor barriers, and manufacturer's
installation instructions.
The awarded contractor will be required to provide to the CM within 10 days after approval
of insulation submittals, a sample of refrigerant pipe insulation with vapor barrier and PVC
jacketing installed. The sample will consist of a 1-5/8" standard radius 90 degree elbow
soldered to two 12" long tubing sections, insulated as per specifications and manufacturers
recommendations. The joint at the 90 degree elbow will be a butt joint using adhesives.
Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 17910 – Refrigeration System Insulation
The termination at each tubing end will also be prepared with PVC end caps.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials or accessories containing asbestos will not be accepted.
B. Use composite insulation systems (insulation, jackets, sealants, mastics, and adhesives)
that have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less,
with the following exceptions:
1. Pipe insulation which is not located in an air plenum may have a flame spread
rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 150.
2.2 INSULATION AND JACKETS
A. Manufacturers: Trymer, Dow, Extol, Knauf, Owens-Corning, Pittsburg Corning or approved
equal.
B. Insulating materials shall be fire retardant, moisture and mildew resistant, and vermin
proof. Insulation shall be suitable to receive jackets, adhesives and coatings as indicated.
C. Insulation:
1. Pipes, fittings and valves – unless specified otherwise shall be Trymer 2000 or
equal.
D. Vapor Barrier:
1. All pipe insulation shall be covered with a ‘double vapor barrier’ system, consisting
of sheet-type vapor barrier applied directly over the pipe insulation, plus the
weather jacketing, fully sealed as a secondary vapor barrier.
E. PVC Fitting Covers and Jackets:
1. White PVC material, gloss finish one side, semi-gloss other side, FS LP-535D,
Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. Ultraviolet inhibited indoor/outdoor grade to be
used where exposed to high humidity, ultraviolet radiation, in kitchens or food
processing areas or installed outdoors. PVC jacket wall thickness shall be 0.020
inches (20 mil) inside the refrigerated spaces and below the roof, and 0.030 inches
(30 mil) above the roof. Approved manufacturers: Ceel-Co, Topline Products,
P.A.G. Industries, Manville Proto Co.
F. Materials
1. Suction and Liquid Pipe Insulation: Trymer 2000 modified isocyanurate or
equivalent foam, pre-formed for pipes; having a foam density of 2.1 pounds per
cubic foot and an aged mean thermal conductivity of 0.19 BTUH per square foot
per 1F per inch thickness at 75F mean temperature, compressive strength of 24
psi.
2. Condensate Drain Pipe Insulation: Fiberglass pipe insulation of heavy density resin
bonded inorganic glass fibers. Insulation shall be manufactured in preformed,
hinged sections, with a smooth, reinforced, wrinkle resistant ASJ vapor barrier
jacketing.
3. Urethane Foam: Insta-Foam Products, Inc., or equal slow rise urethane foam.
4. Joint Sealer: Childers Products Co. CP-76.
5. Vapor Barrier: Multifoil laminate 12/25/12 Polyester/Aluminum/Polyester film as
manufactured by TDC; perm rating essentially 0.0. Insul-Therm Intl (323) 728-
0558.
a. Factory pre-cut for the insulation circumfrance and minimum 2” edge overlap
with factory applied Self-Sealing Lap (SSL).
b. Miltifoil laminate Tape for longitudinal and butt joints.
c. Alternate – Dow Saran 540 industrial vapor retarder film, with perm rating of
0.02 maximum.
6. PVC Jacket: CEEL-CO Ceel-Tite 300 Series UVR PVC jacket and fitting covers.
a. Liquid and Suction, Condensate Drain – White
7. Vapor Retarder Mastic: Childers Products Co. CP-32.
8. Fiberglass Fabric: J.P. Stevens Glass-Tex, 8.5 ounces per square yard.
9. Finish Mastic: Childers Products Co. , CP-35
10. Silicone Adhesive: Dow Corning 999A-1 silicone adhesive or equivalent.
11. Foam board adhesive: PL300 Foamboard adhesive.
12. Pre-formed valve insulation: Cook Bros. Insulation Inc or Insul-Therm Intl. Note:
pre-formed valve insulation may need modifications to permit required valve
operation.
13. Insulation Inserts and Pipe shields: Manufactures: B-Line, Pipe Shields, Value
Engineered Products, or shop fabricated with the Construction Manager’s
approval.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied,
and shall be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are
applied.
B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications specified.
C. Bedding compounds to be non-shrinking and permanently flexible.
D. Vapor barrier: Prior to installing PVC jacketing on refrigerant suction piping, paint all
elastomeric insulation with one coat of water based latex enamel coating such as
Armstrong WB Armaflex paint or approved equal. Condensate piping does not require
vapor barrier paint, but will be installed with white PVC jacket.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate, and install piping and equipment insulation using only skilled technicians
experienced in the application of insulation.
B. Install insulation, jacketing, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and under ambient temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer. Surfaces
to be insulated must be clean and dry.
C. Do not insulate piping, systems, or equipment which is specified to be pressure tested or
inspected, until testing, inspection and any necessary repairs have been successfully
completed.
D. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids
will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates,
un-insulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. Install with
longitudinal joints facing wall or ceiling.
E. Use full length material (as delivered from manufacturer) wherever possible. Scrap
piecing of insulation or pieces cut undersize and stretched to fit will not be accepted.
F. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and openings except where fire rated
penetration materials require interruption of insulation. Vapor barriers shall be maintained
continuous through all penetrations.
G. Install pipe identification markers to refrigerant and condensate piping with direction arrows
that receives PVC jacketing. Brady and Seton pipe markers are acceptable. Pipe
identification markers to be installed every 20 feet
H. Provide a complete vapor barrier for insulation on the following systems:
1. Refrigerant suction pipe, fittings and valves.
2. Refrigerant liquid pipe, fittings and valves (exterior only).
3. Suction accumulators.
4. Air unit condensate drain piping.
3.2 PIPING, VALVE, AND FITTING INSULATION
A. General:
1. Install insulation with butt joints and longitudinal seams adhered and closed tightly.
Provide minimum 2” lap on jacket seams, firmly cemented with lap adhesive.
2. Install insulation continuous through pipe hangers and supports with hangers and
insulation shields on the exterior of insulation. Where a vapor barrier is not
required, hangers and supports may be attached directly to piping with insulation
completely covering hanger or support and jacket sealed at support rod
penetration. Where riser clamps are required to be attached directly to piping
requiring vapor barrier, extend insulation and vapor barrier jacketing/coating
completely around the riser clamp.
3.3 INSULATION PIPE SHIELDS:
A. Provide insulation inserts and pipe shields at all hanger and support locations. Pipe
insulation shields shall be 120 degree, 16 gauge galvanized steel and shall be a minimum
of 12" long. Shields are to have the edges ground smooth to prevent tearing the jacket
material. Shields are to be installed on the outside of the insulation jacket unless the
contractor prefers, with the Construction Manager’s approval, to install under the PVC
jacket. Pipe insulation shields must be taped at both ends using white 2" wide PVC tape to
prevent shield movement.
B. Fittings and Valves:
1. Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties may be insulated with
factory molded or built up insulation of the same thickness as adjoining insulation.
Cover fittings with pre-molded PVC fitting covers. Secure pre-molded PVC fitting
covers using weld adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. No staples
are to be used.
C. Protective Jackets:
1. Provide a protective white PVC jacket on all interior and exterior suction piping,
exterior liquid piping and interior and exterior condensate piping. Lap seams and
joints a minimum of 2” and continuously seal with PVC welding solvent as
recommended by jacket manufacturer. Expansion joints in the jacket required for
expansion and contraction shall be every 18’. Fabricate expansion joints by
overlapping PVC by a minimum of 6” and seal with white silicone caulking rather
than weld adhesive. For sections where vapor barrier is not required and jacket
requires routine removal, Four inch white PVC tape may be used.
2. Where defrost condensate or refrigerant piping is piped below the bottom of air
unit drain pans in fork truck traffic areas, apply 2” wide safety yellow or orange
tape completely around piping at 2 ft. intervals to alert fork lift drivers.
D. Pipe Insulation Schedule:
1. Pipe insulation thickness recommendations for controlling outer insulation surface
condensation for new piping as indicated in the following schedule:
Duty Line Size Insulation Wall Thickness
Refrigerant Liquid Piping 5/8" OD -1-3/8" OD 3/4" (Outdoors Only)
Cooler Refrigerant Suction Piping 1-1/8” OD -3-1/8" OD 1-1/2” (Outdoors)
1” (Indoors)
Freezer Refrigerant Suction Piping 1-1/8" OD -3-1/8" OD 2” (Outdoors)
1” (Indoors)
Condensate Drain Piping with heat tape - Fiberglass Insulation with PVC Jacket 1-1/2” (Indoors)
Condensate Drain Piping with heat tape - Fiberglass Insulation with PVC Jacket 1” (Outdoors)
END OF SECTION

Specification Book PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Specification Book PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION

Project No. 101408

All concepts and arrangements disclosed or presented

Designing & Building Innovative & Efficient Food Facilities.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01010 - Summary of Work

Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System

Section 05120 - Structural Steel

Section 06112 - Rough Carpentry

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08111 - Hollow Metal Doors, Frames & Windows

Cavalier Produce Page 1 of 3 Table of Contents

Section 09260 - Gypsum Board

Section 10160 - Toilet Compartments

Section 11163 - Loading Dock Equipment

Section 12484 - Entrance Mats & Grids

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Section 13070 - Thermal Insulation

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION

Section 15010 - General Requirements

Section 16010 - General Requirements

Cavalier Produce Page 2 of 3 Table of Contents

16300 - Refrigeration/Mechanical Equipment & Connections

DIVISION 17B – REFRIGERATION FREON

Section 17010 - Basic Refrigeration Requirements

Cavalier Produce Page 3 of 3 Table of Contents

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 01010 – Summary of Work

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 3 01010 – Summary of Work

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 3 of 3 01010 – Summary of Work

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 1 01030 – Bid Alternate

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 1 01050 – Field Engineering

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 3 01300 – Submittals

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 3 of 3 01300 – Submittals

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 2 01700 – Contract Closeout

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 2 01700 – Contract Closeout

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

2.1 FORMING MATERIALS

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Footings & Foundation Walls 3,000 psi

Interior Slabs-on-Grade 3,500 psi

Metal Stair Pan Fill. 3,500 psi

Above Grade Construction 3,000 psi

Exterior Slabs-on-Grade (UNO on Construction Drawings) 2,500 psi

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 3 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 4 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 5 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 6 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 7 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 8 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 9 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 10 of 10 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

3.1 PREPARATION OF PLACE OF DEPOSIT

2.1 MASONRY UNITS

3.1 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

3.3 LAYING OF MASONRY

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 1 of 5 05120 – Structural Steel

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 2 of 5 05120 – Structural Steel

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 3 of 5 05120 – Structural Steel

Cavalier Produce, Project No. 101408 Page 4 of 5 05120 – Structural Steel